86092 Catalog

2014-07-05

: Pdf 86092-Catalog 86092-Catalog 785901 Batch5 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 292 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
- TERMS AND CONDITIONS/WARRANTY
  - Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale
  - Square D Warranty Surgelogic TVSS Protective Systems
- BILL OF MATERIALS
  - Detailed Bill of Materials for 31751120
SWITCHBOARD
PANELBOARD
DISCONNECT
- MANUALS
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
- MANUALS

Behavioral Health Building

Operation and Maintenance Manual

Factory Order #: 31751120

12-17-2013

Kansas City, KS

Distributor:

Stanion Wholesale Electric

Contractor / Installer:

Torgeson Electric

Consulting Engineer:

PEC

Isaac Anderson

Sales Representative

Rick Simpson

Project Manager

North American Operating Division

(417) 887-2307

rick.simpson@schneider-electric.com

Make the most of your energy

Table of Contents

GENERAL INFORMATION

TERMS AND CONDITIONS/WARRANTY

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Square D Warranty Surgelogic TVSS Protective Systems

BILL OF MATERIALS

Detailed Bill of Materials for 31751120

SWITCHBOARD

DRAWINGS

MSB

MDPA

MANUALS

Power-Style QED Switchboards Instruction Bulletin

NEMA - Instructions for Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

SDSA3650 Surge Protective Device Instruction Bulletin

POWERLOGIC MONITORING

PowerLogic PM800 Series Power Meter Installation Manual

PowerLogic PM800 Quick Reference Manual

MAIN BREAKER

Powerpact R Frame Circuit Breaker Instruction Bulletin

TRIP UNIT

Micrologic’ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

PANELBOARD

DRAWINGS

Panelboards

MANUALS

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

NEMA- Instructions for Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

NQ PANELBOARD - Recommended Spare Parts

DISCONNECT

MANUALS

General Duty Safety Switches Instruction Bulletin

GTK03 Equipment Grounding Bar Kit - Instruction Bulletin

PKOGTA2 Service/Equipment Grounding Lug - Instruction Bulletin

QO and QOB Circuit Breakers Catalog

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

MANUALS

IMA Surge Protective Device Instruction Bulletin

IMA Surge Protective Device Display Replacement Instruction Bulletin

IMA Surge Protective Device Module Replacement Instruction Bulletin

0100PL0043R12/12

12/2012

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Proposal-based Projects

Prices subject to change without notice.

12/2012

™

Note

The following Conditions of Sale are subject to change. All transactions for all products sold by

Schneider Electric USA ("Schneider Electric"), including all Schneider Electric brand products, are

subject to the latest published Conditions of Sale of Schneider Electric and to any Special Conditions of

Sale which may be contained in applicable Schneider Electric quotations and acknowledgments.

Schneider Electric Standard conditions of Sale will apply in all transactions between customers and

Schneider Electric, unless the Proposal-based Project Conditions of Sale, apply as defined in the

following paragraph.

Proposal-based

Projects

Definitions

Transactions that exhibit some or all of the following attributes: Unique customer requirements that are

typically negotiated and quoted, requires approval drawings and project management by Schneider

Electric, and for which there is a specific direct-ship address.

Governing

Provisions and

Acceptance

All quotations are subject to these conditions of sale. Acceptance of an order by Schneider Electric shall

be expressly conditioned on Purchaser's assent to these conditions. Purchaser's direction to proceed

with engineering, manufacture or shipment by Schneider Electric shall be deemed evidence of this

assent. No modified or other conditions will be applicable unless those conditions are so stated in

Schneider Electric's proposal or are specifically agreed to in writing and signed by an authorized official

of Schneider Electric. Failure to object to provisions contained in any Purchase Order or other

communication from the Purchaser (including, without limitation, penalty clauses of any kind) shall not

be construed as a waiver of these Conditions nor an acceptance of any other provisions. These terms

are a complete statement of the parties' agreement and may only be modified in writing signed by both

parties. These terms may not be modified by course of dealing, course of performance or usage of

trade. These terms supersede all previous written or oral quotations, statements or agreements. Any

contract for sale by and between the parties shall be governed by and construed according to the laws

of the State of Illinois without regard to its rules on the conflict of laws. The Convention on the

International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.

Quotations Quotations shall be valid for no more than thirty (30) days from the date quotation is communicated from

seller to purchaser, unless otherwise stated in the quotation. All quotations are subject to change by

Schneider Electric Company at any time upon notice to Purchaser. Quotations are made based on

Schneider Electric's interpretation of the plans and specifications submitted to Schneider Electric by the

Purchaser. It is Purchaser's obligation to review the quotation carefully and to immediately advise

Schneider Electric of any differing interpretation Purchaser has so any necessary change can be made.

Order Entry A complete, signed purchase order must be received before entry of an order into Schneider Electric's

system. Considerable detail is involved in the manufacture of power equipment. To facilitate timely

shipment, complete details and information, including Purchaser's requested on-site dates must be

provided at the time of order entry. Shipment dates are approximate and are based upon timely receipt

of all necessary information from the Purchaser. Lack of complete information may result in delays of

drawings or manufacture. Such delays shall relieve Schneider Electric from compliance with the quoted

delivery dates and may lead to price escalation. Failure to provide a complete signed purchase order

within twenty (20) days of notification of award may result in renegotiation of price or shipment dates.

4 of 292

Prices subject to change without notice.

12/2012

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Proposal-based Projects

Approval

Drawings

When required by a specific Purchase Order, drawings will be submitted for approval per agreed upon

schedules, and price policy, below, to assure Schneider Electric has designed the equipment as

described in Purchaser's specifications, as modified by Schneider Electric's quotation. If at time of drawing

approval Schneider Electric has not designed the equipment to meet the specifications, as modified by

Schneider Electric's quotation, Schneider Electric will make the appropriate changes at no charge to

Purchaser. Where the Purchaser's specification is not definitive, Schneider Electric shall have the right to

design the product in line with good commercial practice, without further obligation to Purchaser. If at

drawing approval, Purchaser makes changes outside the design as stated in the specifications, such

changes shall be treated as a change order as provided below.

Price Policy Quoted prices are firm provided: A) The order is received with complete engineering details and is

released for manufacture within sixty (60) calendar days from the originally anticipated release date. B) All

required approval drawings are returned and equipment released by Purchaser no later than sixty (60)

calendar days from the original date of issuance of approval drawings by Schneider Electric. The returned

drawings must be released for manufacture for shipment on the agreed date. Drawing re-submittals which

are required for any reason other than to correct Schneider Electric errors will not extend the sixty (60) day

deadline. If the Purchaser causes delay of shipment in any way or returns approval drawings beyond the

time stated above, Purchaser may be subject to charges which shall not exceed 2% of the purchase order

price for each full month or fraction thereof that shipment is delayed, as compensation to Schneider

Electric for expenses created by such delay and not as a penalty. In addition to the 2% charge per month,

if shipment is delayed through the fault of Purchaser for more than 180 days from the original date of

issuance of approval drawings, the price may be subject to revision.

Pricing-

Purchaser

Changes

All prices cover a bill of material as described in Schneider Electric specifications or quotations to be

designed and manufactured to Schneider Electric standard designs, unless otherwise agreed in writing

between the parties. Purchaser may make minor changes not affecting the time or cost of performance

without charge prior to the start of manufacture. If any changes are requested by the Purchaser after

submission of the original Purchase Order which affect the cost or time of performance, additional billing

will be made with the amount of price adder dependent on the change and status of the order when the

change is made. Changes may also result in an extension of time for shipment. All changes will be agreed

to by the parties, in writing, prior to implementation. Purchaser's rescheduling shipment will be considered

a change. All expenses incurred by Schneider Electric in connection with the storage of equipment,

including demurrage, packing, storage charges, insurance and handling charges by Schneider Electric will

be paid by the Purchaser upon submission of invoices by Schneider Electric. Schneider Electric will issue

price changes for any change requested by the Purchaser that affects modification of equipment, changes

the bills of material, engineering or drawings or delivery schedule as follows: A) If Purchaser makes a

change to an order prior to being released to engineering, the net price will be adjusted by re-pricing the

equipment with prices in effect at the time of the change. A commensurate delay in the shipping date will

be based on the changes involved. B) For changes made after the order is released to engineering, the

net price and ship date will be adjusted as described in paragraph A above. An additional charge based

on Schneider Electric standard engineering billing charges and cost of parts ($250 minimum) will be made

to cover any extra engineering and drafting, scrap or rework of parts, or cost of modification. C) If during

the drawing approval process, the Purchaser makes changes outside the design covered by the

specifications, Schneider Electric will be reimbursed as described in paragraph A and B above, plus any

additional charges for any extra cost incurred as a direct result of the changes and allowed a

commensurate delay in shipping date based on the changes involved. Changes to the order can not be

processed until a formal signed change order is received from the Purchaser.

Substitutions Schneider Electric may furnish suitable substitutes for material unobtainable because of priorities or

regulations established by governmental authority or non-availability of materials from suppliers, provided

such substitutions do not adversely affect the technical soundness of the equipment. Schneider Electric

assumes no liability for deviation from published dimensions and descriptive information not essential to

proper performance of the product.

5 of 292

Prices subject to change without notice.

12/2012

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Proposal-based Projects

Taxes Any manufacturer's tax, retailer's tax, occupation tax, use tax, sales tax, excise tax, (except federal excise

tax on vehicles), duty, customs, inspecting or testing fee, or other tax, fee or charge of any nature

whatsoever, imposed by any governmental authority or measured by any transaction between Schneider

Electric and Purchaser, shall be paid by the Purchaser in addition to the prices quoted or invoiced, and

such charges will appear as a separate line item on the invoice. In the event Schneider Electric will be

required to pay any such tax, fee, or charge, Purchaser shall reimburse Schneider Electric or, in lieu of

such payment, Purchaser shall supply Schneider Electric at the time the order is submitted with an

exemption certificate or other document acceptable to the tax authority. Purchase Orders must state the

existence and amount of any such tax, fee or charge for which Purchaser claims an exemption.

Terms of

Payment

Acceptance of all Purchase Orders is subject to Purchaser meeting Schneider Electric credit standards.

Terms are subject to change for failure to meet such standards. Terms are net thirty (30) days from date

of invoice of each shipment, unless otherwise stated in Schneider Electric's quotation. For an authorized

distributor or authorized reseller order, applicable terms of payment are stated in the quotation or

applicable discount schedule. Schneider Electric reserves the right at any time to demand full or partial

payment before proceeding with a contract of sale if, in its sole judgment, as a result of changes in the

financial condition of the Purchaser the terms of payment originally specified are no longer justified.

Progress

Payments/

Payment Term

All proposal-based projects are Net 30 days from date of invoice of each shipment. On projects exceeding

$1,000,000 Net, progress payments are payable according to the following milestones:

•30% Release to manufacturing

•70% (balance) due at shipment

Payments If delivery is delayed or deferred by the Purchaser beyond the scheduled date, payment shall be due in full

when Schneider Electric is prepared to ship. The equipment may be stored at the risk and expense of the

Purchaser. If the Purchaser defaults when any payment is due, then the whole contract price shall

become due and payable upon demand, or Schneider Electric at its option, without prejudice to other

lawful remedies, may defer delivery or cancel the contract for sale. If Purchaser become insolvent, or

bankrupt or in the event any proceeding is brought against the Purchaser, voluntarily or involuntarily under

the bankruptcy or any insolvency law, Schneider Electric may cancel any order then outstanding at any

time and recover its proper cancellation charges from the Purchaser or the Purchaser's estate.

Delivery F.O.B. Point of Shipment

When the Schneider Electric quotation is based on delivery F.O.B. point of shipment, freight prepaid and

allowed for delivery within the continental United States, Product is sold F.O.B. point of shipment, freight

prepaid and allowed for orders over $2000 net. Delivery by Schneider Electric to the point of shipment

constitutes delivery to the Purchaser; and title and all risk of loss or damage in transit shall pass to the

Purchaser at time of delivery at the F.O.B. point. Schneider Electric is not responsible for breakage or

delays by carrier after having received "in good order" receipts from the carrier. Purchaser is responsible

for pursuing any damage claims with the carrier. For orders under $2000 net the above terms apply

except freight is prepaid not allowed. No allowance will be made in lieu of transportation if the Purchaser

accepts shipment at factory, warehouse or freight station or otherwise supplies its own transportation.

Freight prepaid is defined as: a) Shipments to destinations within the continental United States to the

accessible common carrier point nearest the first destination. b) Shipments to U.S. destinations outside

the continental United States shall be to the common carrier free delivery point in the United States

nearest the original port of embarkation. All charges associated with F.A.S., C.I.F., or other charges such

as pier transfer, lift, ocean freight, and marine or war insurance shall be paid by the Purchaser, unless

otherwise specifically agreed in a specific Purchase Order. In no event will Schneider Electric be

responsible for demurrage or detention charges.

Delivery: F.O.B. Destination

When the Schneider Electric quotation is based on delivery F.O.B. Destination, for shipments for delivery

within the continental United States, Schneider Electric will retain title and all risk of loss or damage in

transit to the common carrier free delivery point in the United States nearest the first destination for a price

addition of 2% of the net price. If the Purchaser elects this Option, Purchaser's obligations shall be as

follows: a) Purchaser shall have the responsibility of inspecting the equipment for apparent loss or

damage immediately upon its arrival at the free delivery point. b) In the event of apparent shipping loss or

damage, Purchaser shall make written notation of the loss on the carrier's delivery receipt and, within 72

hours of delivery shall notify the Schneider Electric Customer Information Center. Purchaser shall not

remove product from the point of examination and shall retain the shipping container and packing

6 of 292

Prices subject to change without notice.

12/2012

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Proposal-based Projects

material. Purchaser shall request the carrier to make an inspection and send Schneider Electric a copy of

the carrier's inspection report. c) In the event of concealed damage which occurred during transit and is

discovered by the Purchaser after delivery, Purchaser shall report such damage immediately, but in no

event later than 15 days after delivery, to the delivering carrier, and within 72 hours of discovery, shall

notify the local Schneider Electric field office. If such notification is not made, Schneider Electric shall not

be liable for loss or damage in transit.

Shipment and Routing

Schneider Electric shall select the point of origin of shipment, the method of transportation and the routing

of the shipment. Purchasers that request expedited or special modes of transportation or routing involving

air, premium or any other non-standard Schneider Electric shipping shall be assessed additional charges

for shipping, handling, freight and expediting. Any rebates, allowances, discounts, or incentives received

by Schneider Electric from its carriers shall be retained by Schneider Electric. All prices include domestic

packaging only. When other than domestic packaging is required, contact your local Schneider Electric

field office. Purchaser specified packaging and marking may be subject to additional charges.

Shortages Claims for shortages or errors must be submitted to Schneider Electric within 30 days after invoice date,

and failure to give such notice shall constitute unqualified acceptance and a waiver of all such claims by

the Purchaser.

Installments Schneider Electric reserves the right to make shipments in installments, unless otherwise expressly

stipulated in a specific Purchase Order; and all such installments when separately invoiced shall be paid

for when due per invoice without regard to subsequent shipments. Delay in shipment of any installment

shall not relieve Purchaser of its obligation to accept remaining shipments.

Force Majeure Schneider Electric shall not be liable for any damages as a result of any delays due to any causes beyond

Schneider Electric's control, including, without limitation, an act of God; act of Purchaser or Schneider

Electric supplier; embargo or other governmental act, regulation or request; fire; accident; strike;

slowdown; flood; fuel or energy shortage; sabotage; war; riot; delay in transportation and inability to obtain

necessary labor, materials or manufacturing facilities from usual sources. In the event of any such delay,

the date of delivery shall be extended for a period of time reasonably necessary to overcome the effect of

such delay.

Standard

Warranty

Schneider Electric warrants equipment manufactured by it and sold through authorized sales channels to

be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 12 months from the issuance of the customer

provisional acceptance letter or 18 months from the invoice date of the last component of the order

whichever occurs first. If within such period, any such equipment shall be proved to Schneider Electric's

satisfaction to be non-conforming, such equipment shall be repaired or replaced at Schneider Electric's

option. This warranty shall not apply (a) to equipment not manufactured by Schneider Electric, (b) to

equipment that has been repaired or altered by other than Schneider Electric so as, in its judgment, to

affect the same adversely, or (c) to equipment that has been subjected to negligence, accident, or

damage by circumstances beyond Schneider Electric's control, or improper operation, maintenance or

storage, or to other than normal use or service. With respect to equipment not manufactured by Schneider

Electric, the warranty obligations of Schneider Electric shall in all respects conform and be limited to the

warranty actually extended to Schneider Electric by its supplier. Non-conforming products must be

returned at Schneider Electric's expense for evaluation unless this is waived in writing. Replacement

products may be new or reconditioned. The foregoing warranties do not cover reimbursement for labor,

transportation, removal, installation, temporary power, or any other expenses that may be incurred in

connection with repair or replacement. Any part or component changed or repaired in the context of the

contractual warranty will itself benefit of a 3 month warranty but shall not cause the warranty duration of

the overall System / Solution to be extended.

Optional

Warranties

(Only available on equipment to be located in the U.S.)

Option 1—Extended: 2 to 5 years from Shipment. If requested by the Purchaser, and specifically accepted

in writing by Schneider Electric, the standard warranty will be extended to two (2) years from date of

invoice for a price addition of 1% of the net face value of the Purchase Order, will be extended to three (3)

years from date of invoice for a price addition of 3% of the net face value of the Purchase Order, will be

extended to four (4) years from date of invoice for a price addition of 5% of the net face value of the

Purchase Order, or will be extended to five (5) years from date of invoice for a price addition of 7% of the

net face value of the Purchase Order.

Option 2—Special Warranty: If requested by the Purchaser, and specifically accepted in writing by

7 of 292

Prices subject to change without notice.

12/2012

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Proposal-based Projects

Schneider Electric, the standard warranty will be extended, for a price addition of 3% of the net face value

of the Purchase Order, to cover reimbursement of the direct costs of: a) Removal of non-conforming

equipment or part thereof; b) Transporting equipment or parts to and from the place of repair;

c) Off-loading of truck and reinstallation at the original site. Such special warranty, which may be chosen

to cover a period not exceeding that of the standard or extended warranty (see above) selected, will not

include the cost of providing temporary power or removing or replacing other apparatus or structures, or

costs of transportation beyond a common carrier free delivery point in the continental United States.

Further, the obligation of Schneider Electric for expenses and costs arising under this special warranty

coverage will not exceed 50% of the net invoice price on the equipment being repaired. This warranty

does not change or affect the allocation of risk or loss during shipment.

Option 3—Extended Warranty: Preventative Maintenance Agreements. If requested by the Purchaser,

and specifically accepted by Schneider Electric, a Preventative Maintenance Agreement is available to

provide preventative maintenance on equipment covered by the agreement. Terms of the preventative

maintenance agreement shall be as defined in a separate Services Agreement agreed to by the parties.

Software Any software or computer information, in whatever form, provided with equipment manufactured by

Schneider Electric is licensed to Purchaser solely pursuant to standard licenses of Schneider Electric or

its supplier of such software or computer information, which licenses are, hereby incorporated by

reference. Schneider Electric does not warrant that such software or computer information will operate

error free or without interruption, and warrants only that during the warranty period applicable to the

equipment that the software will perform its essential functions. If such software or computer information

fails to conform to such warranty, Schneider Electric will, at its option, provide an update to correct the

non-conformance or replace the software or computer information with the latest available version

containing a correction. Schneider Electric shall have no other obligation to provide updates or revisions.

Limitations These disclaimers and limitations of remedies apply to all warranties offered to Purchaser and to all

Purchase Orders. The warranties set forth above are exclusive and in lieu of all other expressed or

implied warranties (except warranties of title), including, but not limited to implied warranties of

merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Except as may be expressly provided in an

authorized writing by Schneider Electric, Schneider Electric shall not be subject to any other obligations or

liabilities whatsoever other than as stated above with respect to equipment sold or services rendered by

Schneider Electric. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein contained Schneider Electric

Company, its contractors and suppliers of any tier, shall not be liable in contract, in tort (including

negligence or strict liability) or otherwise for lost time, lost profits, or special, indirect, incidental

or consequential damages of any kind whatsoever. The remedies of the Purchaser are exclusive and

the total cumulative liability of Schneider Electric, its contractors and suppliers of any tier, with respect to

this contract or anything done in connection therewith, such as the use of any product covered by or

furnished under the contract, whether in contract, in tort (including negligence or strict liability) or

otherwise, shall not exceed the price of the product, part, or service on which such liability is based.

Intellectual

Property

As to equipment proposed and furnished by Schneider Electric, Schneider Electric shall defend any suit or

proceeding brought against Purchaser so far as based on a claim that such equipment constitutes an

infringement of any copyright, trademark or patent of the United States.

This obligation shall be effective only if Purchaser shall have made all payments then due hereunder and

if Schneider Electric is notified promptly in writing and given authority, information, and assistance at

Schneider Electric's expense for the defense of the same. In the event the use of such equipment by

Purchaser is enjoined in such a suit, Schneider Electric shall, at its expense, and at its sole option, either

(a) procure for the Purchaser the right to continue using such equipment (b) modify such equipment to

render it non-infringing (c) replace such equipment with non-infringing equipment, or (d) refund the

purchase price (less depreciation) and the transportation and installation costs of such equipment.

Schneider Electric will not be responsible for any compromise or settlement made without its written

consent. The foregoing states the entire liability of Schneider Electric for patent, trademark or copyright

infringement, and in no event shall Schneider Electric be liable if any infringement charge is based on the

use of Schneider Electric equipment for a purpose other than that for which it was sold by Schneider

Electric. As to any equipment furnished by Schneider Electric to Purchaser and manufactured in

accordance with designs proposed by Purchaser, the Purchaser shall indemnify Schneider Electric

against any award made against Schneider Electric for patent, trademark, or copyright infringements.

8 of 292

Schneider Electric USA, Inc.

1415 S. Roselle Road

Palatine, IL 60067 USA

1-888-778-2733

www.schneider-electric.us

Square D™ and Schneider Electric™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric.

Replaces 0100PL0043R11/11

Prices subject to change without notice.

12/2012

Witness of

Tests and

Factory

Inspections

Normal production schedules do not provide the opportunity for Purchaser to witness routine factory tests

on equipment or make factory inspections. Witnessing of tests or factory inspections by the Purchaser

may result in delays of production for which Schneider Electric will not be responsible. Witness testing and

factory inspections must be requested at time of quotation and confirmed at order entry. Standard

Schneider Electric factory testing and inspection will apply. Schneider Electric will notify Purchaser

fourteen (14) calendar days prior to scheduled witness testing or inspection. In the event Purchaser is

unable to attend, the Parties may mutually agree on a rescheduled date. However, Schneider Electric, at

its sole option, may consider the witness tests and/or inspection waived, and ship and invoice the

Products. Purchaser will be responsible for paying for all scheduled witness testing, whether or not

Purchaser attends.

Return of

Equipment

No equipment may be returned without first obtaining Schneider Electric’s written permission and

a returned material identification tag. Returned equipment must be of current manufacture, in the

original packaging, unused, undamaged and in saleable condition, securely packed to reach Schneider

Electric without damage and labeled with the return authorization number. Any cost incurred by Schneider

Electric to put equipment in first class condition will be charged to the Purchaser. Returns will be credited

at price invoiced by Schneider Electric less a restocking fee of 25% invoice price. Special Order and

Custom equipment is not returnable. Schneider Electric shall bear the cost of returns resulting from

Schneider Electric error, and method and route of return will be at the discretion of Schneider Electric.

Costs incurred by failure to follow Schneider Electric direction will be borne by the Purchaser.

Nuclear

Applications

Terms and

Conditions

Unless otherwise agreed in writing by a duly authorized representative of Schneider Electric, products

sold hereunder are not intended for use in or in connection with any nuclear facility or activity. If so used,

Schneider Electric disclaims all liability for any damage, injury or contamination; and Purchaser shall

indemnify Schneider Electric against any such liability, whether arising as a result of breach of contract,

warranty or tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

Patterns and

Tools

Notice will be given if special patterns or tools are required to complete any order. Charges for such

patterns or tools do not convey title thereto or the right to remove them from Schneider Electric's plant. If

patterns or tools are not used for a period of two years, Schneider Electric shall have the right to scrap

them without notice.

Product

Notices

Purchaser shall promptly supply the user (including its employees) of the product with all Schneider

Electric supplied product notices, warnings, instructions, recommendations and similar materials.

Errors Schneider Electric reserves the right to correct errors or omissions in quotations, acknowledgments,

invoices, or other documents.

OSHA

Compliance

Compliance with OSHA or similar federal, state or local laws during the operation or use of the product(s)

is the sole responsibility of the Purchaser.

Termination Any order may be terminated by the Purchaser only upon written notice to Schneider Electric will be

subject the following cancellation schedule:

•20% after issuance of approval drawings

•50% at release to manufacturing

•100% at start of fabrication

Cancellation Schneider Electric shall have the right to cancel any order or contract at any time by written notice for any

material breach of the contract by the Purchaser, including material delays in releasing equipment for

manufacture or approval drawings and excessive changes to specifications or drawings.

Schneider Electric Conditions of Sale

Proposal-based Projects

9 of 292

Warranty to customers purchasing through authorized Square D distributors and customers purchasing directly

from Square D.

Protection Limits

With regard to any Square D Surgelogic TVSS protection system that has been properly installed in compliance

with all applicable electrical code requirements, Square D warrants the Surgelogic TVSS device to be free from

defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from date of invoice from Square D or its

authorized sales channel. If within the applicable warranty period purchaser discovers such item was not as

warranted and promptly notifies Square D in writing, Square D shall repair or replace the items or refund the purchase

price, at Square Dʼs option. This warranty shall not apply (a) to electrical equipment in which the TVSS is

installed, i.e. panelboards, motor control centers, busway, switchboards, switchgear, etc.. (b) to equipment not

manufactured by Square D, (c) to equipment which shall have been repaired or altered by others than Square D,

(d) to equipment which shall have been subjected to negligence, accident, or damage by circumstances beyond

Square Dʼs control, or to improper operation, maintenance or storage, or to other than normal use or service.

The foregoing warranty does not cover reimbursement for labor, transportation, removal, installation, or

other expenses which may be incurred in connection with repair or replacement.

Except as may be expressly provided in an authorized writing by Square D, Square D shall not be subject to any

other obligations or liabilities whatsoever with respect to equipment manufactured by Square D or services

rendered by Square D.

The foregoing warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other express and implied warranties except warranties

of title, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Limitation of Liability

Anything to the contrary herein contained notwithstanding, Square D Company, its contractors and

suppliers of any tier shall not be liable in contract, in tort (including negligence or strict liability) or

otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages whatsoever. The remedies of the

purchaser set forth herein are exclusive where so stated and the total cumulative liability of Square D, its

contractors and suppliers of any tier, whether in contract, in tort (including negligence or strict liability) or otherwise,

shall not exceed the price of the product or part on which such is based.

Square D Warranty

Surgelogic TVSS Protection Systems

05/06

10 of 292

11 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

BILL OF MATERIALS

001-00 1 Designation: MSB

SQUARE D CUSTOM QED SWITCHBOARD

QED Switchboard

---------------------------------

Square D Power Style Custom Switchboard

Designed and Tested in accordance with:

UL 891/NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE/NEMA PB-2

System Voltage - 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz

Source Description - Single Main

System Ampacity - 1600A

Bussing - Copper Plated with Silver

Neutral Bus - 100%

Max Available Fault Current (RMS) - 65kA

Enclosure - Type 3R Non-Walk-in

Accessibility: Front Only

Rodent Barrier

Exterior Paint Color - ANSI 49

Mimic Nameplate - Power Flow Plastic

Ground Lug provided for each device

Optional Copper Ground Bus

Lineup 1 BTU: 10448

Dimensions

---------------------------------

3 - 36" Wide Section(s)

1 - Dimensions: 108.00" W X 35.5" D X 91.5"H

3 - 35.5" Deep Enclosure(s)

Approximate Weight: 2553.00

Incoming Requirements

---------------------------------

Suitable for Use As Service Entrance

Entry Point: Left of Lineup, Through the

Bottom

Connection Type: Cable

Surge Arrestor

Power Meter - PM-820RD

3 CTs Power Meter - 3 phase 4 wire wye

208Y/120

Mains

---------------------------------

1 - 1600AS/1600AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Fixed Mounted Micrologic Circuit

Breaker: Type RG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

Nameplate - White Surface / Black Letters

Feeders

---------------------------------

1 - 1200AS/1200AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Fixed Mounted Micrologic Circuit

Breaker: Type RG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

Specials: 9-500MCM/PH&N

Special 9-500MCM/PH&N #: 5673538

2 - 200AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole UL,

Group Mounted Thermal Magnetic Circuit

Breaker: Type QG

12 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

1 - 1000AS/1000AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Group Mounted Electronic Trip

Circuit Breaker: Type PG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

1 - 600AS/600AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Group Mounted Electronic Trip

Circuit Breaker: Type LG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

Common Feeder Features:

Nameplate - White Surface / Black Letters

002-00 1 Designation: MDPA

SQUARE D CUSTOM QED SWITCHBOARD

QED Switchboard

---------------------------------

Square D Power Style Custom Switchboard

Designed and Tested in accordance with:

UL 891/NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE/NEMA PB-2

System Voltage - 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz

Source Description - Single Main

System Ampacity - 1200A

Bussing - Copper Plated with Silver

Neutral Bus - 100%

Max Available Fault Current (RMS) - 50kA

Enclosure - Type 1

Accessibility: Front Only

Exterior Paint Color - ANSI 49

Ground Lug provided for each device

Optional Copper Ground Bus

Lineup 1 BTU: 7485

Dimensions

---------------------------------

2 - 36" Wide Section(s)

2 - 24" Deep Enclosure(s)

Dimensions: 72.00" W X 24" Max D X 91.5" H

Approximate Weight: 1502.00

Incoming Requirements

---------------------------------

Suitable for Use As Service Entrance

Entry Point: Left of Lineup, Through the

Bottom

Connection Type: Cable

Surge Arrestor

SPD with Surge Rating 160kA

SPD Dry Contacts

Includes Surge Counter

Power Meter - PM-820RD

3 CTs Power Meter - 3 phase 4 wire wye

208Y/120

Mains

---------------------------------

1 - 1200AS/1200AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Fixed Mounted Micrologic Circuit

Breaker: Type RG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

Nameplate - White Surface / Black Letters

Specials: 9-500MCM/PH&N

13 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

Special 9-500MCM/PH&N #: 5673538

Feeders

---------------------------------

2 - 200AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole UL,

Group Mounted Thermal Magnetic Circuit

Breaker: Type QG

3 - 250AS/225AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Group Mounted Electronic Trip

Circuit Breaker: Type JG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

1 - 250AT 208V 80% Rated 3 Pole UL, Group

Mounted Thermal Magnetic Prepared

Space: Type JG

1 - 400AS/350AT 208V 80% Rated 65 kA 3 Pole

UL, Group Mounted Electronic Trip

Circuit Breaker: Type LG

Standard Trip Unit, Long Time, Short

Time, Instantaneous

Common Feeder Features:

Nameplate - White Surface / Black Letters

002-01 4 80247-553-64

right splice assembly, 1.5" bus

005-00 1 Designation: PANEL L1A

NQ ML PNLB (INT,BOX,TRIM) - A

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 42kA

Series Rated w/ JG Circuit Breaker

TVSS 160kA per Phase/80kA per Mode

SPD line to grd protect

w/TVSS Surge Counter

w/TVSS Dry Contacts

Main Lug Only: 225A

Main Acc: Sub-Feed Lugs

Incoming Conductors: 1 - (2) 1/0 - 350 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

42 Circuit Interior

Type 1Box: 62H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Top Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH62 Front Cat No: NC62SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA701T

Feeders:

35 - 20A/1P QOB

3 - 20A/1P QOB HPL

4 - 20A/1P QOB-GFI

Optional Features:

Ship Together,Standard Solid

Neutral,Additional Aluminum Isolated

Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL L1A

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

018-00 1 Designation: PANEL L1A

NQ ML PNLB (INT,BOX,TRIM) - B

14 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 42kA

Series Rated w/ JG Circuit Breaker

Main Lug Only: 225A

Incoming Conductors: 1 - (2) 1/0 - 350 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

42 Circuit Interior

Type 1Box: 38H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Top Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH38 Front Cat No: NC38SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA701T

Feeders:

3 - 20A/1P QOB HPL

36 - 20A/1P QOB

1 - 50A/3P QOB

Optional Features:

Ship Together,Standard Solid

Neutral,Additional Aluminum Isolated

Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL L1A

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

006-00 1 Designation: PANEL L2A

NQ ML PNLB (INT,BOX,TRIM) - A

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 42kA

Series Rated w/ JG Circuit Breaker

TVSS 160kA per Phase/80kA per Mode

SPD line to grd protect

w/TVSS Surge Counter

w/TVSS Dry Contacts

Main Lug Only: 225A

Main Acc: Sub-Feed Lugs

Incoming Conductors: 1 - (2) 1/0 - 350 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

42 Circuit Interior

Type 1Box: 62H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Top Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH62 Front Cat No: NC62SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA701T

Feeders:

38 - 20A/1P QOB

4 - 20A/1P QOB-GFI

Optional Features:

Ship Together,Standard Solid

Neutral,Additional Aluminum Isolated

Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL L2A

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

15 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

019-00 1 Designation: PANEL L2A

NQ ML PNLB (INT,BOX,TRIM) - B

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 42kA

Series Rated w/ JG Circuit Breaker

Main Lug Only: 225A

Incoming Conductors: 1 - (2) 1/0 - 350 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

42 Circuit Interior

Type 1Box: 38H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Top Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH38 Front Cat No: NC38SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA701T

Feeders:

42 - 20A/1P QOB

Optional Features:

Ship Together,Standard Solid

Neutral,Additional Aluminum Isolated

Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL L2A

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

007-00 1 Designation: PANEL L3A

NQ ML PNLB (INT,BOX,TRIM) - A

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 42kA

Series Rated w/ JG Circuit Breaker

TVSS 160kA per Phase/80kA per Mode

SPD line to grd protect

w/TVSS Surge Counter

w/TVSS Dry Contacts

Main Lug Only: 225A

Main Acc: Sub-Feed Lugs

Incoming Conductors: 1 - (2) 1/0 - 350 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

42 Circuit Interior

Type 1Box: 62H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Top Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH62 Front Cat No: NC62SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA701T

Feeders:

38 - 20A/1P QOB

4 - 20A/1P QOB-GFI

Optional Features:

Ship Together,Standard Solid

Neutral,Additional Aluminum Isolated

Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL L3A

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

16 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

020-00 1 Designation: PANEL L3A

NQ ML PNLB (INT,BOX,TRIM) - B

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 42kA

Series Rated w/ JG Circuit Breaker

Main Lug Only: 225A

Incoming Conductors: 1 - (2) 1/0 - 350 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

42 Circuit Interior

Type 1Box: 38H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Top Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH38 Front Cat No: NC38SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA701T

Feeders:

40 - 20A/1P QOB

1 - 35A/2P QOB

Optional Features:

Ship Together,Standard Solid

Neutral,Additional Aluminum Isolated

Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL L3A

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

008-00 1 Designation: SPARE TVSS MODULE

MA1IMA16

IMA MA Module, 120V, 160kA

009-00 1 Designation: 5-RTU-1

D325NR

SWITCH FUSIBLE GD 240V 400A 3P NEMA3R

010-00 2 Designation: 5-RTU-1

PKOGTA2

EQUIP GRD ASSY 240V + 600V 100-200

011-00 6 Designation: 5-RTU-1 PLUS SPARES

FRNR350

Class RK5 350A 250V Fuse (25413-00530)

012-00 1 Designation: ERV-1

D222NRB

SWITCH FUSIBLE GD 240V 60A 2P NEMA3R

014-00 1 Designation: ERV-1

GTK03

KIT EQUIPMENT GROUND CU/AL

013-00 4 Designation: ERV-1 PLUS SPARES

FRNR30

Class RK5 30A 250V Fuse (25413-00350)

015-00 1 Designation: WH-2

D322N

SWITCH FUSIBLE GD 240V 60A 3P NEMA1

017-00 1 Designation: WH-2

GTK03

KIT EQUIPMENT GROUND CU/AL

17 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

016-00 6 Designation: WH-2 PLUS SPARES

FRNR45

Class RK5 45A 250V Fuse (25413-00380)

021-00 2 Designation: CBS FOR EXT PANEL LB

QOB360VH

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER 240V 60A

022-00 1 Designation: TRAINING

SQDSERVICE.

Startup Services - Straight Time

CONSISTING OF

Square D will perform the Scope of Work

per Square D document number 0180IB0001 R5/01

"Square D Services Procedures for Startup and

Commissioning of Electrical Equipment".

Work will be performed during

Straight Time (any scheduled 8 hour period

between 06:00 and 18:00 hours Monday

thru Friday)

It is estimated that the service will be

performed using one technician with all

equipment and tests performed in immediate

succession, unless otherwise specified.

If equipment is not available or prepared

to be tested in the number of days specified,

additional travel and expense charges may

apply.

For each hour that SDS is delayed at the job

site due to the unavailability of the

equipment for any reason, a charge at the

applicable T&M rates will be added to the

invoice.

Startup scope of work includes Square D

technician supervision during energization

of equipment. Quoted price is based on

energization during final day of inspection

and testing. If additional trip is required

in order to provide energization supervision,

additional travel, expense and labor charges

will apply.

To schedule date for start of work, call:

1-888-SQUARED

Square D services must be contacted prior

to 2 weeks from required date of service

to avoid additional charges.

Rev: 051207

Jobsite Distance under 50 miles

Services will make up to

1 Trip to the Job Site

General Info

Additional Services

Description:TRAINING

Quantity:8

Number of Students: 1 to 5

Training On

Switchboard

Other Equipment

Number of Students: 1 to 5

18 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

Markings:

If you have any questions about this invoice please contact

Christina Grimm at 636-257-8200 X 16 or email her at

Christina.grimm@schneider-electric.com.

023-00 1 SCB00000012684

GROUND_BUS_W/LUGS

024-00 3 2506504902

025-00 15 2506504902

GROUND LUGS

026-00 1 SCB-00000-12684

GROUND BUS - 36" SECTION

037-00 1 Designation: PANEL EL1

NQ MB Panel (Interior)

NQ Panelboard

Consisting of

208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz SCCR: 10kA

Fully Rated

Single Main: 150A/3P QB Circuit Breaker

Incoming Conductors: 1 - #4 - 300 kcmil

AL Ground Bar

Bus: Aluminum: Tin Plated

30 Circuit Interior

Type 1,Box: 44H x 20W x 5.75D

Incoming: Bottom Trim: Surface - Hinged

Box Cat No: MH44 Front Cat No: NC44SHR

Ref. Drawing: PBA707HR

Feeders:

30 - 20A/1P QOB

Optional Features:

Standard Panel (Box Ahead),Standard Solid

Neutral,Standard Ground Bar

Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows

Line 1: PANEL EL1

Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00" High (Std)

Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

038-00 1 Designation: PANEL EL1

MH44 (Box)

NQ Standard TYPE 1 Box 44 H

039-00 1 Designation: PANEL EL1

NC44SHR (Trim)

Trim Surface Hinged 44"H

040-00 1 DU324

SWITCH NOT FUSIBLE GD 240V 200A 3P NEMA1

Enclosure Type: Type 1

Interrupting Rating (AIR): 10kA

Fuse Capability: Non Fusible

Max System Voltage: 240 VAC

Switch Current Rating: 200 Amp

Number of Switching Poles: 3 Pole No Neutral

Ground Lug: AL/CU

19 of 292

Q2C Number: 31751120 Quote Number: 1 Revision Number: 3

Project Name: BEHAVIORAL HEALTH BUILDING Quote Name:

Item

No.

Qty.

Catalog Number / Details

Ground Lug: Field or Factory Installed: Field

Processed by ACE 2.0 - 030513

041-00 1 PKOGTA2

EQUIP GRD ASSY 240V + 600V 100-200

20 of 292

21 of 292

22 of 292

23 of 292

24 of 292

25 of 292

26 of 292

27 of 292

28 of 292

29 of 292

30 of 292

31 of 292

32 of 292

33 of 292

34 of 292

35 of 292

Power-Style™

QED-2 Switchboards

Class 2700

Instruction Bulletin

80043-055-10

12/2011

Retain for future use.

™

ENGLISH

36 of 292

Hazard Categories and Special

Symbols Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become

familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain

it. The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on

the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information

that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if

the instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal

injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid

possible injury or death.

NOTE: Provides additional information to clarify or simplify a procedure.

Please Note Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained

only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider

Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.

DANGER

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, can result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially

hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in property damage.

ENGLISH

37 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Table of Contents

ENGLISH

Table of Contents Section 1—Introduction ...............................................................................5

Inspection and Packaging .....................................................................5

Document Replacement ........................................................................5

Section 2—Safety Precautions ................................................................... 6

Section 3—Receiving, Handling, and Storing .............................................7

Receiving ...............................................................................................7

Handling ................................................................................................7

Handling with Lifting Straps ............................................................. 7

Handling without Lifting Straps ........................................................ 9

Storing .................................................................................................10

Section 4—Installation .............................................................................. 12

Location ...............................................................................................12

Foundation Preparation .......................................................................12

Switchboard Preparation ..................................................................... 12

General Installation .............................................................................13

Joining Shipping Sections—Outdoor Switchboards ............................ 13

Joining Shipping Sections—Indoor Switchboards ...............................14

Anchoring for Seismic Qualifications ...................................................15

Responsibility for Mitigation of Seismic Damage........................... 15

Maintaining Seismic Certification................................................... 15

Anchoring QED-2 Equipment for Seismic Applications ................. 15

Base Anchoring ............................................................................. 16

Top Anchoring/Restraint................................................................ 18

Anchoring the Switchboard .................................................................20

Through Bus Splice Connections ........................................................ 20

Ground Bus Splice Connections .........................................................21

Grounding and Bonding ......................................................................22

Service Equipment—Grounded System........................................ 22

Service Equipment—Ungrounded System .................................... 23

Not Service Equipment.................................................................. 23

High-Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems................................ 23

Busway Connections ...........................................................................24

Busway Connection—NEMA Type 1 (Indoor) Only (Qwik Flange™) 24

Busway Connections—NEMA Type 1 (Non-Qwik Flange) and

NEMA Type 3R.............................................................................. 25

Conduit Area .......................................................................................26

Cable Pulling .......................................................................................26

Cable Terminations .............................................................................27

Section 5—Pre-energizing Checkout Procedure ...................................... 28

Ground Fault Protection Systems .......................................................30

Section 6—Energizing the Switchboard ....................................................30

Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard .................................................. 31

General Inspection and Cleaning ........................................................ 31

Bus Bar Joints, Lug Terminations, and Insulating Materials ................32

General Lubrication Information .......................................................... 32

Automatic Transfer Switches ............................................................... 32

Bolt-Loc Bolted Pressure Contact Switch Maintenance (800–4,000 A) ... 32

Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................34

QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 Fusible Switches ..................................................35

Switch Maintenance....................................................................... 35

Fuse Replacement (Fusible Switches Only).................................. 35

Installing QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 Fusible Switches............................. 36

Removing QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 Fusible Switches........................... 36

Ground-Fault Protection Systems .......................................................36

Section 8—Adverse Circumstances ..........................................................37

Inspection Following a Short Circuit .................................................... 37

Clean-up Following a Short Circuit ......................................................37

38 of 292

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Table of Contents 12/2011

ENGLISH

Water-Soaked Switchboards ...............................................................37

Water-Sprayed or Splashed Switchboards (Clean Water Only) ..........38

Inspection and Clean-up of Clean Water Sprayed or Splashed

Switchboards ................................................................................. 38

Section 9—Torque Values for Electrical Connections ...............................39

Section 10—Switchboard Insulation Resistance Chart .............................41

Section 11—Reference Publications .........................................................42

Section 12—Installation and Maintenance Log .........................................43

List of Figures Figure 1: Lifting with an Overhead Crane, Lifting Straps, and Cables or

Chains ....................................................................................7

Figure 2: Warning Label, Rainproof Switchboards ................................8

Figure 3: Handling Instruction Label, Switchboards without Lifting Straps 9

Figure 4: Forklift Safety Label .............................................................11

Figure 5: Joining Adjacent Sections—Outdoor Switchboards .............13

Figure 6: Indoor Switchboards ............................................................14

Figure 7: Belleville Washer .................................................................15

Figure 8: Base Channel Floor Anchor Bolt Locations .........................17

Figure 9: Base Channel Mounting Hardware ......................................18

Figure 10: Top Anchor Hard-Point Locations ........................................19

Figure 11: Top Anchor Mounting Hardware ..........................................19

Figure 12: Switchboard Base Channels ................................................20

Figure 13: Proper Orientation of U-shaped Splice Connector ...............21

Figure 14: Ground Bus Splice Connection ............................................21

Figure 15: Series 2 Ground Bus Splice Connection .............................21

Figure 16: Grounding Electrode Connector ..........................................22

Figure 17: Main Bonding Jumper ..........................................................22

Figure 18: Series 2 Main Bonding Jumper ............................................23

Figure 19: Qwik Flange Installation .......................................................24

Figure 20: Qwik Flange .........................................................................24

Figure 21: Removing the Busway Dummy Flanged End ......................25

Figure 22: Flanged-End Connections ...................................................25

Figure 23: Reinstalling the 1/2-In. (13 mm) Hardware ..........................26

Figure 24: Instantaneous Trip Setting ...................................................28

Figure 25: Type BP Bolt-Loc Fusible Switch .........................................33

Figure 26: PowerPact™ R-Frame Circuit Breaker ................................34

List of Tables Table 1: Enclosure X,Y,Z Dimensions in Inches (mm) ...................... 16

Table 2: I-Line™ Blank Fillers and Extensions .................................. 34

Table 3: QMB/QMJ Fusible Switch Blank Fillers ............................... 36

Table 4: QMQB1 Fusible Switch Blank Fillers ................................... 36

Table 5: Incoming, Branch, and Neutral Lug ..................................... 39

Table 6: Multiple Conductor Neutral and/or Ground Bar.................... 39

39 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 1—Introduction

ENGLISH

Section 1—Introduction This manual contains instructions for the proper installation, operation, and

maintenance of Power-Style™ QED-2 switchboard equipment

manufactured by Schneider Electric. Engineering, installation, and operating

staff supervisors should familiarize themselves with this manual and

become acquainted with the appearance and characteristics of each piece

of equipment mounted or contained in the switchboard.

These instructions and procedures apply to Power-Style QED-2 switchboard

installations by Schneider Electric. When special features or non-standard

components are incorporated in the switchboard, detailed instructions for

these components are included in the instruction material holder.

NOTE: There are references to Series 2 switchboards in several places in

this instruction bulletin. To determine if the QED-2 switchboard is a Series 2

model, check the rating nameplate located on the front cover. If the

switchboard is a Series 2 model, the nameplate indicates that. If it is not a

Series 2 model, there is not a Series designation.

Inspection and Packaging Every Power-Style QED-2 switchboard is carefully inspected and packaged

at the assembly plant. Construction of the switchboard is checked, both

structurally and electrically, for compliance with all specifications, codes,

and standards. After a complete inspection, the switchboard is prepared for

shipment. Each section is shipped separately for easier handling before

installation. The factory order number, an identification number, and the

shipping weights are plainly marked on each shipping section.

Document Replacement Contact your local Schneider Electric representative to replace lost or

damaged wiring diagrams and instruction sheets. Use the factory order

number as a reference.

40 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 2—Safety Precautions 12/2011

Section 2—Safety Precautions DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel.

• Perform such work only after reading and understanding all of the

instructions contained in this bulletin.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or

inside equipment.

• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this

equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits

are live until they are de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay particular

attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources of

power, including the possibility of backfeeding.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Practice lock-out/tag-out procedures according to OSHA requirements.

• Handle this equipment carefully and install, operate, and maintain it

correctly in order for it to function properly. Neglecting fundamental

installation and maintenance requirements may lead to personal injury,

as well as damage to equipment or other property.

• Carefully inspect your work area and remove any tools and objects left

inside the equipment.

• Replace all devices, doors, and covers before turning on power to

this equipment.

• All instructions in this manual assume that the customer has taken

these measures before performing maintenance or testing.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury

41 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 3—Receiving, Handling, and Storing

ENGLISH

Section 3—Receiving, Handling,

and Storing

Receiving Upon receipt, check the packing list against the equipment received to

ensure the order and shipment are complete. Also upon receipt,

immediately inspect switchboard sections for any damage that occurred in

transit. If damage is found or suspected, file a claim with the carrier

immediately and notify the nearest Schneider Electric representative.

Handling

Ensure that proper equipment, such as an overhead crane, is available at

the installation site to handle the switchboard. This equipment helps avoid

injury to personnel and damage to the switchboard.

The shipping weight of each shipping section is marked on the packing list.

Verify the lifting capacity of the equipment being used to handle the

switchboard in accordance with the shipping weight of each shipping

section. Keep the switchboard upright during handling.

Schneider Electric recommends using an overhead crane, lifting straps, and

cables or chains to handle the switchboard. This method and alternative

handling methods are discussed in this section.

Handling with Lifting Straps Schneider Electric provides lifting straps as standard equipment for

NEMA Type 1 switchboard shipping sections rated 3,000 A or less.

Instruction labels on each shipping section include drawings and written

instructions outlining the proper use of the lifting straps (Figure 1). Use rigid

spreaders or a spanner bar to provide vertical lift on the lifting straps. This

helps avoid damage to the frame or finish.

Follow these instructions to handle the switchboard:

1. Use load-rated cables or chains with safety hooks or shackles. Do not

pass cables or chains through holes in lifting straps.

2. Use a load-rated spreader beam to prevent structure damage. Rig so

that the minimum angle between the lifting cables or chains and

equipment top is 45 degrees.

WARNING

SPECIAL HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

• Do not lay the equipment on its front or sides.

• Lay equipment only on its back when special

handling is required.

• Do not ship the equipment lying down.

Failure to follow these instructions can result

in serious injury or equipment damage.

Figure 1: Lifting with an Overhead Crane, Lifting Straps, and

Cables or Chains

Spreader beam

Front View Side View

Lifting straps

45°Min. angle

42 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 3—Receiving, Handling, and Storing 12/2011

Follow these instructions for laying equipment on its back:

1. Remove shipping skid and equipment back covers.

2. Use overhead cranes, lifting straps, and cables or chains for laying

equipment on its back.

3. Rate of drop or pickup for laying equipment on its back is four feet per

minute or less.

4. Reverse the procedure to stand the equipment in its upright position.

5. Reinstall back covers.

The warning label (Figure 2) is attached to both the front and rear of

the switchboard.

Figure 2: Warning Label, Rainproof Switchboards

43 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 3—Receiving, Handling, and Storing

ENGLISH

Handling without Lifting Straps Lifting straps are not furnished on shipping sections rated more than

3,000 A, or on rainproof switchboards. Use rollers, slings, or other means to

handle the shipping sections. The handling label (Figure 3) is affixed to each

of these sections.

Figure 3: Handling Instruction Label, Switchboards without

Lifting Straps

44 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 3—Receiving, Handling, and Storing 12/2011

When elevating a shipping section not equipped with lifting straps, use an

overhead crane equipped with either of the following:

•A chain coupled to a sling rigging

•A wire cable with safety hooks and shackles

Wrap the sling completely around the switchboard and shipping stringers.

NOTE: A forklift is an alternative method of handling the switchboard.

Always check the fork lengths to ensure that the forks extend under

the entire switchboard. Carefully balance the load, and always use a

safety strap when handling or moving a switchboard with a forklift

(Figure 4 on page 11).

Storing When storing the switchboard before installation, cover the top and

openings of the equipment during the construction period to protect the

switchboard from dust and debris.

If a switchboard is not installed and energized immediately, store it in a

clean, dry space with a consistent temperature to prevent condensation.

Store the switchboard indoors, if possible. Preferably, store it in a heated

building with adequate air circulation and protect it from dirt, fumes, water,

and physical damage. Storing the switchboard outdoors can cause harmful

condensation inside the switchboard.

NOTE: Install portable electric heaters of approximately 250 watts per

vertical section in both indoor-type and rainproof-type switchboard

enclosures for adequate protection during storage.

Before energizing the space heaters, remove all loose packing or flammable

materials inside the switchboard. Outdoor switchboards are not

weather-resistant until completely and properly installed; treat them the

same as indoor switchboards until after installation.

WARNING

TOP HEAVY LOAD—HAZARD OF TIPPING

Stabilize the shipping section to reduce the

possibility of tipping.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in death or serious injury.

45 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 3—Receiving, Handling, and Storing

ENGLISH

Figure 4: Forklift Safety Label

46 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

Section 4—Installation Correct installation of Power-Style QED-2 switchboards is essential for proper

operation of all switchboard components. Study the associated instruction books

and all drawings carefully. In most cases, all drawings are sent to the purchaser

before a switchboard is shipped to enable adequate planning.

NOTE: While installing switchboards, do not use the top of the switchboard

as a support for the weight of the installer.

Location Find the designated area on the building floor plan where the switchboard will be

installed. The location chosen for installation should provide working clearances

complying with Section 110-26 of the National Electrical Code® (NEC®) or

Section 2-308 of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Part 1. Front-accessible

switchboards require field connections, including mains, branches, ground bus,

and neutral bus, to be accessible and maintainable from the front. For

switchboards having rear ventilation, allow a minimum 1/2-inch (13 mm)

clearance between the rear of the switchboard and the wall for proper ventilation.

Equipment drawings identify switchboards requiring rear or side access.

If in a wet location or outside of the building, enclose the switchboard in an

outdoor enclosure or equipment to prevent moisture or water from entering

and accumulating within the enclosure. Outdoor switchboards drain to the

rear, so there must be at least 1/2-inch (13 mm) clearance between the rear

of the switchboard and a wall or other obstruction for proper drainage.

Foundation Preparation The floor or foundation must be strong enough to support the weight of the

switchboard without sagging. The surrounding floor area should gently

slope toward a drain.

NOTE: For seismic qualifications, read the section “Anchoring for Seismic

Qualifications” on page 15 before pouring the floor or foundation.

Power-Style QED-2 switchboards are assembled on true and level floors at

the assembly plant. To ensure correct bus bar alignment, the mounting pad or

final installation site must be smooth and level. If parallel steel floor channels

are imbedded for mounting the switchboard, take extra care to ensure the

floor channels are level over their entire length to avoid distortion of the

switchboard structure. Each channel should be level with the finished floor.

When pouring the foundation, make provisions for conduits entering the

switchboard from below and carrying the incoming and/or outgoing cables,

control wiring, and ground cable. The bottom view in the equipment drawing

shows the available conduit area for correct layout.

Conduits should project above the finished floor by about 2 in. (51 mm).

However, to simplify moving the shipping sections into place, install the conduits

flush with the concrete and, after the sections are in their final position, add the

appropriate extension sleeves. Otherwise, raising the shipping section on

timbers or lifting it by a crane to clear the conduit hubs will be necessary. Before

pouring the foundation, consider installing additional conduits for future circuits.

Switchboard Preparation Remove dirt and debris from the foundation and surrounding area before

moving the switchboard into final position.

After the switchboard has been moved to its final installation site, take each

shipping section off its shipping stringers. For switchboards greater than

24 in. (610 mm) deep, the center base channel can be removed.

Remove all packing materials. If the switchboard is equipped with a bottom

closure plate in each vertical section, remove and retain the plates for reuse.

When bottom closure plates are furnished, the customer must make any

holes necessary for conduit entering the bottom of the switchboard. After

making the holes, reinstall the closure plate.

47 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

General Installation

Install the switchboard into its final position by leveling progressively each

section and bolting the frames together, if separated. Position shipping

sections as follows:

1. Maneuver each shipping section into the desired position using the

procedures under “Handling” on page 7.

2. Carefully lower the section over the conduit stubs to comply with the

“available conduit area” as shown in the bottom view of the equipment

drawings. Otherwise, there might not be sufficient cable bending space.

3. Level the shipping section.

4. After installation of each section is complete, make the through bus splice

connection to the preceding section before installing the next section.

Joining Shipping Sections—Outdoor

Switchboards 1. Remove the center top cap (Figure 5) from the left-hand section, and

retain all hardware for reuse.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Level and align adjacent shipping sections with

one another. Ensure proper alignment of

horizontal main through bus and proper splice

bus connections.

Failure to follow this instruction can result

in equipment damage.

Figure 5: Joining Adjacent Sections—Outdoor Switchboards

Center top cap

See Detail A

Knockouts

(typically 6 places)

See Detail B

Left-hand

section top

plate

Center

top cap

Right-hand

section top

plate

Typical:

1/4-20 x 1-1/4 in. slotted

pan head screw, 1/4 in.

flat washer, and 1/4-20

hex nut

Gasketing

Typical:

1/4-20 x 5/8 in. slotted

pan head screw,

1/4 in. flat washer, and

1/4-20 hex nut

3/8-16 x1 in.

cap screw

3/8 in. external tooth

lock washer

3/8-16 hex nut

3/8 in. helical

lock washer

Left-hand

section

Right-hand

section

Detail A Detail B

48 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

2. When possible, open or remove the front and rear doors and panels,

providing access to bolt adjacent shipping sections together.

3. Remove three 0.5-in. (13 mm) diameter knockouts from the front vertical

corner channel and three from the rear vertical corner channel (a total of

six per frame side) as indicated by the arrows in Figure 5.

4. Position each adjacent section, carefully leveling it and aligning it with the

previous section. If lifting straps are provided, completely remove them

from the sides being bolted together so the sections can be joined flush.

NOTE: If lifting strap removal is not required to join sections, leave

the lifting strap on the switchboard. Verify that the bolt is tight to maintain

NEMA Type 3R integrity.

5. Six bolts (3/8-16 x 1 in.) are provided. Place them through the holes

created in step 3 to join adjacent sections.

6. Make the through bus splice connections to the preceding section.

7. Replace the center top cap removed in step 1.

8. Replace and secure the front and rear doors and panels removed in step 2.

Joining Shipping Sections—

Indoor Switchboards 1. Position each adjacent section, carefully leveling and aligning it with the

previous section. If lifting straps are provided, completely remove them

from the sides being bolted together so the sections can be joined flush.

NOTE: Leave the other lifting straps on the switchboard if their removal

is not required to join adjacent sections flush.

2. Open or remove the front and rear doors and panels, providing access

to bolt adjacent shipping sections together.

3. Six bolts (3/8-16 x 1 in.) are provided. Place the bolts through the existing

holes in the front and rear vertical corner channels to join adjacent

sections (Figure 6).

4. Make the through bus splice connections to the preceding section.

5. Replace and secure all front and rear doors and panels removed in step 2.

Figure 6: Indoor Switchboards

Arrows indicate holes

to use in step 3.

49 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

Anchoring for Seismic Qualifications QED-2 equipment that is seismically certified has been qualified to the

site-specific seismic requirements of the listed model building codes and/or

standards. Optional construction features may be required, depending on the

location of the installation and the particular code and/or standard of interest.

Seismic certificates of compliance are provided with all seismically certified

QED-2 equipment. To maintain the validity of this certification, the installation

instructions provided in this bulletin must be followed.

Responsibility for Mitigation of Seismic Damage For the purposes of the model building codes, QED-2 equipment are

considered nonstructural building components. Equipment capacity was

determined from triaxial seismic shake table test results as defined in the

International Code Counsel Evaluation Service (ICCES) Acceptance Criteria for

Seismic Qualification Testing of Nonstructural Components (AC156). Unless

otherwise indicated, an equipment importance factor of 1.5 (Ip = 1.5) was used,

indicating that equipment functionality was verified before and after shaker table

seismic simulation testing. This importance factor is indicative of critical facilities

where maximizing the probability of post event functionality is a priority. The

Building Seismic Safety Council (BSSC) recognizes AC 156 as an appropriate

methodology in the 2003 National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program

(NEHRP) Commentary (FEMA 450 Part 2). The National Institute of Building

Sciences established the BSSC in 1979 to develop and promote regulatory

provisions for earthquake risk mitigation at the national level.

Incoming and outgoing cable and conduit must also be considered as

related but independent systems. They must be designed and restrained to

withstand the forces generated by the seismic event without increasing the

load transferred to the equipment. For applications where seismic hazard

exists, bottom entry and/or exit of cable and conduit is preferred. This

system must be able to transfer the loads created by a seismic event to the

load-bearing path of the building structural system.

Maintaining Seismic Certification Seismic qualification of nonstructural components by Schneider Electric is just

one link in the total chain of responsibility required to maximize the probability

that the equipment will be intact and functional after a seismic event. During a

seismic event, the equipment must be able to transfer the loads that are

created through the mounting pad and anchorage to the load-bearing path of

the building structural system. The structural civil engineer or design engineer

of record is responsible for detailing the equipment connection and anchorage

requirements for the given installation. The installer and manufacturers of the

anchorage restraint system are responsible for assuring that the mounting

requirements are met. Schneider Electric is not responsible for the

specification and performance of these systems.

Anchoring QED-2 Equipment for Seismic

Applications

Formed base channels run the width of the section. The channels and

connecting braces provide a minimum 0.75-in. (19 mm) diameter hole for

fastening the section to the floor. To anchor the QED-2 switchboard to the

floor properly, use all four mounting locations for NEMA Type 1 enclosures

less than 36 in. deep, all six mounting locations for 36–70 in. deep

enclosures, and six of the eight mounting locations for enclosures greater

than 70-in. deep (see Figure 8 on page 17).

Use 0.5 in. (13 mm) diameter anchor bolts (Grade 5 minimum, provided by

others) for the installation of equipment. Use one 1.25 in. (32 mm) outer

diameter Grade 5 Belleville washer (provided by others; see Figure 7) under

the head of each bolt or anchor nut. To develop the full strength of the anchor,

torque the hardware to the value specified by the anchor manufacturer, or as

recommended in the seismic restraint detailing supplied by the Structural Civil

Engineer of record for the project (see Figure 9 on page 18).

Figure 7: Belleville Washer

0.14 in.

(3.6 mm)

ø 0.545 in.

(14 mm)

ø 1.25 in.

(32 mm)

50 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

Additionally, each NEMA Type 1 enclosed section includes four rear

top-located hard points for attaching two upper lateral braces (braces and

hardware supplied by others) to the QED-2 structure for top structural

restraint (see Figures 10 and 11 on page 19).

Top structural restraint is required for all QED-2 equipment installed:

•where the site-specific 0.2 second spectral ground motion exceeds

2.67 g (as determined from the code-referenced ground motion maps or

the site-specific seismic hazard engineering study), or

•when displacement at the top of the equipment cannot be tolerated, or

•for all QED-2 corner sections used for seismic applications.

To develop the full strength of the upper structural anchor, install and torque

the hardware as specified by the anchor manufacturer or the seismic restraint

detailing supplied by the Structural Civil Engineer of record for the project.

NOTE: Anchoring hardware is not furnished with the QED-2 equipment.

After the QED-2 switchboard and adjacent equipment are properly joined and

the entire structure is bolted to the floor, install the incoming service

conductors and load side cables. During an earthquake, the top of the QED-2

switchboard can move in any direction. Any top incoming cables must

accommodate this motion. Do not use the QED-2 enclosure (particularly the

top) to mount exterior equipment.

Base Anchoring 1. To anchor the switchboard to the floor properly, use all of the designated

0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter mounting hole locations as illustrated in Figure 8

on page 17. The enclosure dimensions corresponding to Figure 8 are listed

in Table 1.

Table 1: Enclosure X,Y,Z Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Enclosure

Width

12 in. 24 in. 30 in. 36 in. 42 in. 48 in. 54 in.

Enclosure

Depth

24 in. X = 6 (152)

Y = 21 (533)

X = 18 (457)

Y = 21 (533)

X = 24 (610)

Y = 21 (533)

X = 30 (762)

Y = 21 (533)

X = 36 (914)

Y = 21 (533)

X = 42 (1067)

Y = 21 (533)

X = 48 (1219)

Y = 21 (533)

36 in.

X = 6 (152)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

X = 18 (457)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

X = 24 (610)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

X = 30 (762)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

X = 36 (914)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

X = 42 (1067)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

X = 48 (1219)

Z = 16.5 (419)

Y = 33 (838)

48 in.

X = 6 (152)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

X = 18 (457)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

X = 24 (610)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

X = 30 (762)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

X = 36 (914)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

X = 42 (1067)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

X = 48 (1219)

Z = 22.5 (572)

Y = 45 (1143)

54 in.

X = 6 (152)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

X = 18 (457)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

X = 24 (610)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

X = 30 (762)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

X = 36 (914)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

X = 42 (1067)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

X = 48 (1219)

Z = 25.5 (648)

Y = 51 (1295)

60 in.

X = 6 (152)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

X = 18 (457)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

X = 24 (610)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

X = 30 (762)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

X = 36 (914)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

X = 42 (1067)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

X = 48 (1219)

Z = 28.5 (724)

Y = 57 (1448)

72 in.

X = 6 (152)

Z1 = 28.5

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

X = 18 (457)

Z1 = 28.5 (724)

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

X = 24 (610)

Z1 = 28.5 (724)

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

X = 30 (762)

Z1 = 28.5 (724)

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

X = 36 (914)

Z1 = 28.5 (724)

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

X = 42 (1067)

Z1 = 28.5 (724)

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

X = 48 (1219)

Z1 = 28.5 (724)

Z2 = 40.5 (1029)

Y = 69 (1753)

51 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

Figure 8: Base Channel Floor Anchor Bolt Locations

Bottom View of Enclosure

Front of Enclosure

0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter

mounting holes (four places)

Enclosures < 36 in. Deep

3.0 in. (76 mm)

(typical) 1.5 in. (38 mm)

(typical)

Front of Enclosure

Enclosures > 70 in. Deep

3.0 in. (76 mm)

(typical) 1.5 in. (38 mm)

(typical)

Front of Enclosure

0.75 in. (19 mm)

diameter mounting

holes (six places)

Enclosures 36–70 in. Deep

3.0 in. (76 mm)

(typical) 1.5 in. (38 mm)

(typical)

0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter

mounting holes (eight places)

For configurations with two interior

located base channels, select one of

the channels and equip with two

anchor bolts for seismic applications.

Bottom View of Enclosure

NOTE: See Table 1 on page 16

for X, Y, Z dimensional values.

52 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

2. Depending on the frame size (see Figure 8 on page 17), use either four or

six 1/2-13 Grade 5 bolts in the locations shown in Figure 9.

3. Once the switchboard is in place, secure the base channels to each bolt

using a 1.25 in. (32 mm) diameter Belleville washer between a 1/2-13

hardened nut and the switchboard frame as illustrated in Figure 9.

NOTE: The “TOP” side of the Belleville washer must be facing the nut.

4. Torque each nut to the value recommended by the anchor manufacturer

to develop the full strength of the anchor.

Top Anchoring/Restraint For installation at locations with an Ss greater than 2.67 g (as determined

from the current version of the International Building Code), or where

displacement cannot be tolerated at the top of the switchboard during a

seismic event, use top restraints attached to the equipment hard points.

NOTE: Anchoring hardware is not furnished with the switchboard.

1. The four 0.88-in. (22 mm) diameter mechanical knock-outs shown in

Figure 10 on page 19 serve as hard points for application of a top

restraint system.

NOTE: By code, it is the responsibility of the Building Design

Professional to determine the top restraint methodology for the intended

building application.

Figure 9: Base Channel Mounting Hardware

1/2-13 heavy-duty nut, torqued to value

recommended by anchor manufacturer

1.25 in. (32 mm) diameter Belleville washer

(TOP side facing nut)

1/2-13, grade 5 bolt;

2.25 in. (57 mm) in length or longer

Detail A

NOTE: Base channel mounting hardware

detail shown for reference purposes only.

Anchoring hardware is not furnished with the

switchboard. Covers and internal hardware

shown removed for illustration purposes.

53 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

2. Detach the top plate from the main switchboard enclosure. Retain the

screws.

3. Remove the four 0.88 in. (22 mm) diameter mechanical knock-outs as

directed by the Building Design Professional.

4. With the knock-outs removed, reattach and resecure the top plate to the

enclosure using the screws removed in Step 2.

5. Attach the top restraint system using a 1/2-13, Grade 5 bolt,

a 1 in. (25 mm) diameter steel washer, a 1.25 in. (32 mm) diameter

Belleville washer, and a hardened 1/2-13 nut as shown in Figure 11.

6. After all switchboard sections are properly joined and the entire structure

is properly anchored, install the incoming service conductors and load

side cables.

Figure 10: Top Anchor Hard-Point Locations

Figure 11: Top Anchor Mounting Hardware

Top of Switchboard Enclosure

Front

0.88 in. (22 mm)

diameter mechanical

knock-out; four

places, as shown

1.5 in.

(38 mm)

1.5 in.

(38 mm)

1.5 in.

(38 mm)

1.5 in.

(38 mm)

1/2-13 hardened nut

1.25 in. (32 mm) diameter Belleville washer

(TOP side facing nut)

0.88 in. (22 mm) diameter knock-out

1/2-13, grade 5 bolt

1 in. (25 mm) diameter

steel washer

54 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

7. Do not use the switchboard enclosure (particularly the top) to mount

exterior equipment, except for conduit.

Anchoring the Switchboard Although sections are freestanding, a hard bump or shifting movement can

result in damage to the splice joints between sections and conduit hubs

connected to the sections. Therefore, each vertical section must be

anchored to the floor.

Formed base channels run the width of the shipping section. The channels

have 1.12-in. (28 mm) diameter holes for fastening the section to the floor

(Figure 12). Anchor each section to the floor with 1/2-in. (Grade 2 minimum)

bolts with flat washers and anchors suitable for installation of electrical

equipment (not furnished).

After all switchboard sections are properly joined and the entire structure is

bolted to the floor, install the incoming service conductors and load side cables.

NOTE: If the switchboard consists of only one shipping section, proceed to

“Grounding and Bonding” on page 22.

Through Bus Splice Connections

Through bus splice connectors and/or hardware, along with installation

instructions, are provided with each shipping split. Follow the installation

instructions, and torque splice bolts to the value given in “Section 9—

Torque Values for Electrical Connections” on page 39.

If through bus bars are wrapped with an insulative material, cover the splice

connections with the material provided.

For splice connections with bus on the front and rear of an insulating tube,

ensure the U-shaped, copper connector is centered around the tube.

Figure 13 on page 21 shows the proper orientation of the connector.

NOTE: The U-shaped connector will fit snugly against the insulating tube

when installed correctly. It is pulled away from the insulating tube in

Figure 13 to show the orientation of the connector slot.

Figure 12: Switchboard Base Channels

Switchboard frame

Secure the switchboard to the

mounting surface using the

holes closest to the surface.

Formed base channel

Mounting surface

1.12 in. (28 mm)

Diameter hole in each corner

for anchoring

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Do not install through bus splice connectors

with the switchboard energized.

Failure to follow this instruction will result

in death or serious injury.

55 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

Ground Bus Splice Connections Align and secure the ground bus splice connection between shipping

sections. Torque connections to 100 lb-in (11 N•m) (Figure 14 or 15).

NOTE: Proper installation is essential for equipment ground-fault systems.

Figure 13: Proper Orientation of U-shaped Splice Connector

Correct

Slot in splice connector

points downward.

Incorrect

Slot in splice connector

points upward.

U-shaped splice connector

Insulating tube

Figure 14: Ground Bus Splice Connection

Figure 15: Series 2 Ground Bus Splice Connection

Ground bus splice

(1/4-20 thread-forming

hardware provided)

56 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

Grounding and Bonding NOTE: A system is “grounded” if it is grounded at any point ahead of the

switchboard, whether the grounded conductor (neutral) is carried through to

the loads, or not.

Service Equipment—Grounded System For solidly grounded systems used as either service equipment or as a main

switchboard on a separately derived system:

1. Run a grounding electrode conductor from the grounding electrode at

the installation site to the grounding electrode conductor connector

(ground lug) located on the switchboard ground bus (or on the neutral

bus, if so indicated on the equipment drawing) (Figure 16). Select the

material and size of this grounding electrode conductor to comply with

Sections 250-62 and 250-66 of the NEC or Sections 10-204 and 10-206

of the 1998 CEC, and install it as specified in Section 250-64 of the NEC

or Section 10-908 of the 1998 CEC.

2. Install the main bonding jumper between the neutral bus and the

ground bus (Figure 17 or 18 on page 22). For torque values, refer to

“Section 9—Torque Values for Electrical Connections” on page 39.

NOTE: If the switchboard is fed from multiple sources (for example,

double-ended systems), there may be two or more main bonding

jumpers to install.

Figure 16: Grounding Electrode Connector

Grounding

electrode

conductor

connector

Ground bus

Figure 17: Main Bonding Jumper

Neutral lug pad

Main bonding jumper

Ground bus extension

57 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

In Canada, a main bonding jumper bus or cable is provided between the

neutral bus and ground bus. When the bonding jumper must be

disconnected (for example, for a Megger® test), remove the main bonding

jumper bus or cable lug with cable from the neutral bus. This is normally

located near the line neutral lugs. Secure the main bonding jumper bus or

cable and lug to maintain the required distance from phases and neutral.

NOTE: If the switchboard is fed from multiple sources (for example, a

double-ended system like a main-tie-main), there may be two or more main

bonding jumpers installed.

Service Equipment—Ungrounded System For ungrounded systems used as either service equipment, or as a main

switchboard on a separately derived system:

1. Run a grounding electrode conductor from the grounding electrode at

the installation site to the grounding electrode conductor connector

(ground lug) located on the switchboard ground bus (Figure 16).

2. Select the material and size of this grounding electrode conductor to

comply with Sections 250-62 and 250-66 of the NEC or Sections 10-700

and 10-702 of the 1998 CEC, and install it as specified in Section 250-64

of the NEC or Section 10-204 of the 1998 CEC.

Not Service Equipment For either grounded or ungrounded systems, when a switchboard is not

used as service equipment nor as a main switchboard on a separately

derived system:

Use equipment grounding conductors sized according to Section 250-122

of the NEC or Section 10-206 of the 1998 CEC to connect the switchboard

frame and ground bus to the service ground.

High-Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems For high-impedance grounded neutral systems:

Ground the system following the instructions provided with the system

grounding equipment and in compliance with Section 250-36 of the NEC.

Confirm that the switchboard frame and ground bus are bonded in

accordance with Section 250-102 of the NEC.

Figure 18: Series 2 Main Bonding Jumper

Neutral lug pad

Main bonding jumper

58 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

Busway Connections Schneider Electric switchboards are manufactured with two different styles

of busway connections. Qwik Flange™ is used on indoor switchboards only.

The other type of busway connection is the “dummy” flanged end. This type

is used on some indoor switchboards, but primarily on outdoor units. The

dummy flanged end must be removed to allow actual busway flanged end

installation. Either the dummy or actual busway flanged end must be in

place before energizing the switchboard.

NOTE: Do not use the switchboard to support the weight of the busway

connection. Support busway independently.

Busway Connection—NEMA Type 1 (Indoor)

Only (Qwik Flange™)

Follow the instructions in this section to make Qwik Flange busway

connections (see Figures 19 and 20):

1. Remove any protective covering from the opening in the switchboard.

2. Slip the busway joint into the switchboard connectors.

3. Check the joint bolt alignment; the center line (C/L) of the joint bolt to the

switchboard surface should be 0.95 in. (24 mm) (Figure 19).

4. Attach the side closing plates using two 5/16-in. bolts (provided). When

installed properly, the holes in the side closing plates align with the holes

in both the switchboard and busway.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Turn off all power supplying the switchboard

and busway before installing connections.

Failure to follow this instruction will result

in death or serious injury

Figure 19: Qwik Flange Installation

Figure 20: Qwik Flange

Side closing plate

(2 required)

C/L of joint bolt

connection of busway

Surface Joint bolt

Small

closing

plate

0.95 in. (24 mm)

59 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

5. Use an 18-in. (457 mm) or longer wrench to torque the joint bolt until the

outer break-away head twists off. Do not allow the break-away bolt head

or red warning disc to drop into the switchboard.

6. Slip the remaining two small closing plates into position by aligning with

the holes in the switchboard. Use the four 1/4-20 screws provided to

secure the equipment.

7. Confirm proper phasing of the installed busway before energizing.

Busway Connections—NEMA Type 1

(Non-Qwik Flange) and NEMA Type 3R If this style of connection for busway is furnished, the busway “dummy” flanged

end must be removed before installing busway (Figure 21 on page 25).

1. From inside the switchboard, remove the 1/2-in. bolts that fasten the

switchboard bus to the busway dummy nonmetallic flanges. Retain all

hardware for reuse.

2. Remove all screws securing the busway dummy flanged end to the

switchboard enclosure.

3. Remove the busway dummy flanged end (Figure 21).

4. Install the actual busway flanged end to the switchboard bus connectors

provided in the switchboard (Figure 22). Insert the flanges between the

switchboard bus connectors so that the mounting holes in the collar of the

flanged end align with the pre-drilled holes in the switchboard enclosure.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Turn off all power supplying the switchboard

and busway before installing connections.

Failure to follow this instruction will result

in death or serious injury. Figure 21: Removing the Busway Dummy Flanged End

Figure 22: Flanged-End Connections

60 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 4—Installation 12/2011

5. Line up the holes in the bus bar flanges, and reinstall the 1/2-in. (13 mm)

hardware that was removed in step 1 on page 25 and as shown in Figure 23.

6. Torque the bolts inserted in step 5 as indicated in “Section 9—

Torque Values for Electrical Connections” on page 39.

7. Assemble the busway collar to the switchboard enclosure with the

screws provided.

8. Ensure that the busway integral ground is connected to the switchboard

ground bus.

9. Confirm busway phasing before energizing.

Conduit Area 1. Locate and terminate all conduit in the switchboard enclosure in the

“available conduit area” designated on the equipment drawing.

NOTE: On switchboards greater than 24 in. (610 mm) deep, the center

base channel can be removed for additional conduit area. Exception:

Do not remove any base channels when seismic restraint is required.

2. Install the conduit properly. Use hubs, locknuts, and bushings to protect

the cables and prevent condensation on the conduit from entering

the switchboard.

NOTE: If top entry, do not use the top of the switchboard to support the

weight of the conduit. Support the conduit independently.

If bottom closure plates are furnished, the customer must remove the

plates, make holes in them for any conduit entering the bottom of the

switchboard, and then reinstall the plates.

Under seismic conditions, consider using top restraints if movement of

the top of the switchboard is an issue.

3. Bond all conduit hubs to the switchboard enclosure with approved

electrical connections.

Cable Pulling Power-Style QED-2 switchboards are constructed to customer

specifications for the cable entrance arrangement (for example, top or

bottom feed). Switchboard components are arranged to give proper cable

clearance and bending space for cables entering or exiting the switchboard

as specified on the equipment drawing.

1. Use only cable sizes suitable for a proper fit with the corresponding lugs.

2. Pull the proper number of line side and load side cables according to the

load served and the NEC or CEC.

3. Position the cables inside the switchboard so that they are not subject to

physical damage.

4. Maintain the largest possible bending radii and proper clearance to bus

bars and grounded parts. If any cables are lying or bearing on structural

members, support them to relieve this condition or place suitable

protective material at the bearing point to protect the cable insulation.

Figure 23: Reinstalling the 1/2-In. (13 mm) Hardware

NOTE: The convex side (marked “Top”)

of one conical washer should be against

the bolt head, and the convex side of the

second conical washer should be

against the hex nut.

Washer—

marked “Top”

Washer—

marked “Top”

Hex nut

Bolt head

61 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 4—Installation

ENGLISH

5. Be certain to run all phase conductors, including the neutral, through the

same opening where cables enter or leave the switchboard, or pass

through any metal that has magnetic properties. Otherwise, overheating

can result. See Section 300-20(a) of NEC.

6. When instructed, brace or cable-lace the conductors.

Cable Terminations 1. Use a proper insulation stripping tool to strip a length of insulation from

the end of the cable sufficient to fit into the full length of the lug barrel. Be

careful not to nick or ring the strands.

2. Thoroughly clean aluminum cable contact surfaces with a wire brush, or

scrub them with an abrasive cloth to remove oxides and foreign matter.

3. Immediately apply an acceptable joint compound to the bare

aluminum surfaces.

4. If compression-type lugs are furnished on any switch or circuit breaker,

or as the main incoming power lugs, unbolt and remove them to create

sufficient room for crimping the lugs to the cables with the crimping tool.

a. Insert the cable into the lug barrel and, using the crimping tool, make the

specified number of crimps per the recommendations of the manufacturer.

b. Wipe excess joint compound from the connector and insulation.

c. With the cables connected, remount the lugs onto the bus bars,

switches, or circuit breakers. Torque the bolts to the values given in

“Section 9—Torque Values for Electrical Connections” on page 39.

5. Set screw-type lugs may be furnished as main incoming lugs and are

standard on molded case circuit breakers and QMB/QMJ/QMQB1

fusible switches. Torque these lugs to, but do not exceed, the specified

values. Torque values for circuit breaker and switch lugs are marked on

these units. Torque values for other switchboard lugs are marked on the

switchboard (Table 6 on page 39).

1QMQB switches are available in Canada only.

62 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 5—Pre-energizing Checkout Procedure 12/2011

Section 5—

Pre-energizing Checkout

Procedure

Conduct a complete inspection before the switchboard is energized to ensure

that all components function and operate properly. Complete every step of

the checkout procedure listed before energizing the switchboard.

1. Check all field-installed bus bar connections. Torque values are listed in

“Section 9—Torque Values for Electrical Connections” on page 39.

2. Check all accessible connections for tightness.

3. Check all factory- and field-installed lug terminations for tightness.

4. Check the rigidity of all bus bar supports.

5. Check the switchboard enclosure for dents or other damage that

reduces electrical clearances inside the switchboard.

6. Remove all foam blocks, or other temporary cushioning or retaining

material, from the electrical devices.

7. Manually open and close all switches, circuit breakers, and other

operating mechanisms, checking for correct alignment and free operation.

8. Operate all electrically operated switches, circuit breakers, and other

devices equipped with remote operators (not under load). An auxiliary

source of control power may be necessary to accomplish this.

9. Check all relays, meters, and instrumentation to verify that all

field- installed wiring connections are made properly and that the

devices function properly.

10. Current transformers (CTs) supplied for customer use require

connection to a metering device load before energizing. Verify that the

metering device load is properly connected, including main switchboard

connections to remote equipment.

11. All CT circuits supplied by Schneider Electric for customer metering use

are shorted for shipment. Remove shorting terminal screws on shorting

terminal blocks or jumpers and store in the block.

12. Factory installed molded case circuit breakers, 250 A frames or larger,

may have an adjustable magnetic trip, which is shipped on the “LO”

setting. The markings between “LO” and “HI” settings represent a range

of instantaneous magnetic trip values of 5–10 times the continuous

current rating of the circuit breaker. To provide coordinated operation

during a fault, adjust the magnetic trip as outlined in the respective

instruction manual. All poles are adjusted simultaneously, using a

screwdriver, by the single setting (Figure 24).

13. On switchboards containing an electronic trip circuit breaker, set the

tripping characteristic curve of the adjustable electronic trip unit per the

job requirements, or as outlined in the respective instruction manual.

14. If ground-fault protection is furnished on type BP switch, adjust the relay

to the desired ground current pickup setting. The relay is shipped from

the factory at the lowest setting of 120 A for the Type GC relay. Relay

pickup range is from 120–1,200 A for the Type GC relay.

NOTE: For molded case circuit breakers, refer to “Section 11—

Reference Publications” on page 42 for circuit breaker information.

15. Check the torque on all bolts of the fuses mounted in Bolt-Loc™

switches, 21–30 lb-ft (28–41 N•m), and in QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 switches

(as marked on the device).

Figure 24: Instantaneous Trip Setting

Magnetic trip

adjustment

1QMQB switches are available in Canada only.

63 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 5—Pre-energizing Checkout Procedure

ENGLISH

16. Examine fuse clip contact pressure and contact means

(QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 fusible switches). If there is any sign of looseness,

contact Square D Services at 1-888-778-2733 (US) or 1-800-265-3374

(Canada). Loose fuse clips can result in overheating.

17. Check all QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 fusible switches, verifying that the proper

fuses with the required interrupting rating and continuous current rating

are installed. Do not use renewable link fuses in Square D™ brand

fusible switches.

18. Verify that all grounding connections are correctly made. If the

switchboard is used as a service entrance, double check to see that the

main bonding jumper is connected (Figure 17 on page 22).

19. Conduct an electrical insulation resistance (Megger®) test to ensure that

the switchboard is free from short circuits and undesirable grounds.

Open all control power and metering disconnects or remove the fuses

from the control circuits. Disconnect the neutral connection at any surge

protective device or other electronic device before performing the

electrical insulation resistance test; reconnect to the device after the

test. With the neutral isolated from the ground and the power switches

and circuit breakers open, conduct electrical insulation tests from phase-

to-phase, phase-to-ground, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground. If

the resistance reads less than one megohm while testing with the

branch circuit devices in the open position, the system may be unsafe

and should be investigated. Consult Square D Services at 1-888-778-

2733 (US) or 1-800-265-3374 (Canada) to help correct any problems.

20. After completing the electrical insulation resistance test, replace all

control power fuses that were removed and close power disconnects

that were opened.

21. Check all field-installed wiring. Make certain it is clear of all live parts,

and when instructed, secured to withstand fault currents.

22. Verify that all control wiring between sections is connected.

23. Vacuum to remove any dust, scrap wire, or other debris.

24. Replace all covers and barriers; check for any pinched wires, and close

doors. Make certain all enclosure parts are aligned properly and

securely fastened.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Do not pry open or spread the fuse mounting

clips. Doing so can cause a loose connection,

resulting in overheating.

Failure to follow this instruction can result

in equipment damage.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

OR INJURY

• Remove the long-time rating plug before

electrical insulation testing a circuit breaker

that has a label stating “Warning: Disconnect

Plug Before Dielectric Test”.

• Some Micrologic™ trip units are not rated for

voltages that would occur during electrical

resistance insulation testing.

• Open all control and metering disconnects

from the control circuits.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Do not use an air hose to blow out the

switchboard. Dust can settle inside relays and

overcurrent devices, causing overheating and

improper operation.

Failure to follow this instruction can result

in equipment damage.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Correct short-circuit conditions detected during the checkout

procedures described in “Section 5—Pre-energizing Checkout

Procedure”, beginning on page 28.

• Qualified electrical personnel must be present when energizing this

equipment for the first time.

• Follow the instructions in this section to energize the switchboard

properly.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.

64 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 6—Energizing the Switchboard 12/2011

Ground Fault Protection Systems

Paragraph 230-95(c) of the National Electrical Code requires that all equipment

ground-fault protection systems be tested when first installed. If the circuit

breaker has equipment ground-fault protection installed, test it at this time.

1. Make sure the trip unit is powered. The trip unit is powered if:

— The circuit breaker is closed or bottom fed and has more than 100 V

of load voltage on two phases (P or H trip unit only).

— The full-function or hand-held test kit is connected and on.

— The 24 Vdc external power supply is connected.

— An external voltage tap is installed and voltage of more than 100 V is

present on two phases (P or H trip unit only).

2. If the system is a radial (single-ended) system, press the ground-fault

Push-to-Test button. The circuit breaker trips, and the trip unit

ground-fault indicator light comes on.

3. Record results on the ground fault system test log.

NOTE: If a complete check of the ground-fault system is necessary, use

primary injection testing. If the system is multiple source and/or requires

field connections at the job site, use primary injection testing.

NOTE: Some ground fault systems require field connections at the job site.

Consult the switchboard interconnection wiring drawing for details.

Section 6—

Energizing the Switchboard 1. Make sure there is not a load on the switchboard when it is energized.

Turn off all downstream loads.

2. Energize the switchboard in the following sequence:

a. Turn on all control power disconnects before energizing the

switchboard. Refer to the record drawings supplied with equipment

to see if control power disconnects are supplied.

b. Close any open doors and/or covers.

c. Close all main devices.

d. Close each branch circuit breaker or branch fusible switch.

e. Proceed to each panelboard and other downstream load.

3. After all overcurrent protective devices are closed, turn on all loads (for

example, lighting circuits, contactors, heaters, and motors).

65 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard

ENGLISH

Section 7—

Maintaining the Switchboard

Periodic maintenance of the switchboard includes cleaning, lubrication, and

exercising component parts. The interval between maintenance checks can

vary depending upon the amount of usage and environmental conditions of

each installation. The maximum recommended inspection interval is one

year. This definition for periodic maintenance applies throughout this

manual, unless otherwise noted.

Always inspect the switchboard after a fault. (Refer to “Section 8—

Adverse Circumstances”, beginning on page 37). Service bulletins for the

various disconnecting and overcurrent devices mounted in the switchboard

are available through your local Schneider Electric representative.

General Inspection and Cleaning 1. Vacuum the switchboard interior to remove any dirt or dust deposits. Wipe

all bus bars, insulators, cables, etc., with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

2. Check the switchboard interior carefully for moisture, condensation

build-up, or signs of any previous wetness. Moisture can cause

insulation failures and rapid oxidation of current-carrying parts. Inspect

all conduit entrances and cracks between the enclosure panels for

dripping leaks. Condensation in conduits can be a source of moisture

and must not be allowed to drip onto live parts or insulating material.

Take the necessary steps to eliminate the moisture and seal off all leaks.

3. Inspect the switchboard for any signs of overheating. Discoloration and

flaking of insulation or metal parts are indications of overheating.

NOTE: If overheating occurs, be sure that all conditions that caused the

overheating have been corrected. Loose or contaminated connections

can cause overheating.

4. Check for signs of rodent nesting in the switchboard. If required, use a

good exterminating technique in the general area of the switchboard.

NOTE: Do not place or use exterminating substances and chemicals

inside the switchboard. Some products attract rodents.

5. Carefully inspect all devices for any visibly worn-out, cracked, or

missing parts.

6. Manually open and close switches and circuit breakers several times to

verify they are working properly.

7. Verify that all key interlocks and door interlocking provisions are

working properly.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Inspect and perform preventive maintenance

only on switchboards and equipment that

has been de-energized and electrically

isolated (unless otherwise specified). This

helps ensure that accidental contact cannot

be made with energized parts.

• Follow safety-related work practices as

described in NFPA 70E, Part II at all times.

Failure to follow these instructions will

result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

• Do not use an air hose to blow out the

switchboard. Dust can settle inside relays

and overcurrent devices, causing

overheating and improper operation.

• Do not allow paint, chemicals, or

petroleum-based solvents to contact plastics

or insulating materials.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

66 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard 12/2011

Bus Bar Joints, Lug Terminations, and

Insulating Materials 1. Bus bar joints are maintenance-free. Do not retighten them after the

pre-energizing checkout procedure is complete.

2. Check all bus bar joints and terminal lugs for any pitting, corrosion, or

discoloration resulting from high temperatures or subjection to high fault

conditions. If any damage has occurred, replace the bus bars or lugs. If

cleaning is required, use Lectra-Clean®, made by CRC.

3. Inspect all insulating materials. Before re-energizing the switchboard,

replace insulators with any visible damage (such as cracks).

General Lubrication Information For field maintenance relubrication of blade/jaw components in switches

600 V and below, use BG20 High Performance Synthetic Grease from Dow

Corning (Schneider Electric catalog number SWLUB). This grease is

applicable for the following switches:

•Bolt-Loc

•QMB Main and Branch

•QMJ Branch

•QMQB1 Main and Branch

For bus/plug-on connections, use electric joint compound,

Schneider Electric catalog number PJC7201.

For SED and NED circuit breaker drawout connections, Schneider Electric

catalog number PJC8311 Electric Joint Compound must be used.

For Masterpact™ NW drawout connections, use only Schneider Electric

catalog number S48899 Electric Joint Compound.

Automatic Transfer Switches Consult the documentation provided by the manufacturer for all installation,

operation, and maintenance instructions for these devices.

Bolt-Loc Bolted Pressure Contact Switch

Maintenance (800–4,000 A) Refer to the Bolt-Loc switch installation and maintenance manual for

complete information (manual is shipped with the switchboard). If the

manual is not available, refer to “Section 11—Reference Publications” on

page 42, and contact your local Schneider Electric representative to obtain

the appropriate manuals.

1. Exercise the operating mechanism at least once a year to ensure

proper operation.

2. The Bolt-Loc switch is shipped from the factory properly lubricated.

Periodic cleaning and lubrication of the switch is required. The

maintenance interval between lubrications depends on factors such as

usage and ambient conditions. The maximum recommended

maintenance interval is one year for current-carrying parts and five years

for operating mechanisms.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

• Do not sand or remove plating on any bus

bar, splice bar, or terminal lug.

• Damage to plating can result in overheating.

Replace damaged part. Contact Square D

Services at 1-888-778-2733 (US) or

1-800-265-3374 (Canada).

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

1QMQB switches are available in Canada only.

67 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard

ENGLISH

3. To replace the fuse:

a. Open the switch before opening the fuse door.

b. Open the fuse door, releasing the interlock as described in the

instructions on the door.

c. Observe the switch blades to confirm the switch is “open.”

d. Check the line and load ends of fuses for voltage using a properly

rated voltage sensing device. No voltage should be present.

e. Remove all fuses. Retain the hardware for reuse.

f. Using a non-abrasive cleaner such as Lectra-Clean, made by CRC,

wipe clean the fuse mounting pads on the switch and the terminals of

each new fuse. Check the alignment of fuse terminals before

installing new fuses.

g. Install new fuses using the same hardware removed in Step e.

Tighten to 21–30 lb-ft (28–41 N•m).

4. Close the fuse door, and check the fuse door interlock with the switch in

the ON position. The fuse doors should not open using normal hand force.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Always check line and load ends of the fuses

for voltage before starting the replacement

procedure. The Bolt-Loc switch can be part of

a multiple source system in which the fuses

can be energized when the Bolt-Loc switch is

in the “open” position.

Failure to follow this instruction will result

in death or serious injury.

Figure 25: Type BP Bolt-Loc Fusible Switch

68 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard 12/2011

Circuit Breakers Schneider Electric circuit breakers are designed and manufactured as

sealed units requiring minimal periodic maintenance.

Exercise circuit breakers at least once a year to ensure proper operation.

For general maintenance:

1. Trip the circuit breaker by pushing the Push-To-Trip or “Open” button

located on the face of the circuit breaker. Refer to the appropriate circuit

breaker manual for the specific location of this button.

2. Manually open and close the circuit breaker two to three times.

NOTE: Schneider Electric instruction bulletin 48049-900-0x, Field Testing

and Maintenance Guide for Thermal-Magnetic and Micrologic™ Electronic

Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers, provides more in-depth information.

Refer to individual circuit breaker instruction manuals shipped with the

switchboard for additional maintenance information, such as changing

rating plugs, sensor plugs, or adjustable settings and removing circuit

breakers. If the instruction manual is not available, refer to “Section 11—

Reference Publications” on page 42 for the appropriate number, or contact

your local Schneider Electric representative.

Figure 26: PowerPact™ R-Frame Circuit Breaker

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• If adjusting circuit breaker settings, do not

set the long-time trip rating at a higher

ampacity than the rating of the bus bar or

load cables it supplies; overheating

can occur.

• Before energizing the switchboard, fill all

unused I-Line circuit breaker mounting

spaces with blank fillers and/or extensions

as listed in Table 2.

Failure to follow these instructions will

result in death or serious injury.

Table 2: I-Line™ Blank Fillers and Extensions

Item Height Catalog

No. Branch

Circuit Side Circuit Breaker

Frame

Blank Fillers 1.50 in. (38 mm)

4.50 in. (114 mm)

HNM1BL

HNM4BL

Both Sides

Both Sides Not applicable

Blank

Extensions

1.50 in. (38 mm)

4.50 in. (114 mm)

1.50 in. (38 mm)

4.50 in. (114 mm)

HLW1BL

HLW4BL

HLN1BL

HLN4BL

Wide Side

Narrow Side

All applications except

PowerPact H/J circuit

breakers with Micrologic

trip unit 5/6.

4.50 in. (114 mm)

HLN4EBL

HLW4EBL

Narrow Side

Wide Side

Only PowerPact H/J

circuit breakers with

Micrologic trip unit 5/6.

69 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard

ENGLISH

3. The universal test set, catalog number UTS3, is available to test

Schneider Electric Powerpact P and R circuit breakers equipped with

Micrologic trip units. It runs trip unit tests automatically, with prompts to the

user for initial information. Test modules for each circuit breaker frame are

used to store data necessary for automatic tests. Series B Micrologic trip

units require test module CBTMB, which is included in UTS3.

A pocket tester, catalog number S434206, or UTA tester, catalog

number STRV00910, are available for Schneider Electric Powerpact H,

J, and L circuit breakers with Micrologic trip units. These testers supply

power to the Micrologic trip units and allow for settings to be adjusted

through the keypad located on the circuit breaker or through a PC using

the USB interface.

Masterpact NW trip units require the full-function test set, catalog

number S33595, or the hand-held test set, catalog number S33594.

NOTE: Tests can be conducted with a circuit breaker installed in the

switchboard; circuit breaker removal is not required. The switchboard

must be de-energized.

QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 Fusible Switches Refer to the QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 instruction manual for complete

maintenance information. If the instruction manual is not available, refer to

“Section 11—Reference Publications” on page 42 of this manual for the

appropriate number. Contact your local Schneider Electric representative to

obtain the manual.

Switch Maintenance 1. Periodically exercise the switch to ensure proper operation. This period

should not exceed one year.

2. Check the cover interlock with the switch in the ON position. The cover

should not open using normal hand force.

3. Inspect the switch interior for any damaged or cracked parts, and

replace as necessary.

4. For fusible switch units, check the fuse mounting clips or bolted contact

area for corrosion or discoloration (indicating overheating). Replace

them if necessary.

5. For additional maintenance instructions, see the label on the inside of

the door.

Fuse Replacement (Fusible Switches Only) 1. Turn the switch to the OFF position before opening the door.

2. Observe the switch blades to confirm that the switch is in the OFF position.

3. Using a properly rated voltage sensing device, verify that line and load

ends of the fuse are not energized.

4. Observe all warning labels specifying the type of fuse to use. Do not

substitute a non-current limiting fuse, or attempt in any way to defeat the

rejection feature of the fuse clips furnished with the switch. Do not use

renewable link fuses in Schneider Electric fusible switches.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

• Do not remove the protective lubricant on the

plug-on connectors.

• If additional lubrication is required, apply a

coating of electrical joint compound, catalog

number PJC7201, to the contact surfaces of

the plug-on connector.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

1QMQB switches are available in Canada only.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Always check line and load ends of the fuses

for voltage before starting the fuse

replacement procedure with a properly rated

voltage sensing device.

Failure to follow this instruction will result

in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Do not pry open or spread the fuse mounting clips. Doing so can cause a

loose connection, resulting in overheating and nuisance fuse blowing.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

70 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 7—Maintaining the Switchboard 12/2011

Installing QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 Fusible Switches

1. Turn off the main power.

2. Turn the switch handle(s) to the OFF position. Align switch plug-on

connectors with QMB panel vertical bus, and plug switch onto panel.

3. Place and partially tighten all unit mounting screws that mount to the

QMB panel mounting rails.

4. Tighten all screws evenly. The unit mounting flange and plug-on

connectors must be seated securely.

Removing QMB/QMJ/QMQB1 Fusible Switches 1. Turn off the main power.

2. Turn switch handle(s) to the OFF position.

3. Disconnect the load wires.

4. For QMB and QMJ switches, remove mounting screws holding the

switch to the mounting rail. For QMQB1 switches, remove the bolts

holding the switch to the line terminal.

5. Unplug the switch.

Ground-Fault Protection Systems Check the terminal connections on the ground-fault protection system at

least once a year for tightness and corrosion. If the system can be tested

without tripping the main or branch device, directions for testing the system

are in the device manual. Otherwise, testing the ground-fault protection

system will trip the main or branch device to which it is connected. If the

ground-fault sensor or relay is physically or electrically damaged, replace it.

If the ground-fault protection system does not operate properly and

additional equipment has been connected to the installation since the last

maintenance test/check, de-energize the entire system, and check for

grounds on the neutral downstream from the main bonding jumper. If no

downstream grounds are detected and the ground fault system is not

operating properly, contact Square D Services at 1-888-778-2733 (US) or

1-800-265-3374 (Canada).

If no additions have been made to the installation and the ground-fault

protection system does not operate properly, contact Square D Services at

1-888-778-2733 (US) or 1-800-265-3374 (Canada).

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Remove power for these sections before

installing or removing QMB/QMJ/QMQB1

switches.

• Do not use a main as a branch unit or a

branch as a main.

• All unused spaces must be filled with blank

fillers before energizing the switchboard.

Refer to Tables 3 and 4 for sizes and catalog

numbers.

Failure to follow these instructions will

result in death or serious injury.

Table 3: QMB/QMJ Fusible Switch Blank Fillers

Height Catalog No.

1.50 in. (38 mm) QMB1BLW

3.00 in. (76 mm) QMB3BLW

6.00 in. (152 mm) QMB6BLW

15.00 in. (381 mm) QMB15BLW

Table 4: QMQB1 Fusible Switch Blank Fillers

Height Catalog No.

2x: 1.375 in. (35 mm) QFS1

8x: 5.50 in. (140 mm) QFS5

10x: 6.875 in. (175 mm) QFS6

14x: 9.625 in. (244 mm) QFS9

24x: 16.50 in. (419 mm) QFS16

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Do not remove the protective lubricant on the

plug-on connectors.

Failure to follow this instruction can result

in equipment damage.

1QMQB switches are available in Canada only.

71 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 8—Adverse Circumstances

ENGLISH

Refer to the ground-fault field test instruction manual for additional testing

information. If the manual is not available, refer to “Section 11—

Reference Publications” on page 42 of this manual to obtain the appropriate

number. Contact your local Schneider Electric representative to obtain

this manual.

Section 8—

Adverse Circumstances This section includes, but is not limited to, all electrical components of

the switchboard.

NOTE: Before attempting to re-energize the switchboard following adverse

circumstances, contact Square D Services at 1-888-778-2733 (US) or

1-800-265-3374 (Canada) for special instructions.

Inspection Following a Short Circuit If a short circuit occurs, make a thorough inspection of the entire system,

and verify that no damage to conductors or insulation has occurred. High

mechanical and thermal stresses developed by short-circuit currents can

damage conductors and insulation. Check the overcurrent-protection device

that interrupted the short-circuit current for possible arcing damage.

Do not open sealed devices, such as molded case circuit breakers. Replace

these devices if they are damaged. Before energizing the switchboard, all

unused circuit breaker mounting spaces must be filled. For more information

about these devices, refer to the appropriate instruction manual listed in

“Section 11—Reference Publications” on page 42.

Clean-up Following a Short Circuit The insulating properties of some organic insulating materials can

deteriorate during an electrical arc. If so:

1. Remove any soot or debris.

2. Replace carbon-tracked insulation.

Water-Soaked Switchboards Do not clean or repair a switchboard that has been exposed to large

volumes of water or submerged at any time. Current-carrying parts,

insulation systems, and electrical components may be damaged beyond

repair. Do not energize the switchboard. Contact Square D Services.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Turn off all power supplying the switchboard before cleaning.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm all power

is off.

• Before energizing the switchboard, all unused circuit breaker mounting

spaces must be filled.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.

72 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 8—Adverse Circumstances 12/2011

Water-Sprayed or Splashed Switchboards

(Clean Water Only)

If the switchboard has been sprayed or splashed with small amounts of

clean water, make a thorough inspection of the entire system, and verify

that no damage to conductors or insulation has occurred. Do not open

sealed devices such as molded case circuit breakers or fuses. Replace

these devices if they are damaged. For more information about these

devices, refer to the appropriate instruction manual listed in “Section 11—

Reference Publications”.

Inspection and Clean-up of Clean Water Sprayed

or Splashed Switchboards Follow steps 1–10 only if:

•No signs of physical damage to the equipment are present.

•The switchboard has not been submerged or exposed to water for long

periods of time.

•The water that has been in contact with the switchboard has not been

contaminated with sewage, chemicals, or other substances that can

negatively affect the integrity of the electrical equipment.

•The water that has been in contact with the switchboard has not entered

any area of the enclosure that may contain wiring installed as intended

and located above any live part. Specifically, inspect for water entering

through conduits located above live parts.

If any one or more of these conditions have not been met, contact Square D

Services at 1-888-778-2733 (US) or 1-800-265-3374 (Canada).

If ALL of the conditions listed have been met, proceed as follows:

1. Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

the equipment.

2. Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm all power

is off.

3. Disconnect and electrically isolate the switchboard so that no contact

can be made with energized parts.

4. Wipe off all moisture from the bus bars, insulators, and insulating

material with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents or

water displacement sprays.

5. Prepare the switchboard for insulation resistance (Megger®) testing by

disconnecting all line side supply connections and all load side cable

connections to isolate the switchboard from the wiring system.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Turn off all power supplying this equipment

before working on it.

Failure to follow this instruction will result

in death or serious injury.

73 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 9—Torque Values for Electrical Connections

ENGLISH

6. Turn all circuit breakers or switches to their ON position. The

switchboard must remain de-energized.

7. Use a megohmmeter with a capacity of 500–1,000 Vdc and apply

voltage from:

a. Each phase-to-ground with circuit breaker on.

b. Phase-to-phase with circuit breaker on.

8. Record resistance values. Refer to “Section 10—Switchboard Insulation

Resistance Chart” on page 41.

9. If resistance measurements are less than 0.5 megohm, call Square D

Services at 1-888-778-2733 (US) or 1-800-265-3374 (Canada) for

recommendations.

10. If resistance measurements are greater than 0.5 megohm, the

equipment can be energized using the procedures listed in “Section 6—

Energizing the Switchboard” on page 30.

Section 9—

Torque Values for Electrical

Connections

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR

INJURY

• Remove the long-time rating plug before

electrical insulation testing a circuit breaker

that has a label stating “Warning: Disconnect

Plug Before Dielectric Test.”

• Some Micrologic trip units are not rated for

voltages that would occur during electrical

resistance insulation testing.

• Open all control and metering disconnects

from the control circuits.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury or equipment damage.

Table 5: Incoming, Branch, and Neutral Lug

Socket Size Across Flats Torque Value

1/4 in. 180 lb-in (20 N•m)

5/16 in. 250 lb-in (28 N•m)

3/8 in. 340 lb-in (38 N•m)

1/2 in. ★450 lb-in (51 N•m)

★ Certain lugs require 620 lb-in (70 N•m) and are marked as such.

Table 6: Multiple Conductor Neutral and/or Ground Bar

Screw Type Lug Wire Range Conductor Size Torque Value

Slotted Head

14–4

14-10 Cu, 12-10 Al 20 lb-in (2 N•m)

8 Cu-Al 25 lb-in (3 N•m)

6-4 Cu-Al 35 lb-in (4 N•m)

14–1/0 14-8 Cu-Al 36 lb-in (4 N•m)

6-1/0 Cu-Al 45 lb-in (5 N•m)

Socket Head 14–1/0 All 100 lb-in (11 N•m)

6–300 kcmil All 275 lb-in (31 N•m)

74 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 9—Torque Values for Electrical Connections 12/2011

Hardware

Description Torque Value

1/2 in. 720–840 lb-in (81–95 N•m)

Hardware

Description Torque Value

1/4 in. 50–75 lb-in (6–8 N•m)

3/8 in. 175–225 lb-in (20–25 N•m)

1/2 in. 250–350 lb-in (28–40 N•m)

Hardware

Description

Torque Value

Conical Washer OD Square Head (Tee) Bolt

Conical Washer

3/8 in. 0.87 in. (22 mm) 250–280 lb-in (28–32 N•m)

1.00 in. (25 mm) 130–150 lb-in (15–17 N•m)

1/2 in. 1.25 in. (32 mm)

2.25 in. (57 mm) 450–550 lb-in (51–62 N•m)

Hardware

Description

Torque Value

Conical Washer OD Hex Head Bolt

(2) Conical Washers

5/16 in. 0.90 in. (23 mm) 145–160 lb-in (16–18 N•m)

3/8 in. 0.87 in. (22 mm) 250–280 lb-in (28–32 N•m)

1.00 in. (25 mm) 130–150 lb-in (15–17 N•m)

1/2 in.

1.25 in. (32 mm)

2.25 in. (57 mm)

3.00 in. (76 mm)

720–840 lb-in (81–95 N•m)

Carriage bolt

Hex nut

Conical washer

Carriage bolt

Conical washer assembly

(Keps nut)

Hex head bolt

Conical washer assembly

(Keps nut)

Square head (Tee) bolt

Conical washer assembly

(Keps nut)

Square head (Tee) bolt

Conical washer

Hex head bolt

(2) Conical washers

Hardware

Description Torque Value

1/4 in. 50–75 lb-in (6–8 N•m)

5/16 in. 80–125 lb-in (9–14 N•m)

3/8 in. 175–225 lb-in (20–25 N•m)

1/2 in. 250–350 lb-in (28–40 N•m)

75 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 10—Switchboard Insulation Resistance Chart

ENGLISH

Section 10—Switchboard

Insulation Resistance Chart Always use a 500 or 1,000 Vdc megohmmeter when testing insulation

resistance.

NOTE: The Neutral–Ground column is provided to record the results of the

pre-energizing checkout procedure only.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Turn off all power to the switchboard before

testing.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing

device to confirm power is off.

Failure to follow these instructions will

result in death or serious injury.

Date

Phase–Phase Phase–Ground Neutral–Ground

All Disconnects Open

a-b b-c c-a a-ground b-ground c-ground Neutral–Ground

Date All Disconnects Closed

a-b b-c c-a a-ground b-ground c-ground Neutral–Ground

76 of 292

ENGLISH

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards 80043-055-10

Section 11—Reference Publications 12/2011

Section 11—

Reference Publications Schneider Electric publications are available through your local

Schneider Electric representative. These publications include device replacement

procedures and listings of spare parts to make ordering and servicing of

replacement parts quick and convenient. Any maintenance procedure or device

not listed, such as an I-Line interior, is not customer serviceable.

Contact your local Schneider Electric representative for information at

1-888-778-2733 in the US, or at 1-800-265-3374 in Canada. Or, refer to the

Technical Library at http://www.schneider-electric.us/ to obtain the

appropriate publications.

For information about obtaining NEMA documents, write to:

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

Attention: Customer Service

1300 North 17th Street

Suite 1847

Rosslyn, VA 22209

Other Reference Publications Publication Number

General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Switchboards Rated 600 V or Less NEMA Publication PB2.1

Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices

for Equipment NEMA Publication PB2.2

Circuit Breakers NEMA Publication AB-4

Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches NEMA Publication KS-1

Electrical Equipment Maintenance NFPA 70B-1999

77 of 292

80043-055-10 Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

12/2011 Section 12—Installation and Maintenance Log

ENGLISH

Section 12—Installation and

Maintenance Log

DATE INITIALS MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

78 of 292

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified

personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of

the use of this material.

80043-055-10 12/2011

Replaces 80043-055-09 05/2010

Schneider Electric USA, Inc.

8821 Garners Ferry Road

Hopkins, SC 29061 USA

1-888-778-2733

www.schneider-electric.us

Power-Style™ QED-2 Switchboards

Instruction Bulletin

Bolt-Loc™, I-LIne™, Masterpact™, Micrologic™, PowerPact™, Power-Style™, Qwik Flange™,

Square D™, and Schneider Electric™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

ENGLISH

79 of 292

Approved as an American National Standard

ANSI Approval Date: June 14, 2010

ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1-2007

General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

Published by

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209

www.nema.org

other languages, reserved under the Universal Copyright Convention, the Berne Convention for the

Protection of Literary and Artistic Works, and the International and Pan American Copyright Conventions.

80 of 292

NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER

The information in this publication was considered technically sound by the consensus of persons

engaged in the development and approval of the document at the time it was developed.

Consensus does not necessarily mean that there is unanimous agreement among every person

participating in the development of this document.

The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards and guideline publications, of

which the document contained herein is one, are developed through a voluntary consensus

standards development process. This process brings together volunteers and/or seeks out the

views of persons who have an interest in the topic covered by this publication. While NEMA

administers the process and establishes rules to promote fairness in the development of

consensus, it does not write the document and it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify

the accuracy or completeness of any information or the soundness of any judgments contained in

its standards and guideline publications.

NEMA disclaims liability for any personal injury, property, or other damages of any nature

whatsoever, whether special, indirect, consequential, or compensatory, directly or indirectly

resulting from the publication, use of, application, or reliance on this document. NEMA disclaims

and makes no guaranty or warranty, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of

any information published herein, and disclaims and makes no warranty that the information in this

document will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. NEMA does not undertake to

guarantee the performance of any individual manufacturer or seller’s products or services by virtue

of this standard or guide.

In publishing and making this document available, NEMA is not undertaking to render professional

or other services for or on behalf of any person or entity, nor is NEMA undertaking to perform any

duty owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using this document should rely on

his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent

professional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances.

Information and other standards on the topic covered by this publication may be available from

other sources, which the user may wish to consult for additional views or information not covered

by this publication.

NEMA has no power, nor does it undertake to police or enforce compliance with the contents of

this document. NEMA does not certify, test, or inspect products, designs, or installations for safety

or health purposes. Any certification or other statement of compliance with any health or safety–

related information in this document shall not be attributable to NEMA and is solely the

responsibility of the certifier or maker of the statement.

81 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page i

CONTENTS Page

Foreword ...................................................................................................................................iii

Section 1 GENERAL 1

1.1 Scope......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 References ................................................................................................................................1

1.3 General...................................................................................................................................... 1

1.3.1 Successful Operation.................................................................................................... 2

1.3.2 Qualified Personnel....................................................................................................... 2

1.3.3 Definition of Qualified Personnel................................................................................... 2

Section 2 HANDLING................................................................................................................................3

2.1 Manufacturer's Handling Instructions........................................................................................ 3

2.2 Care to Avoid Damage .............................................................................................................. 3

2.3 Upright Position ......................................................................................................................... 3

2.4 Equipment Capacity .................................................................................................................. 3

2.5 Concealed Damage................................................................................................................... 3

2.6 Storage Prior to Installation ....................................................................................................... 3

2.7 Shipping Skid............................................................................................................................. 3

2.8 Rod or Pipe Rollers ................................................................................................................... 3

2.9 Forklift Truck.............................................................................................................................. 3

2.10 Overhead Hoisting..................................................................................................................... 4

2.10.1 Rigid Spreaders or Spanner Bars............................................................................... 4

2.10.2 Rigging Lengths .......................................................................................................... 4

2.10.3 Angle Between Lifting Cables and Vertical................................................................. 4

2.10.4 Slings With Safety Hooks or Shackles........................................................................ 4

2.10.5 Removal of Switchboard Top Covers ......................................................................... 4

Section 3 STORAGE................................................................................................................................. 7

3.1 Clean, Dry Space Having Uniform Temperature....................................................................... 7

3.2 Protection from Weather and Dirt.............................................................................................. 7

3.3 Outdoor Switchboards are Not Weather Resistant Until Installed ............................................ 7

3.4 Un-Energized Outdoor Switchboard Should Be Kept Dry Internally......................................... 7

Section 4 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARD OR ENCLOSURE ....................................................... 8

4.1 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions..................................................................................... 8

4.2 Location ..................................................................................................................................... 8

4.2.1 Clearance from Walls.................................................................................................... 8

4.2.2 Working Clearances...................................................................................................... 8

4.3 Channel Sills.............................................................................................................................. 8

4.4 Conduit and Other Raceways ................................................................................................... 8

4.5 Leveling and Securing............................................................................................................... 8

4.6 Splice Bus.................................................................................................................................. 8

4.7 Grounding and Bonding ............................................................................................................ 9

4.7.1 Grounded Systems ....................................................................................................... 9

4.7.2 Ungrounded Systems—Service Equipment or Separately Derived System Main ....... 9

4.7.3 Grounded or Ungrounded Systems .............................................................................. 9

4.8 Unused Openings.................................................................................................................... 10

4.9 Damp Indoor Locations ........................................................................................................... 10

4.10 Unusual Service Conditions .................................................................................................... 10

Section 5 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS........................................................... 11

5.1 Prevent Moisture or Water from Entering................................................................................ 11

5.2 Temperature Ratings............................................................................................................... 11

5.3 Compression (Crimp) Terminals ............................................................................................. 11

5.4 Stripping Insulation from Conductors ...................................................................................... 11

82 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page ii

5.5 Proper Wiring Methods............................................................................................................ 11

5.6 Conductor Location in Switchboard......................................................................................... 11

5.7 Conductors 1/0 AWG in Size and Larger ................................................................................ 11

5.8 Incoming and Outgoing Control Connections ......................................................................... 12

5.9 Prevent Conductor Insulation from Cracking or Splitting ........................................................ 12

5.10 National Electrical Code, Section 725.54................................................................................ 12

Section 6 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARD INTERIOR ................................................................. 13

6.1 Instructions if Switchboard Interior Was Not Factory-Mounted............................................... 13

6.2 Unpacking................................................................................................................................13

6.3 Inspection ................................................................................................................................13

6.4 Storage .................................................................................................................................... 13

6.5 Cleaning................................................................................................................................... 13

6.6 Manufacturer's Instructions ..................................................................................................... 13

6.7 Interior Installation ................................................................................................................... 13

Section 7 STEPS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE ENERGIZING.................................................................... 14

7.1 Accessible Electrical Connections........................................................................................... 14

7.2 Blocks or Other Temporary Holding Means............................................................................ 14

7.3 Integrity of All Bus Mounting Means........................................................................................ 14

7.4 Enclosure................................................................................................................................. 14

7.5 Operating Mechanisms ........................................................................................................... 14

7.6 Electrical Insulation Resistance Test....................................................................................... 14

7.7 Electrical Relays, Meters, and Instrumentation....................................................................... 14

7.8 Electrically Operated Switches, Circuit Breakers, and Other Mechanisms ............................ 14

7.9 Ground Fault Protection System ............................................................................................. 15

7.10 Adjustable Time Current Trip Device Settings ........................................................................ 15

7.11 Field Wiring.............................................................................................................................. 15

7.12 Grounding Connections........................................................................................................... 15

7.13 Foreign Material....................................................................................................................... 15

7.14 Covers and Doors.................................................................................................................... 15

Section 8 ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................... 16

8.1 Qualified Personnel Present.................................................................................................... 16

8.2 No Load on Switchboard ......................................................................................................... 16

8.3 Energized in Sequence ........................................................................................................... 16

8.4 After All Main, Feeder, and Branch Circuit Devices Have Been Closed................................. 16

Section 9 MAINTENANCE...................................................................................................................... 17

9.1 Maintenance Program for Switchboards ................................................................................. 17

9.2 Field Test................................................................................................................................. 17

9.3 Switchboard Inspection Once Each Year................................................................................ 17

9.4 Accumulation of Dust and Dirt................................................................................................. 17

9.4.1 All Visible Electrical Joints and Terminals................................................................... 17

9.4.2 All Conductors and Connections................................................................................. 17

9.4.3 Fuse Clip Contact Pressure and Contact Means........................................................ 18

9.4.4 All Conditions Which Caused Overheating................................................................. 18

9.5 Proper Ampere, Voltage, and Interrupting Ratings ................................................................. 18

9.5.1 All Mechanisms Are Free and in Proper Working Order ............................................ 18

9.6 Operation of All Mechanical Components............................................................................... 18

9.6.1 Full On and Off Positions ............................................................................................ 18

9.6.2 Integrity of Electrical and Mechanical Interlocks......................................................... 18

9.6.3 Missing or Broken Parts.............................................................................................. 18

9.6.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions......................................................................................... 18

9.6.5 Readily Accessible Copper Electrical Contacts, Blades, and Jaws............................ 19

9.7 Deteriorated Insulating Material and Assemblies.................................................................... 19

9.8 Moisture or Signs of Previous Wetness .................................................................................. 19

83 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page iii

9.8.1 Conduits Which Have Dripped Condensate ............................................................... 19

9.8.2 Cracks or Openings .................................................................................................... 19

9.8.3 Insulating Material Which is Damp.............................................................................. 19

9.8.4 Moisture Damaged Component Device...................................................................... 19

9.9 Water Damage ........................................................................................................................ 19

9.10 Severe Electrical Short Circuit................................................................................................. 19

9.11 Ground Fault Protection System ............................................................................................. 20

9.12 Insulation Resistance .............................................................................................................. 20

Section 10 PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF SWITCHBOARDS ................................................................. 21

10.1 Switchboards Without Main Overcurrent Protective Devices.................................................. 21

10.2 Switchboards With a Single Main Overcurrent Protective Device .......................................... 21

10.3 Switchboards With a Multiple Main Overcurrent Protective Device........................................ 21

10.4 Feeder and Branch Circuit Overcurrent Protective Devices in Switchboards......................... 21

10.5 Harmonics in the Electrical System......................................................................................... 21

Figures

2-1 LIFTING WITH EYE BOLTS......................................................................................................5

2-2 LIFTING WITH INTEGRAL LIFT ANGLE.................................................................................. 5

2-3 LIFTING WITH SLING RIGGING.............................................................................................. 6

84 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page iv

Foreword

This publication is a guide of practical information containing instructions for the proper handling,

installation, operation, and maintenance of deadfront distribution switchboards rated 600 Volts or less.

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every

possible contingency regarding handling, installation, operation, or maintenance.

It is recommended that work described in this set of instructions be performed only by qualified personnel

familiar with the construction and operation of switchboards and that such work be performed only after

reading this complete set of instructions. For specific information not covered by these instructions, you

are urged to contact the manufacturer of the switchboard directly.

PB 2.1-2007 revises and supersedes PB 2.1-2002.

In the preparation of this Standards Publication input of users and other interested parties has been

sought and evaluated. Inquiries, comments, and proposed or recommended revisions should be

submitted to the concerned NEMA product section by contacting the following:

Vice President, Technical Services

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1300 North 17th Street

Rosslyn, Virginia, 22209

This Standards Publication was developed by the Panelboard and Distribution Board Section. Section

approval of the standard does not necessarily imply that all section members voted for its approval or

participated in its development. At the time it was approved, the Panelboard and Distribution Board Section

was composed of the following members:

Eaton Electrical Inc.—Pittsburgh, PA

GE—Plainville, CT

Hubbell, Inc.—Bridgeport, CT

Milbank Manufacturing Company—Kansas City, MO

Penn Panel & Box Company—Collingdale, PA

Reliance Controls Corporation—Racine, WI

Siemens Industry, Inc.—Norcross, GA

Square D Company—Palatine, IL

85 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 1

Section 1

GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

This publication covers floor-mounted deadfront switchboards which consist of an enclosure, molded

case and low-voltage power circuit breakers, fusible or non-fusible switches, instruments, and metering,

monitoring, or control equipment, with associated interconnections and supporting structures. These

units are used in the distribution of electricity at:

a. 600 volts and less

b. 6000 amperes or less

1.2 REFERENCES

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1300 North 17th Street

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209

AB 4- 2003 Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit

Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications

PB 2.2- 2004 Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment

Guidelines for Handling Water Damaged Electrical Equipment

National Fire Protection Association

Batterymarch Park

Quincy, MA 02269

NFPA 70- 2005 National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E- 2004 Safety Related Work Practices

1.3 GENERAL

WARNING—HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED ON SWITCHBOARDS AND EQUIPMENT TO

WHICH POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF, DISCONNECTED, AND ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SO

THAT NO ACCIDENTAL CONTACT CAN BE MADE WITH ENERGIZED PARTS. FOLLOW ALL

MANUFACTURER'S WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

Safety related work practices, as described in NFPA 70E, should be followed at all times.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the switchboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate switchboard components during installation or maintenance.

86 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 2

1.3.1 Successful Operation

The successful operation of switchboards is dependent upon proper handling, installation, operation, and

maintenance. Neglecting fundamental installation and maintenance requirements may lead to severe

personal injury, death, or damage to electrical equipment or other property.

1.3.2 Qualified Personnel

Installation, operation, and maintenance of switchboards should be conducted only by qualified personnel.

1.3.3 Definition of Qualified Personnel

For purposes of these guidelines, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction,

and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, the person is:

1.3.3.1 Knowledgeable of Requirements

Knowledgeable of the requirements of the National Electrical Code and of all other applicable codes, laws,

and standards.

1.3.3.2 Trained and Authorized to Test, Energize, Clear, Ground, Tag, and Lockout

Trained and authorized to test, energize, clear, ground, tag, and lockout circuits and equipment in

accordance with established safety practices.

1.3.3.3 Trained in Proper Care and Use of Protective Equipment

Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber gloves, hard hat, safety glasses

or face shields, and flash resistant clothing in accordance with established safety practices.

1.3.3.4 Trained in Rendering First Aid

Trained in rendering first aid.

87 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 3

Section 2

HANDLING

NOTE—These guidelines are provided to help avoid personal injury and equipment damage during handling and to facilitate moving the

switchboard at the job site.

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

Follow the manufacturer's handling instructions for the specific equipment, if available.

2.2 CARE TO AVOID DAMAGE

Handle the switchboard with care to avoid damage to components, the frame or finish.

2.3 UPRIGHT POSITION

Keep the switchboard in an upright position unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer.

2.4 EQUIPMENT CAPACITY

Verify that handling equipment capacity is sufficient for the switchboard weight.

2.5 CONCEALED DAMAGE

When the switchboard is received, unpack it sufficiently to inspect it for concealed damage and to determine

that the shipment is complete and correct.

2.6 STORAGE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION

If the switchboard is to be stored prior to installation, replace the packing for protection during that period.

When conditions permit, leave the packing intact until the switchboard or sections are at their final

installation location. If the packing is removed, cover the top and any openings to protect the equipment

against dust and debris during the construction period. (See section 3).

2.7 SHIPPING SKID

The switchboard should remain secured to the shipping skid to prevent distortion of the bottom of the frame

during moving.

2.8 ROD OR PIPE ROLLERS

Rod or pipe rollers, with the aid of pinch bars, provide a simple method of moving the switchboard on one

floor level if there is little or no incline. Steady the load to prevent tipping.

2.9 FORKLIFT TRUCK

A forklift truck may offer a more convenient method of handling the switchboard and has the added

advantage of permitting it to be hoisted between levels. Balance the load carefully and use a safety strap

when handling or moving switchboards with a forklift.

88 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 4

2.10 OVERHEAD HOISTING

When it is necessary to move the switchboard between elevations without a suitable platform elevator,

overhead hoisting may be required. Lifting plates and eye bolts (Figure 2-1), or channels, angles, or bars

with lift holes (Figure 2-2) may be provided as a permanent or removable part of the switchboard. If they are

not, cable, chain, or band slings (Figure 2-3) may be rigged around the switchboard.

2.10.1 Rigid Spreaders or Spanner Bars

Use rigid spreaders (Figure 2-1) or spanner bars (Figure 2-3) to provide the vertical lift on eye bolts and

lifting slings to avoid crushing or otherwise damaging the frame or its finish. Lifting bars on long lineups may

require additional spreaders to reduce the horizontal compressive force.

2.10.2 Rigging Lengths

Select or adjust the rigging lengths to compensate for any unequal weight distribution of load and to maintain

the switchboard in an upright position.

2.10.3 Angle between Lifting Cables and Vertical

Do not allow the angle between the lifting cables and vertical to exceed 45 degrees in order to reduce the

tension on the rigging and the compressive load on the lifting or spanner bars and spreaders.

2.10.4 Slings with Safety Hooks or Shackles

Do not pass ropes or cables through the lift holes in bars, angles, or channels. Use slings with safety hooks

or shackles.

2.10.5 Removal of Switchboard Top Covers

The switchboard may contain a heavy transformer with overhead lifting means. Consult the manufacturer

regarding the removal of the switchboard top covers and the utilization of such internal lifting means.

89 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 5

MAX

DON'T PASS

ROPES OR CABLES

THROUGH LIFT

HOLES; USE

SLINGS WITH

SAFETY HOOKS

OR SHACKLES

SWITCHBOARD

THEHEIGHTOFTHE

LIFT POINT ABOVE

THE LIFT ANGLE

SHOULD BE AT LEAST

1/2 OF "A" (THE

DISTANCE BETWEEN

LIFT HOLES). THIS

ASSURES A MAXI-

MUM ANGLE OF

45 AS SHOWN

THE HEIGHT OF THE LIFT POINT

ABOVE THE SPREADER SHOULD

BE AT LEAST 1/2 OF "A"

(THE DISTANCE BETWEEN EYE-

BOLTS). THIS ASSURES A MAXI-

MUM ANGLE OF 45 AS SHOWN

LIFT HOLE

EYE BOLTS

LIFT ANGLE

SPREADER

LIFT POINT

Figure 1 Lifting with Eye Bolts

ure 2 Liftin

with Inte

ral Lift

Figure 2-2

LIFTING WITH INTEGRAL LIFT ANGLE

Figure 2-1

LIFTING WITH EYE BOLTS

90 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 6

MAX

1/2 A

OR MORE

DON'T PASS

ROPES OR CABLES

THROUGH LIFT

HOLES; USE

SLINGS WITH

SAFETY HOOKS

OR SHACKLES

SPANNER BA

(CHANNEL)

BLOCKS

SWITCHBOARD

SHIPPING SKID

Figure 3 Lifting h ing Riggingwit Sl

Figure 2-3

LIFTING WITH SLING RIGGING

91 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 7

Section 3

STORAGE

3.1 CLEAN, DRY SPACE HAVING UNIFORM TEMPERATURE

A switchboard that is not installed and energized immediately should be stored in a clean, dry space having

a uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Preferably, it should be stored in a heated building having

adequate air circulation and protected from dirt, fumes, water, and physical damage.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM WEATHER AND DIRT

It is recommended that switchboards should not be stored outdoors. However, if it must be stored outdoors,

cover it securely to provide protection from weather and dirt. Temporary electrical heating should be

installed to prevent condensation; approximately 250 watts per section is adequate for the average

switchboard size and environment. All loose packing or flammable materials inside the switchboard should

be removed before energizing space heaters.

3.3 OUTDOOR SWITCHBOARDS ARE NOT WEATHER RESISTANT UNTIL INSTALLED

Outdoor switchboards are not weather resistant until completely and properly installed and should be treated

exactly the same as indoor switchboards until after they are installed.

3.4 UN-ENERGIZED OUTDOOR SWITCHBOARD SHOULD BE KEPT DRY INTERNALLY

An un-energized outdoor switchboard should be kept dry internally by installing temporary heating (see 3.2)

or by energizing any self-contained space heaters.

92 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 8

Section 4

INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARD OR ENCLOSURE

4.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Install the switchboard in a neat and workmanlike manner following the manufacturer's installation

instructions, if available.

4.2 LOCATION

Locate the switchboard in the area indicated on the building plans. The switchboard enclosure should be

suitable for the environment or protected by other means. Additional precautions may be necessary, during

installation, to prevent moisture, water, or other contaminants from entering and accumulating within the

enclosures. Clearances or working spaces are as follows:

4.2.1 Clearance from Walls

Clearance from walls (not rear accessible)—minimum of 1/2 inch

4.2.2 Working Clearances

Working clearances vary substantially depending on voltage and specific applications. See Section 110.26

of the National Electrical Code.

NOTE—Spaces for working clearances and clearances from walls should not be used for storage. Working spaces should have

adequate lighting.

4.3 CHANNEL SILLS

When channel sills are used, they should be embedded in the concrete floor or grouted on the surface. In

either case, they should be installed in an aligned position and be level over the entire length prior to

installing the switchboard.

4.4 CONDUIT AND OTHER RACEWAYS

Position the switchboard so that the raceway stubs or floor openings are located in the area specified on the

manufacturer's drawing. In the absence of drawings, locate the switchboard over the raceways or floor

openings so as to provide cable bending space and clearances to energized parts or other obstructions.

See Section 408.10 of the National Electrical Code.

4.5 LEVELING AND SECURING

Install the switchboard in its final position, progressively leveling each section and bolting the frames

together if they are separated. If necessary, secure the switchboard to walls or other supporting surfaces.

Security should not depend on wooden plugs driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar

materials.

4.6 SPLICE BUS

Connect all through and ground bus at shipping breaks, using the splice bus and hardware supplied with the

switchboard. Tighten bolted connections in accordance with the manufacturer's torque specifications. If not

furnished, consult the manufacturer.

93 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 9

4.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING

Ground and bond the switchboard as follows:

4.7.1 Grounded Systems

Switchboard used as service equipment for a grounded system or as a main switchboard for a separately

derived system.

4.7.1.1 Grounding Electrode System in Switchboard

If the connection for the grounding electrode system is to be in the switchboard, install a grounding electrode

conductor sized in accordance with Sections 250.66 or 250.166 of the National Electrical Code from the

grounding electrode to the switchboard ground bus or ground terminal designated by the manufacturer. See

Sections 250.62 and 250.64 of the National Electrical Code.

4.7.1.2 Switchboards Used as Service Equipment on Grounded Systems

Switchboards used as service equipment on systems that are grounded at any point are required to have a

grounded conductor brought to the switchboard in accordance with Section 250.24(C) of the National

Electrical Code. This conductor is required even if the switchboard is supplying loads that are only phase-to-

phase connected.

4.7.1.3 Installation of Main Bonding Jumper

Unless already done at the factory, install the main bonding jumper from the incoming grounded conductor

bus (neutral) to the ground bus or other location designated by the manufacturer.

4.7.1.4 Steps 4.7.1.1 Through 4.7.1.3

Steps 4.7.1.1 through 4.7.1.3 must effectively connect together the grounding electrode, the switchboard

frame, all outgoing equipment grounding conductors, and the grounded conductor bus (neutral) of the

system on the supply side of any neutral disconnecting link.

4.7.1.5 Neutral Disconnecting Link

Do not connect any grounding conductors to the load side of any neutral disconnecting link or any sensor

used for ground fault protection. Do not connect equipment grounding conductors directly to the grounded

conductor bus (neutral).

4.7.1.6 Dual Fed Switchboard or System

Where the switchboard or system is dual fed (double-ended) and has ground fault protection, special

precautions are necessary to accomplish proper grounding and bonding. Follow the manufacturer's

instructions.

4.7.2 Ungrounded Systems—Service Equipment or Separately Derived System Main

4.7.2.1 Conductor Sized in Accordance with National Electrical Code

Install a grounding electrode conductor sized in accordance with Sections 250.66 or 250.166 of the National

Electrical Code from the grounding electrode to the switchboard ground bus or ground terminal designated

by the manufacturer. See Sections 250.62 and 250.64 of the National Electrical Code. This should

effectively connect together the grounding electrode, the switchboard frame, and all outgoing equipment

grounding conductors.

4.7.3 Grounded or Ungrounded Systems

Applications other than service equipment or other than main for separately derived systems.

94 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 10

4.7.3.1 Grounding Conductor Size in Accordance with National Electrical Code

Ground the switchboard frame and any ground bus by means of an equipment grounding conductor having

a size in accordance with Section 250.122 of the National Electrical Code and run with the main supply

conductors or by bonding to the raceway enclosing the main supply conductors in accordance with Sections

250.118 and 250.120 of the National Electrical Code.

4.8 UNUSED OPENINGS

Effectively close all unused openings in the switchboard enclosure.

4.9 DAMP INDOOR LOCATIONS

In damp indoor locations, shield the switchboard so as to prevent moisture and water from entering and

accumulating therein.

4.10 UNUSUAL SERVICE CONDITIONS

Unless the switchboard has been designed for unusual service conditions, it should not be located where it

will be exposed to ambient temperatures above 40°C (104°F), high humidity, corrosive or explosive fumes,

dust, vapors, dripping or standing water, abnormal vibration, mechanical shock, tilting, or other unusual

operating conditions.

95 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 11

Section 5

INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS

5.1 PREVENT MOISTURE OR WATER FROM ENTERING

Conduits and other raceways should be installed to prevent moisture or water from entering and

accumulating within the enclosure. All metallic raceways (including stubs) should be bonded to the

switchboard. All raceways should be located in the areas recommended by the manufacturer to avoid

conductor interference with structural members and live parts. Before pulling any conductors into the

switchboard, verify that their size, temperature rating, and conductor insulation comply with the switchboard

markings. See Section 110.14(C) of the National Electrical Code.

5.2 TEMPERATURE RATINGS

Care should be exercised to ensure that the types and temperature ratings of conductors being installed

in the switchboard are suitable for use with the terminals which have been provided.

5.3 COMPRESSION (CRIMP) TERMINALS

If compression (crimp) terminals are used, crimp with the tool(s) recommended by the manufacturer.

5.4 STRIPPING INSULATION FROM CONDUCTORS

Care should be exercised in stripping insulation from the conductors so as not to nick or ring the conductor.

For aluminum, clean all oxide from the stripped portion and apply an oxide inhibiting compound. All

mechanical terminals should be tightened per the manufacturer's torque specifications. If not furnished,

consult the manufacturer.

5.5 PROPER WIRING METHODS

Refer to Article 300 of the National Electrical Code for proper wiring methods. Conductors should enter the

switchboard in the section in which they are to be terminated, except as noted in Section 408.3(A)(3) of the

National Electrical Code.

5.6 CONDUCTOR LOCATION IN SWITCHBOARD

Provision should be made to locate conductors in the switchboard so that they will be free from physical

damage and to avoid overheating. If required by the manufacturer's instructions, secure the conductors as

necessary in order to withstand short-circuit forces. The largest practical bending radii should be maintained

to avoid damaging the insulation and causing terminals to loosen. Exercise care so that the conductors will

not interfere with any moving parts.

5.7 CONDUCTORS 1/0 AWG IN SIZE AND LARGER

Conductors 1/0 AWG in size and larger may be run in parallel. All parallel conductors should be of the same

size, length, and material to assure the equal division of current, as required by Section 310.4 of the National

Electrical Code. If conductors pass through metal having magnetic properties, all of the circuit conductors,

including the neutral, should be run through the same opening, as specified by Section 300.20(A) of the

National Electrical Code.

96 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 12

5.8 INCOMING AND OUTGOING CONTROL CONNECTIONS

All incoming and outgoing control connections should be made in accordance with the switchboard

manufacturer's schematic and wiring diagrams.

5.9 PREVENT CONDUCTOR INSULATION FROM CRACKING OR SPLITTING

Installation of conductors should be done at temperatures above freezing to prevent conductor insulation

from cracking or splitting, unless the conductor insulation is suitable for installation at temperatures below

freezing.

5.10 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, SECTION 725.54

Refer to the National Electrical Code, Section 725.54 for the separation requirements for conductors of

Class 2 and Class 3 remote control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

97 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 13

Section 6

INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARD INTERIOR

6.1 INSTRUCTIONS IF SWITCHBOARD INTERIOR WAS NOT FACTORY–MOUNTED

Follow these instructions if the switchboard interior(s) was not mounted at the factory.

6.2 UNPACKING

Exercise care in unpacking the switchboard interior to prevent damage.

6.3 INSPECTION

Check for shipping damage and check to make sure the interior is the correct one for the installation.

6.4 STORAGE

Store the switchboard interior in a clean dry place where it will not be subject to physical damage.

6.5 CLEANING

Clean the switchboard enclosure of all foreign material prior to the installation of the interior. If parts at

connection points are splattered with cement, plaster, paint, or other foreign material, remove the foreign

material with great care to avoid damage to the plating.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the switchboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate switchboard components during installation or maintenance.

6.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Carefully follow the switchboard manufacturer's instructions.

6.7 INTERIOR INSTALLATION

Install the interior and tighten it securely in the enclosure. Install the section bus connection to the through

bus, if needed.

98 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 14

Section 7

STEPS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE ENERGIZING

7.1 ACCESSIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Tighten all accessible electrical connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. If such information

is not provided with the equipment, consult the manufacturer.

7.2 BLOCKS OR OTHER TEMPORARY HOLDING MEANS

Remove all blocks or other temporary holding means used for shipment from all component devices and the

switchboard interior.

7.3 INTEGRITY OF ALL BUS MOUNTING MEANS

Check the integrity of all bus mounting means.

7.4 ENCLOSURE

Check the enclosure to see that it has not been damaged in such a manner as to reduce electrical spacings.

7.5 OPERATING MECHANISMS

Manually exercise all switches, circuit breakers, and other operating mechanisms to make certain that they

operate freely.

Check the integrity of all electrical and mechanical interlocks and padlocking mechanisms. For key

interlocked systems, assure that only the required number of keys are accessible to the operator

7.6 ELECTRICAL INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

Conduct an electrical insulation resistance test to ensure that the switchboard is free from short circuit or

ground fault conditions. With the neutral isolated from ground and the switches and circuit breakers open,

conduct electrical insulation resistance tests from phase to phase, phase to ground, phase to neutral, and

neutral to ground. If the resistance reads less than 1 megohm while testing with the branch circuit devices in

the open position, the system may be unsafe and should be investigated. If after the investigation and

possible corrections, low readings are still observed, the manufacturer should be contacted. Some

electronic equipment (metering, TVSS, etc.) may be damaged by this testing. Refer to the manufacturer’s

equipment markings for guidelines.

7.7 ELECTRICAL RELAYS, METERS, AND INSTRUMENTATION

Check electrical relays, meters, and instrumentation to determine that connections are made properly and

that the devices function properly.

7.8 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS, AND OTHER

MECHANISMS

With loads disconnected, electrically exercise all electrically operated switches, circuit breakers, and other

mechanisms to determine that the devices operate properly. An auxiliary source of control power may be

necessary to provide power to the electrical operators.

99 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 15

7.9 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM

Test the ground fault protection system (if furnished) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. See

Section 230.95 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA Standards Publication PB 2.2.

7.10 ADJUSTABLE TIME CURRENT TRIP DEVICE SETTINGS

Set any adjustable time current trip device settings to the proper values.

NOTE—Experience has indicated that damage from overcurrent can be reduced if the devices used for overload and short-circuit

protection are set to operate instantaneously (that is, without intentional time delay) at 115 percent of the highest value of phase current

which is likely to occur as the result of any anticipated motor starting or welding currents.

7.11 FIELD WIRING

Make certain that field wiring is clear of live parts and, when specified by the manufacturer, physically

secured to withstand the effects of short circuits.

7.12 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

Check to determine that all grounding connections are properly made. If the switchboard is used as service

equipment, make certain that the neutral, if present, is properly bonded to the cabinet. If there is no ground

bus, make certain that the sections of the switchboard which are shipped separately are connected in such

a way as to ensure a continuous grounding path.

7.13 FOREIGN MATERIAL

Remove all foreign material from the inside of the switchboard before closing the enclosure.

7.14 COVERS AND DOORS

Install covers, close doors, and make certain that no conductors are pinched and that all enclosure parts are

properly aligned and tightened.

100 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 16

Section 8

ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT

WARNING—HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. ENERGIZING A SWITCHBOARD FOR THE FIRST TIME AFTER

INITIAL INSTALLATION OR MAINTENANCE IS POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS.

8.1 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL PRESENT

Only qualified personnel should energize equipment for the first time. If short circuit conditions caused by

damage or poor installation practices have not been detected in the checkout procedure specified in Section

7, serious personal injury and damage can occur when the power is turned on.

8.2 NO LOAD ON SWITCHBOARD

There should be no load on the switchboard while it is being energized. Turn off all the downstream loads.

8.3 ENERGIZED IN SEQUENCE

The equipment should be energized in sequence by starting at the source end of the system and working

towards the load end. In other words, energize the main devices, then the feeder devices, and then the

branch-circuit devices. Turn the devices on with a firm positive motion.

8.4 AFTER ALL MAIN, FEEDER, AND BRANCH CIRCUIT DEVICES HAVE BEEN CLOSED

After all main, feeder, and branch circuit devices have been closed, loads such as lighting circuits,

contactors, heaters, and motors may be turned on.

101 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 17

Section 9

MAINTENANCE

9.1 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM FOR SWITCHBOARDS

A maintenance program for switchboards should be conducted on a regularly scheduled basis in

accordance with the following:

9.2 FIELD TEST

A switchboard which has been carrying its regular load for at least 3 hours just prior to inspection should

be field tested by feeling the deadfront surfaces of circuit breakers, switches, interior trims, doors, and

enclosure sides with the palm of the hand. If the temperature of these surfaces does not permit you to

maintain contact for at least 3 seconds, this may be an indication of trouble and investigation is necessary.

Thermographic (infrared) scanning has become a useful method of investigating thermal performance.

WARNING—HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED ON SWITCHBOARDS TO WHICH POWER HAS

BEEN TURNED OFF, DISCONNECTED AND ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SO THAT NO ACCIDENTAL

CONTACT CAN BE MADE WITH ENERGIZED PARTS. FOLLOW ALL MANUFACTURER’S

WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

Safety related work practices, as described in NFPA 70E, should be followed at all times.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the switchboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate switchboard components during installation or maintenance.

9.3 SWITCHBOARD INSPECTION ONCE EACH YEAR

Inspect the switchboard once each year or after any severe short circuit.

9.4 ACCUMULATION OF DUST AND DIRT

If there is an accumulation of dust and dirt, clean out the switchboard by using a brush, vacuum cleaner, or

clean lint-free rags. Avoid blowing dust into circuit breakers or other components. Do not use a blower or

compressed air.

9.4.1 All Visible Electrical Joints and Terminals

Carefully inspect all visible electrical joints and terminals in the bus and wiring system.

9.4.2 All Conductors and Connections

Visually check all conductors and connections to be certain that they are clean and secure. Loose and/or

contaminated connections increase electrical resistance which can cause overheating. Such overheating

is indicated by discoloration or flaking of insulation and/or metal parts. Pitting or melting of connecting

surfaces is a sign of arcing due to a loose, or otherwise poor connection. Parts which show evidence of

overheating or looseness should be cleaned and re-torqued or replaced if damaged. Tighten bolts and

nuts at bus joints to manufacturer’s torque specifications.

102 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 18

CAUTION—Do not remove plating from aluminum parts in joints or terminations. Damage to plating can

result in overheating. Replace damaged aluminum parts.

9.4.3 Fuse Clip Contact Pressure and Contact Means

Examine fuse clip contact pressure and contact means. If there is any sign of overheating or looseness

follow the manufacturer’s maintenance instructions or replace the fuse clips. Loose fuse clips can result in

overheating.

9.4.4 All Conditions Which Caused Overheating

Be sure that all conditions which caused the overheating have been corrected.

9.5 PROPER AMPERE, VOLTAGE, AND INTERRUPTING RATINGS

Check circuit breakers, switches, and fuses to ensure they have the proper ampere, voltage, and

interrupting ratings. Ensure that non-current-limiting devices are not used as replacements for

current-limiting devices. Never attempt to defeat rejection mechanisms which are provided to prevent the

installation of the incorrect class of fuse.

9.5.1 All Mechanisms Are Free and in Proper Working Order

Operate each switch or circuit breaker several times to ensure that all mechanisms are free and in proper

working order. Replace as required. See NEMA AB 4 for maintenance of molded case circuit breakers.

9.6 OPERATION OF ALL MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

Check the operation of all mechanical components. Replace as required.

9.6.1 Full On and Off Positions

Exercise switch operating mechanisms and external operators for circuit breakers to determine that they

operate freely to their full on and off positions.

9.6.2 Integrity of Electrical and Mechanical Interlocks

Check the integrity of all electrical and mechanical interlocks and padlocking mechanisms. For key

interlocked systems, assure that only the required number of keys are accessible to the operator.

9.6.3 Missing or Broken Parts

Whenever practical, check all devices for missing or broken parts, proper spring tension, free movement,

corrosion, dirt, and excessive wear.

9.6.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions

Adjust, clean, and lubricate or replace parts according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

9.6.4.1 Clean, Nonmetallic, Light, Grease or Oil

Use clean, nonmetallic, light grease or oil as instructed.

9.6.4.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Do not oil or grease parts of molded case circuit breakers.

9.6.4.3 Lubrication with Clean, Light Grease

If no instructions are given on the devices, sliding copper contacts, operating mechanisms, and interlocks,

they may be lubricated with clean, light grease.

103 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 19

9.6.4.4 Excess Lubrication

Wipe off excess lubrication to avoid contamination.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the switchboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate switchboard components during installation or maintenance.

9.6.5 Readily Accessible Copper Electrical Contacts, Blades, and Jaws

Clean and dress readily accessible copper electrical contacts, blades, and jaws according to the

manufacturer's instructions when inspection indicates the need.

9.7 DETERIORATED INSULATING MATERIAL AND ASSEMBLIES

Look for and replace deteriorated insulating material and assemblies where sealing compounds have

melted.

9.8 MOISTURE OR SIGNS OF PREVIOUS WETNESS

Look for any moisture or signs of previous wetness or dripping inside the switchboard.

NOTE—Condensation in conduits or dripping from outside sources is one known cause of switchboard malfunction.

9.8.1 Conduits Which Have Dripped Condensate

Seal off any conduits which have dripped condensate, and provide means for further condensate to drain

away from the switchboard.

9.8.2 Cracks or Openings

Seal off any cracks or openings which have allowed moisture to enter the enclosure. Eliminate the source

of any dripping on the enclosure and any other source of moisture.

9.8.3 Insulating Material Which is Damp

Replace or thoroughly dry and clean any insulating material which is damp or wet or shows an

accumulation of deposited material from previous wettings.

9.8.4 Moisture Damaged Component Device

Inspect all component devices. Replace any component device which shows evidence of moisture

damage or has been subjected to water damage or flooding. Additional information may be found in the

NEMA document Guidelines for Handling Water Damaged Electrical Equipment.

9.9 WATER DAMAGE

In the event of water damage, e.g., flooding or sprinkler discharge, the manufacturer should be consulted

before clean up and corrective action is attempted.

9.10 SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT

If a severe electrical short circuit has occurred, the excessive currents may have resulted in structural

component and/or bus and conductor damage due to mechanical distortion, thermal damage, metal

deposits, or smoke. Examine all devices and bus supports for cracks or breakage. The manufacturer

should be consulted before clean up and correction is attempted.

104 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 20

9.11 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM

Test the ground fault protection system (if furnished) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

See Section 230.95 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA Standards Publication PB 2.2.

9.12 INSULATION RESISTANCE

Check insulation resistance (See 7.6) under any of the following conditions:

a. If a severe short circuit has occurred. (See 9.10)

b. If it has been necessary to replace parts or clean insulating surfaces

c. If the switchboard has been exposed to high humidity, condensation, or dripping moisture.

105 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 21

Section 10

PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF SWITCHBOARDS

10.1 SWITCHBOARDS WITHOUT MAIN OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

For switchboards without main overcurrent protective devices (main lug switchboard), the total continuous

load current through the supply bus should not exceed the current rating of the switchboard.

10.2 SWITCHBOARDS WITH A SINGLE MAIN OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE

For switchboards with a single main overcurrent protective device, the total continuous load current on the

protective device should not exceed 80 percent of its ampere rating unless the device is rated to carry 100

percent of its ampere rating.

10.3 SWITCHBOARDS WITH A MULTIPLE MAIN OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE

For switchboards with a multiple main overcurrent protective devices, the total continuous current through

the supply bus should not exceed the current rating of the switchboard. The total continuous load current on

each main overcurrent protective device should not exceed 80 percent of its ampere rating unless the device

is rated to carry 100 percent of its ampere rating.

10.4 FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IN

SWITCHBOARDS

For feeder and branch circuit overcurrent protective devices in switchboards, the total continuous load

current on the overcurrent protective device should not exceed 80 percent of its ampere rating unless the

device is rated to carry 100 percent of its ampere rating.

10.5 HARMONICS IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Some types of electrical equipment cause harmonics in the electrical system which may result in

overheating. This condition should be considered when determining switchboard loading.

106 of 292

PB 2.1-2007

Page 22

< This page is intentionally left blank. >

107 of 292

Instruction

Bulletin

Boletín de

instrucciones

Directives

d'utilisation 8291-0068D

11/2011

SDSA3650 Surge Protective Device (SPD)

Dispositivo de protección contra sobretensiones

transitorias (SPD) SDSA3650

Dispositif de protection contre les surtensions

transitoires (SPD) SDSA3650

Replaces / Reemplaza / Remplace 8291-0068C 10/2010

Retain for future use. / Conservar para uso futuro. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur.

Introduction Introducción Introduction

The SDSA3650 Surge Protective Device

(SPD) is designed to provide surge

suppression for three-phase services up

to 600 Vac, including delta (SDSA3650D).

El dispositivo de protección contra

sobretensiones transitorias SDSA3650 ha sido

diseñado para proporcionar supresión de

sobretensiones a acometidas de tres fases

hasta un máximo de 600 V~, incluyendo los

sistemas en delta (SDSA3650D).

Le dispositif de protection contre les surtensions

transitoires SDSA3650 est conçu pour fournir la

suppression des surtensions transitoires pour

des services triphasés jusqu'à 600 V~, y

compris le dispositif en triangle (SDSA3650D).

Precautions Precauciones Précautions

DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective

equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA

70E.

• This equipment must only be installed

and serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this

equipment before working on or inside

equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage

sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers

before turning on power to this

equipment.

• This equipment must be effectively

grounded per all applicable codes.

Use an equipment-grounding

conductor to connect this equipment

to the power system ground.

PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA,

EXPLOSIÓN O DESTELLO POR ARQUEO

• Utilice equipo de protección personal (EPP)

apropiado y siga las prácticas de seguridad en

trabajos eléctricos establecidas por su

Compañía, consulte la norma 70E de NFPA y

NOM-029-STPS.

• Solamente el personal eléctrico especializado

deberá instalar y prestar servicio de

mantenimiento a este equipo.

• Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar

cualquier trabajo dentro o fuera de él.

• Siempre utilice un dispositivo detector de

tensión nominal adecuado para confirmar la

desenergización del equipo.

• Vuelva a colocar todos los dispositivos, las

puertas y las cubiertas antes de volver a

energizar el equipo.

• Este equipo deberá estar correctamente

conectado a tierra de acuerdo con los códigos

aplicables. Utilice un conductor de conexión a

tierra del equipo para conectar este último a la

tierra del sistema de alimentación.

RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION,

D'EXPLOSION OU D'ÉCLAIR D'ARC

• Portez un équipement de protection

personnelle (ÉPP) approprié et observez les

méthodes de travail électrique sécuritaire.

Voir NFPA 70E.

• Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer

l'installation et l'entretien de cet appareil.

• Coupez toutes les alimentations de l'appareil

avant d'y travailler.

• Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de

tension à valeur nominale appropriée pour

vous assurer que l'alimentation est coupée.

• Replacez tous les dispositifs, les portes et

les couvercles avant de mettre l'appareil

sous tension.

• Cet appareil doit être effectivement mis à la

terre selon tous les codes en vigueur.

Utilisez un conducteur de m.à.l.t. d'appareil

pour raccorder celui-ci à la terre du système

d'alimentation.

Failure to follow these instructions

will result in death or serious injury.

El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones

podrá causar la muerte o lesiones serias.

Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées,

cela entraînera la mort ou des blessures

graves.

™

SDSA3650 SDSA3650D

108 of 292

SDSA3650 Surge Protective Device (SPD)

Dispositivo de protección contra sobretensiones transitorias (SPD) SDSA3650 8291-0068D

Dispositif de protection contre les surtensions transitoires (SPD) SDSA3650 11/2011

CAUTION / PRECAUCIÓN / ATTENTION

LOSS OF SURGE SUPPRESSION

Turn off all power supplying the

equipment and isolate the Surge

Protective Device before Megger® or

hi-potential testing.

PÉRDIDA DE SUPRESIÓN DE

SOBRETENSIONES TRANSITORIAS

Desenergice el equipo y aísle el dispositivo de

protección contra sobretensiones transitorias

antes de realizar cualquier prueba de rigidez

dieléctrica o con Megger®.

PERTE DE LA SUPPRESSION DES

SURTENSIONS TRANSITOIRES

Coupez toute alimentation de cet appareil et

isolez le dispositif de protection contre les

surtensions transitoires avant de procéder à

l'essai de rupture diélectrique ou avec Megger®.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in equipment damage.

El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones

puede causar daño al equipo.

Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées,

cela peut entraîner des dommages

matériels.

Table / Tabla / Tableau 1 : General Specifications / Especificaciones generales / Spécifications générales 1 2

1Contains no serviceable parts / Contiene piezas libres de mantenimiento / Ne contient aucune pièce à réparer ou entretenir

2Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 200 kA rms symmetrical amperes. / Se puede usar en un circuito capaz de suministrar no más

de 200 kA simétricos rcm. / Convient à un circuit capable de fournir pas plus de 200 kA RMS symétriques.

Description / Descripción / Description Wye / Conexión en estrella /

Raccordement en étoile

Delta / Conexión en delta /

Raccordement en triangle

Product Catalog Number / No. de catálogo del producto /

No de catalogue de produit SDSA3650 SDSA3650E SDSA3650D

Maximum Surge Current /

Corriente transitoria máx. /

Courant max. de surtension

40 kA/Phase / 40 kA/fase / 40 kA/phase

System Voltage (Uo) /

Tensión del sistema (Uo) /

Tension du système (Uo)

208Y/120 V, 380Y/220 V,

400Y/230 V, 480Y/277 V,

600Y/347 V

240 V, 480 V, 600 V, 240/120 V

High-Leg Delta / extremo alto de una instalación

en delta / sommet du triangle

Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV), (Uc) /

Tensión máxima de funcionamiento continuo (MCOV), (Uc) /

Tension de fonctionnement continu maximale (MCOV), (Uc)

L-N 750 V, L-L 1500 V L-L 1500 V

Connection Method /

Método de conexión /

Méthode de raccordement

Parallel, 12 AWG Wire /

Conductor sólido calibre 3,31 mm2 (12 AWG), paralelo /

En parallèle, fil rigide de calibre 12 AWG

Lead Length / Longitud de los conductores /

Longueur des conducteurs 20 ±1 in. / pulg / po 36 ±1 in. / pulg / po 20 ±1 in. / pulg / po

Operating and Storage Temperature /

Temperatura de funcionamiento y almacenamiento /

Température de fonctionnement et d'entreposage

-40 °F to +160 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) /

-40 °C a +70 °C (-40 °F a +160 °F) /

-40 °C a +70 °C (-40 °F a +160 °F)

Frequency / Frecuencia / Fréquence 50/60 Hz

Diagnostics / Diagnóstico / Diagnostics Green Status LEDs / LED de estado verde / DÉL d'état verte

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

109 of 292

SDSA3650 Surge Protective Device (SPD)

8291-0068D Dispositivo de protección contra sobretensiones transitorias (SPD) SDSA3650

11/2011 Dispositif de protection contre les surtensions transitoires (SPD) SDSA3650

Installation Instalación Installation

1. Turn off all power supplying this

equipment before working on or

inside equipment.

1. Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar

cualquier trabajo dentro o fuera de él.

1. Couper toutes les alimentations de l'appareil

avant d'y travailler.

2. For mounting, see Figure 1. 2. Para obtener detalles de montaje, vea la

figura 1.

2. Pour le montage voir la figure 1.

3. Confirm SPD is rated for the system

by comparing voltage measurements

to the Line Voltage (L-L, L-N) on the

product label (see Figure 2).

3. Asegúrese de que el SPD sea adecuado

para su sistema comparando las

mediciones de tensión en la tensión de

línea (L-L, L-N), especificadas en la etiqueta

del producto (vea la figura 2).

3. S'assurer que le SPD est de la valeur

nominale convenant à votre système en

comparant les mesures de tension à la

tension de ligne (L-L, L-N) sur l'étiquette du

produit (voir la figure 2).

4. Confirm the black wires are

connected to the line wires and the

neutral wire is connected to the white

wire (see Figure 2).

NOTE: Delta model SDSA3650D does

not include or require a white wire.

4. Asegúrese de que los conductores negros

estén conectados a los conductores de

línea y el conductor blanco al conductor

neutro (vea la figura 2).

NOTA: El modelo SDSA3650D en delta no

incluye ni requiere conductor blanco.

4. S’assurer que les fils noirs sont raccordés

aux fils de ligne et que le fil blanc est

raccordé au fil du neutre (voir la figure 2).

REMARQUE : Le modèle SDSA3650D en

triangle (delta) n'inclut pas ou n'exige pas un fil

blanc.

5. Twist wires 1/2 turn every 12 in.

(30 cm) of length.

5. Tuerza los conductores ½ vuelta o más por

cada 305 mm (12 pulgadas) de longitud.

5. Torsader les conducteurs de 1/2 tour ou

plus par 305 mm (12 po) de longueur.

6. Keep conductor length as short as

possible with no sharp bends.

6. Mantenga la longitud de los conductores lo

más corta posible evitando doblarlos en

ángulo recto.

6. Maintenir la longueur des conducteurs aussi

courte que possible et sans courbures

accentuées.

NOTE: Do not loop or coil wires. NOTA: No haga bucles o enrolle los cables. REMARQUE : Ne pas faire de boucles et

ne pas enrouler les fils.

7. Install cover and/or close door on

equipment.

7. Instale la cubierta y/o cierre la puerta del

equipo.

7. Installer le couvercle ou fermer la porte de

l'appareil.

Figure / Figura / Figure 1 : Mounting and Wiring / Montaje y alambrado / Montage et câblage

Figure / Figura / Figure 2 : Wiring / Alambrado / Câblage

Nut / Tuerca

/ Écrou

Panel / Tablero / Panneau

Knockout /

Disco removible /

Débouchure

Black

White

Black

White

Black

White

BlackBlack

Black

SDSA3650/SDSA3650E

3-phase, 4-wire

208Y/120 Vac, or 480Y/277 Vac,

or 600Y/347 Vac

3 fases, 4 hilos de 208Y/120 V~ (ca),

o 480Y/277 V~ (ca) o 600/347 V~ (ca)

Triphasé à 4-fils de 208Y/120 Vca,

ou 480Y/277 Vca, ou 600Y/347 Vca

Black

Negro

Noir

White

Blanco

Blanc

SDSA3650/SDSA3650E

3-phase, 4-wire 240/120 Vac

High-Leg Delta

3 fases, 4 hilos de 240/120 V~ (ca)

extremo alto de una instalación

en delta

Triphasé à 4-fils 240/120 Vca

sommet du triangle

SDSA3650/SDSA3650E

3-phase, 4-wire (corner grounded)

240 Vac, or 480 Vac, or 600 Vac

3 fases, 4 hilos (puesto a tierra en

esquina) de 240 V~ (ca), o 480 V~ (ca),

o 600 V~ (ca)

Triphasé à 4-fils (mis à la terre par le

coin) 240 Vca, ou 480 Vca, ou 600 Vca

SDSA3650D

3-phase, 3-wire (ungrounded)

240 Vac, or 480 Vac, or 600 Vac

3 fases, 3 hilos (sin conexión a

tierra) de 240 V~ (ca), o

480 V~ (ca), o 600 V~ (ca)

Triphasé à 3-fils (non mis à la

terre) 240 Vca, ou 480 Vca, ou

600 Vca

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

110 of 292

SDSA3650 Surge Protective Device (SPD)

Dispositivo de protección contra sobretensiones transitorias (SPD) SDSA3650 8291-0068D

Dispositif de protection contre les surtensions transitoires (SPD) SDSA3650 11/2011

Square D™ and Schneider Electric™ are

trademarks or registered trademarks of

Schneider Electric. Other trademarks

used herein are the property of their

respective owners.

Square D™ y Schneider Electric™ son marcas

comerciales o marcas registradas de Schneider Electric.

Cualquier otra marca comercial utilizada en este

documento pertenece a sus respectivos propietarios.

Square DMC et Schneider ElectricMC sont marques

commerciales ou marques déposées de Schneider

Electric. Toutes autres marques commerciales utilisées

dans ce document sont la propriété de leurs

propriétaires respectifs.

Schneider Electric USA

1751 S. 4800 W.

Salt Lake City, UT 84104 USA

1-888-778-2733

www.schneider-electric.us

Importado en México por:

Schneider Electric México, S.A. de C.V.

Calz. J. Rojo Gómez 1121-A

Col. Gpe. del Moral 09300 México, D.F.

Tel. 55-5804-5000

www.schneider-electric.com.mx

Schneider Electric Canada, Inc.

5985 McLaughlin Road

Mississauga On, L5R 1B8

Tel: 1-800-565-6699

www.schneider-electric.ca

Electrical equipment should be installed,

operated, serviced, and maintained only by

qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed

by Schneider Electric for any consequences

arising out of the use of this material.

Solamente el personal especializado deberá instalar,

hacer funcionar y prestar servicios de mantenimiento al

equipo eléctrico. Schneider Electric no asume

responsabilidad alguna por las consecuencias

emergentes de la utilización de este material.

Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation,

l’utilisation, l’entretien et la maintenance du matériel

électrique. Schneider Electric n’assume aucune

responsabilité des conséquences éventuelles

découlant de l’utilisation de cette documentation.

Figure / Figura / Figure 3 : Diagnostic Operation / Diagnóstico del funcionamiento del equipo /

Diagnostic de fonctionnement

•LED ON = Normal Operation

•LED OFF = Check circuit breakers

and connections. Verify line voltage at

point of connection; if all correct,

replace unit.

•LED ENCENDIDO = funcionamiento normal

•LED APAGADO = Revise los interruptores

automáticos y las conexiones. Verifique la

tensión de línea en el punto de conexión; si

todo se encuentra en órden, sustituya el

SPD.

•DÉL ALLUMÉE = Fonctionnement normal

•DÉL ÉTEINTE = Vérifier les disjoncteurs et

les raccordements. Vérifier la tension de

ligne au point de raccordement; si tout est

correct, remplacer le SPD.

Dimensions Dimensiones Dimensions

Figure / Figura / Figure 4 : Dimensions / Dimensiones / Dimensions

LED ON = OK /

LED ENCENDIDO =

funcionamiento normal /

DÉL ALLUMÉE = OK

LED OFF = Loss of surge suppression /

LED APAGADO = pérdida de supresión de sobretensiones transitorias /

DÉL ÉTEINTE = Perte de suppression des surtensions transitoires /

3.00

[76]

3.60

[92]

3.39

[86]

2.64

[67]

in. / pulg / po

[mm]

NOTE: Knockout trade size is 0.5 in. (13 mm).

Actual hole size is 0.875 in. (22 mm).

NOTA: El tamaño estándar del disco

desprendible es de 13 mm (0,5 pulg). El tamaño

real del agujero es de 22 mm (0,875 pulg).

REMARQUE: La taille commerciale des

débouchures est de 13 mm (0,5 po). Taille

réelle du trou : 22 mm [0,875 po].

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

111 of 292

PowerLogic™ Series 800 Power Meter

Installation Guide

63230-500-282A1

English

Safety Precautions

Read and follow all safety precautions and instructions before installing and working with

this equipment.

Additional Resources

The Series 800 Power Meter User Guide provides additional information and is available

online. Go to http://www.schneider-electric.com > in the Search window enter PM800 > in

the drop-down box click PM800 - Power meter > On PM800 screen, click the Downloads

tab, then click the Tech publications tab > click on the document name to download or

read the document file. Firmware updates can also be downloaded at this Web site.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work

practices. In the USA, see NFPA 70E.

• Only qualified electrical workers should install this equipment. Such work should be

performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.

• NEVER work alone.

• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this equipment, disconnect

all sources of electric power. Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely

de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay particular attention to the design of the power system.

Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.

• Turn off all power supplying the power meter and the equipment in which it is installed before

working on it.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off.

• Before closing all covers and doors, carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that

may have been left inside the equipment.

• Use caution while removing or installing panels so that they do not extend into the energized

bus; avoid handling the panels, which could cause personal injury.

• The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling, installation, and

operation. Neglecting fundamental installation requirements may lead to personal injury as

well as damage to electrical equipment or other property.

• NEVER bypass external fusing.

• NEVER short the secondary of a PT.

• NEVER open circuit a CT; use a shorting block to short circuit the leads of the CT before

removing the connection from the power meter.

• Before performing Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger testing on any equipment in which the power

meter is installed, disconnect all input and output wires to the power meter. High voltage

testing may damage electronic components contained in the power meter.

• The power meter should be installed in a suitable electrical enclosure.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury

Introduction

The Series 800 Power Meter ships in three different configurations. The following icons are

used in this document to highlight features specific to each of these configurations:

Box Contents

Power Meter Hardware

Power meter with integrated display

Power meter unit only

Power meter unit with remote display

Table 1: Box contents based on model

Model Description Box Contents

•1 power meter

•1 hardware kit (63230-500-16) containing:

— 4 connectors

—9 lugs

— 2 mounting clips

— 1 terminator (MCT2W)

— 1 template

•1 installation guide

Additionally includes: •1 display integrated with the power meter (PM8D(MG))

Additionally includes:

•1 remote display (63230-500-120(MG))

•1 remote display adapter (PM8RDA)

•1 hardware kit (63230-500-96) containing:

— 1 communications cable (CAB3M)

— 4 screws

— 2 display retainers

•1 hardware kit (633230-500-163):

— 1 4-wire RS485 Comm 2 connector

— 1 crimp connector

•1 DIN slide (installed on unit)

•1 remote display installation guide

Additionally includes: •1 DIN slide (installed on unit)

Figure 1: Series 800 Power Meter with integrated display

Table 2: Parts of the power meter with integrated display

No. Part Description

1 Control power supply connector Connection for control power to the power meter.

2 Voltage inputs Voltage metering connections.

3 I/O connector KY pulse output/digital input connections.

4 Heartbeat LED A green flashing LED indicates the power meter is ON.

5 RS485 port (COM1)

The RS485 port is used for communications with a

monitoring and control system. This port can be daisy-

chained to multiple devices.

6 Option module connector Used to connect option modules to the power meter.

7 Current inputs Current metering connections.

8 Integrated display Visual interface to configure and operate the power meter.

123

Bottom View

Back View

Front View

112 of 292

Figure 2: Series 800 Power Meter without display

Table 3: Parts of the Power Meter without display

No. Part Description

1 Control power supply connector Connection for control power to the power meter.

2 Voltage inputs Voltage metering connections.

3 I/O connector KY pulse output/digital input connections.

4 Display connector Used to connect an integrated display or a Remote Display

Adapter (PM8RDA).

5 RS485 port (COM1)

The RS485 port is used for communications with a

monitoring and control system. This port can be daisy-

chained to multiple devices.

6 Option module connector Used to connect option modules to the power meter.

7 Current inputs Current metering connections.

8 Heartbeat LED A green flashing LED indicates the power meter is ON.

Bottom View

Back View

Front View

Figure 3: Series 800 Power Meter with Remote Display and Adapter

Table 4: Parts of the Power Meter with Remote Display and Adapter (see

Figure 2 for connector detail)

No. Part Description

1 Power meter unit

2 Remote display adapter (PM8RDA)

Provides the connection between the remote display and

the power meter, and provides an additional RS232/

RS485 connection (2- or 4-wire).

3 Remote display cable Connects the remote display to the remote display adapter

(meter).

4 Remote display Visual interface to configure and operate the power meter.

5 Communications mode button Use to select the communications mode (RS232 or

RS485).

6 Communications mode LED When lit, the LED indicates the communications port is in

RS232 mode.

7 RS232/RS485 port

The RS485 port is used for communications with a

monitoring and control system. This port can be daisy-

chained to multiple devices.

8 Tx/Rx Activity LED The LED flashes to indicate communications activity.

9 Remote display connector Connects the remote display to the remote display

adapter (meter).

2314

56 7 98

PM8RDA Top View

Installation

Installation Considerations

When choosing a mounting location, consider the following points:

• Allow for easy access to all parts of the power meter. Allow extra space for wiring, fuse

disconnects, shorting blocks, accessories, or other components. Make sure to route the

wires so they do not cover the back of the unit or cooling vents on the power meter.

• Install the power meter in a protective enclosure (for example, in the USA use a Type 1

rated enclosure or better).

• For European Community (CE) compliance, the disconnect circuit breaker must be

placed within reach of the power meter and labeled: Disconnect Circuit Breaker for

Power Meter.

NOTE: The disconnect circuit breaker must be rated for the short circuit current at the

connection points.

• Locate the power meter in an area where immediate environmental conditions fall within

the acceptable range. For control power voltages above 300 Vac, the temperature range

for the meter block is -25°C to +65°C. The front display has a range of -10°C to +50°C.

Wire Specifications

Voltage inputs up to 600 Vac L-L / 347 Vac L-N and control power up to 415 Vac / 250 Vdc

complies with metering category III (refer to online documentation for detailed specs). Also,

terminal wiring insulation should have a minimum temperature rating of 80°C. Polarity

marks (■) must be followed as shown for CTs and PTs.

Dimensions and Mounting

Power Meter with Integrated Display

CAUTION

IMPROPER VENTILATION

• Mount the power meter only as described in this document.

• Provide clearances around the power meter as illustrated in Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

Figure 4: Power meter with integrated display dimensions

Figure 5: Clearances for mounting a single power meter

(3.78)

69.4

(2.73)

17.8

(0.70)

90.5

(3.56)

20 (0.78)

for each

option module

127.2

(5.01)

109.4

(4.31)

92 +0.8

–0.0

(3.62)

92 +0.8

–0.0 (3.62)

mm (in.)

20 (0.787)

(0.197)

106 (4.174)

136

(5.354)

mm (in)

113 of 292

Figure 6: Clearances for mounting multiple power meters

Figure 7: Mounting the power meter into the panel

Power Meter Without Display

DIN Rail Mounting

Figure 8: DIN Rail Mounting

Power Meter With Remote Display

The PM8XXRD ships with a remote display and a remote display adapter (PM8RDA)

already installed (see Figure 3). For detailed mounting instructions, refer to the installation

guide that ships with the remote display models. To mount, do the following:

1. Place the power meter unit behind the round or square cutout (see Figures 9 and 11).

2. Position the remote display on the front of the panel and attach the two retainers and

screws (see Figures 9 and 11).

NOTE: If you have a 4-inch diameter cutout, you will need the PM8G mounting adapter.

3. Mount the assembled power meter unit, the PM8RD, and option modules (see

Figure 10).

4. Use the remote display cable to connect the PM8RDA to the remote display.

PM8XXU models can be used with a remote display kit (PM8RD). The power meter units of

the remote display models mount on a DIN rail as shown in Figure 10. The power meter

units are exactly the same in the RD, U, and I models.

1. Using the template included with the power

meter, make a square cutout 92 mm x 92 mm

(3.62 in. x 3.62 in.).

2. Insert the power meter through the cutout.

3. Attach the two mounting clips to the power

meter as shown.

There are two sets of mounting slots. The

first set is for installation locations thinner

than 3 mm (1/8 in.); the second is for

installation locations 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 in.).

NOTE: Use on a flat surface of a protective

enclosure (for example, in the USA use a Type 1

rated enclosure or better).

mm (in.)

10 (0.39)

(3.62)

+0.8

–0.0

(3.62)

+0.8

–0.0

HORIZONTAL

mm (in)

(1.57)

(3.62)

+0.8

–0.0

(3.62)

+0.8

–0.0

VERTICAL

(<1/8)

3 to 6

(1/8 to 1/4)

mm (in.)

1. Refer to the section on Installation

Considerations.

2. Place the power meter so that the slot

in the base rests on one edge of the

35 mm DIN rail, and snap it securely

into place.

NOTE: DIN rail mounting is used to install

power meters that do not include an

integrated display.

CAUTION

ESD-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT

You must ground yourself and discharge any static charge before removing or

attaching the display.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

Replacing Analog Meters

You can replace an analog meter using a PM800 with an integrated display or a PM800

with a remote display.

To replace an analog meter with an integrated display model, complete the following steps:

1. Remove the original meter. Refer to the meter’s documentation for instructions.

NOTE: After removing the original meter, if you have a 4-inch diameter cutout, you will

need the PM8G mounting adapter.

2. Ground yourself and discharge any static charge.

3. If you have a PM800 with Integrated Display, remove the display from the power meter.

a. Insert a screwdriver into the engraved slot of one of the clips on the display.

b. Gently, but firmly, pull the screwdriver towards the front of the power meter display

until the clip releases. Be sure to hold the display to keep the clip from reattaching.

c. Repeat steps 3a and 3b to release the adjacent clip and the clips on the other side.

d. Gently pull the display off of the power meter.

4. Place the power meter behind the round cut-out.

5. Replace the display onto the power meter through the cut-out. The clips on the top and

bottom of the display will securely snap into place.

6. Attach the two mounting clips to the power meter (see Figure 7).

7. If you have a PM800 with Remote Display, refer to the product’s installation guide, and

see also the previous section titled, Power Meter With Remote Display.

Figure 9: Replacing analog meters with PM800 Remote Display models

Figure 10: PM8RDA dimensions and mounting

[in]

4 x Ø4

[Ø0.157]

[3.376]

Ø102

[Ø4.000]

12 [0.457]

[3.780]

[0.839]

[3.230]

[0.751]

PM8G

(not included)

111

[4.382]

132

[5.236]

[3.600]

112

[4.409]

[3.569]

B DC

[in]

A. 35 mm DIN rail

B. Option modules

C. Power Meter without

display

D. Remote display

adapter (PM8RDA)

114 of 292

PM800 Remote Display Dimensions and Mounting Options

Surface Mount for CM3000/CM4000 Display Retrofit with

a PM800 Remote Display

Refer to section titled Power Meter With Remote Display, and see Figure 12.

Wiring

Supported System Types

NOTE: *Current inputs (CTs) must have spade or ring terminal connections.

NOTE: For replacement connectors, order hardware kit 63230-500-16.

Figure 11: Square cutout and mounting for Remote Display

Figure 12: Surface Mount for CM3000/CM4000 Display Retrofit with a PM800

Remote Display Model

(3.62)

(0.457)

(3.780)

(0.839)

(0.751)

(in)

[3.000]

[2.125]

[1.063]

13 [0.500]

4 x Ø4

[Ø0.157]

Ø22 (Ø32 max)

[Ø0.880]

[3.780]

[0.394]

[3.230]

[1.220]

[in]

Table 5: Wire Connection Specifications for PM800

Description Connection

Numbers Wire Dimensions Torque Insulation

Strip Length

Power supply 1 to 3 12 to 24 AWG 2.5 to 0.2 mm25 lb·in 0.56 N·m 1/4 in 6.35 mm

Voltage inputs (PTs) 8 to 11 12 to 24 AWG 2.5 to 0.2 mm25 lb·in 0.56 N·m 1/4 in 6.35 mm

Current inputs (CTs)

12 to 17 12 to 24 AWG 2.5 to 0.2 mm212 lb·in 1.35 N·m 5/16 in*8.0 mm*

RS485

communications 18 to 20 12 to 24 AWG 2.5 to 0.2 mm25 lb·in 0.56 N·m 1/4 in 6.35 mm

I/Os 4 to 7 12 to 24 AWG 2.5 to 0.2 mm25 lb·in 0.56 N·m 1/4 in 6.35 mm

Table 6: Voltages Less Than or Equal to 347Vac L-N/600Vac L-L, Direct

Connect, No PTs

Single- or Two-Phase Wiring

Number

Wires

CTs Voltage Connections Meter Configuration

Figure

Number

Qty. ID Qty. ID Type System

Type

PT Primary

Scale

21 I1 2 V1, Vn L-N 10 No PT 1

1 I1 2 V1, V2 L-L 11 No PT 2

3 2 I1, I2 3 V1, V2, Vn L-L with N 12 No PT 3

Three-Phase Wiring

2 I1, I3 3 V1, V2, V3 Delta 30 No PT 4

3 I1, I2, I3 3 V1, V2, V3 Delta 31 No PT 5

1 I1 3 V1, V2, V3 Delta

(balanced) 32 No PT 6

3 I1, I2, I3 3 V1, V2, V3, Vn 4-wire Delta 40 No PT 7

3 I1, I2, I3 3 V1, V2, V3, Vn Wye 40 No PT 7

1 I1 3 V1, V2, V3, Vn Wye

(balanced) 44 No PT 8

The following symbols are used in the wiring diagrams:

NOTE: The disconnect circuit breaker must be placed within reach of the power meter and

labeled: Disconnect Circuit Breaker for Power Meter.

NOTE: In 2 PT systems, these connections are equivalent.

NOTE: The direction in which current and voltages flow affects measurements. Therefore,

pay close attention to the polarity marks when connecting CTs and PTs (X1=S1=  ).

Table 7: Voltages Greater Than 347 Vac L-N/600 Vac L-L

Three-Phase Wiring

Number

Wires

CTs Voltage Connections Meter Configuration

Figure

Number

Qty. ID Qty. ID Type System

Type

PT Primary

Scale

2I1, I32 V1, V3

(V2 to Ground) Delta 30 Based on

voltage 9

3 I1, I2, I3 2 V1, V3

(V2 to Ground) Delta 31 Based on

voltage 10

1I12 V1, V3

(V2 to Ground)

Delta

(balanced) 32 Based on

voltage 11

3 I1, I2, I3 3 V1, V2, V3,

(Vn to Ground) Wye 40 Based on

voltage 12

2 I1, I2, I3 3 V1, V2, V3,

(Vn to Ground)

Wye

(balanced) 40 Based on

voltage 13

3 I1, I2, I3 2 V1, V3

(Vn to Ground) Wye 42 Based on

voltage 14

1I13

V1, V2, V3,

(Vn to Ground)

Wye

(balanced) 44 Based on

voltage 15

Table 8: Wiring Diagram Symbols

Symbol Description

Voltage disconnect

Fuse

Earth ground

Current transformer

US equivalent:

S2=X2

S1=X1= ■

Shorting block

Potential transformer

US equivalent:

Table 8: Wiring Diagram Symbols (continued)

Symbol Description

115 of 292

Figure 1: 1-Phase Line-to-Neutral 2-Wire

System 1 CT

Figure 2: 2-Phase Line-to-Line 2-Wire

+System 1 CT

NOTES:

•Use system type 10.

NOTES:

•Use system type 11

Figure 3: 2-Phase 3-Wire Direct Voltage

Connection 2 CT

Figure 4: 3-Phase 3-Wire 2 CT no PT

NOTES:

•Use system type 12.

NOTES:

•Use system type 30.

NL1

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

L1 L2

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

Figure 5: 3-Phase 3-Wire 3 CT no PT Figure 6: 3-Phase 3-Wire Direct Voltage Input

Connection 1 CT (balanced)

NOTES:

•Use system type 31.

•The meter displays “Ig” (ground current).

NOTES:

•Use system type 32.

•

Neutral current readings will be reported as zero.

Figure 7: 3-Phase 4-Wire Wye Direct Voltage

Input Connection 3 CT

Figure 8: 3-Phase 4-Wire Direct Voltage Input

Connection 1 CT (balanced)

NOTES:

•Use with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V

systems.

•Use system type 40.

NOTES:

•Use system type 44.

•Neutral current readings will be reported as

zero.

L2 L3 L1

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

L2 L3 L1 N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

Figure 9: 3-Phase 3-Wire Delta Connection

2CT 2 PT

Figure 10: 3-Phase 3-Wire Delta Connection

3CT 2PT

NOTES:

•For an open delta PT connection with 120 V

L-L secondaries, use system type 30.

NOTES:

•Use System type 31.

•The meter displays “Ig” (ground current).

•For an open delta PT connection with 120 V L-L

secondaries, use system type 31.

Figure 11: 3-Phase 3-Wire 1CT 2PT

(balanced)

Figure 12: 3-Phase 4-Wire Wye Connection

3 CT 3 PT

NOTES:

•Use system type 32.

•Neutral current readings will be reported as

zero.

NOTES:

•Use system type 40.

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

L2 L3 L1

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

L2 L3 L1 N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

Figure 13: 3-Phase 4-Wire Wye 3-wire

3 PT 2 CT

Figure 14: 3-Phase 4-Wire Wye 3CT 2PT

NOTES:

•Use system type 40.

•

Neutral current readings will be reported as

zero.

NOTES:

•Use system type 42.

Figure 15: 3-Phase 4-Wire Wye 3PT 1CT

(balanced)

NOTES:

•Use system type 44.

•Neutral current readings will be reported as

zero.

L2 L3 L1 N

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

L2 L3 L1 N

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

L2 L3 L1 N

V ≤ 600 Vac

L-L

V ≤ 347 Vac

L-N

I1+

I1–

I2+

I2–

I3+

I3–

116 of 292

Figure 16: Direct Connect Control Power

(Phase to Phase)

Figure 17: Direct Connect Control Power

(Phase to Neutral)

Figure 18: Direct Connect Control Power

(DC Control Power)

Figure 19: Control Power Transformer

Connection

Table 9: Fuse Recommendation

Control Power Source Source Voltage (Vs)Fuse Fuse Amperage

CPT Vs125 V FNM or MDL 250 mA

CPT 125 < Vs240 V FNQ or FNQ-R 250 mA

L1 L2 L3

123

PM800

Phase to Phase only when voltage<415

±10 % VAC max.

L1 L2 L3N

123

PM800

Phase to Neutral only when voltage<415

±10 % VAC max.

123

PM800

DC Control Power

100 Vdc < V < 300 Vdc

L1 L2 L3N

CPT

123

PM800

L1 L2 L3N

123

PM800

Control Power Transformer

120 or 240 Vac Secondary 50 Va max.

Line Voltage Vs240 V FNQ-R 250 mA

Line Voltage Vs> 240 V FNQ-R 250 mA

DC Vs 300 V LP-CC 500 mA

The voltage input protection devices must be rated for the short circuit current at the connection points.

Figure 13: Standard Input/Output Wiring

CAUTION

VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS OVER 500 V CAN DAMAGE DIGITAL INPUTS

• Do not use digital inputs to directly monitor circuits with highly inductive loads.

• Use auxiliary contacts and isolated power supply when monitoring inductive loads.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in equipment damage.

Table 9: Fuse Recommendation (continued)

Control Power Source Source Voltage (Vs)Fuse Fuse Amperage

PM800

Load

≤ 100 mA

Power Source

3 - 250 Vdc

6 - 220 Vac

Power Source

24 - 125 Vdc / Vac

Status Switch or

Auxiliary Contact

Digital Output / Pulse Output

KY is a solid state pulse output

rated for 250 VDC max. or

220 Vac max.

Maximum load current is 100 mA

at 25°C. Derate 0.56 mA per °C

above 25°C.

Digital Input / Status Input / Pulse Input

C1 is the common or voltage reference.

S1 is the status input signal.

Overcurrent Protective Device

(not supplied)

NOTE: The overcurrent protective device

must be rated for the short circuit current

at the connection point.

45 67

Switching of inductive devices such as relay coils and motors results in high voltage

transients from back electromotive force (EMF). To monitor this type of circuit, use an

isolated power supply, such as the 24 Vdc power supply included with the PM8M26, and an

auxiliary contact on the circuit breaker or switch.

Communications

Power Meter Communications Capabilities

Figure 14: Power meters with integrated displays connected to a PC serial port

through the onboard 2-wire RS485 port

Daisy-chaining Devices to the Power Meter

The RS485 port allows the power meter to be connected in a daisy chain with up to 32,

2-wire devices. In this document, communications link refers to a chain of devices that are

connected by a communications cable.

To daisy-chain devices to the power meter, use communications cable containing a

twisted-shielded pair (Belden 9841 or equivalent) and the three-terminal connector of the

RS485 port on the power meter.To connect to the power meter, follow these steps:

1. Strip 6 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the cable wires and insert one end

into the holes in the connector.

2. On the top of the connector, torque the wire binding screws 0.56–0.79 N•m ( 5–7 lb•in).

Table 10: COM1 2-wire, RS485 Port Capabilities

Communications port

RS485:

•2-wire with shield

•EIA compliant

•Allows the power meter to be connected to a

daisy chain of up to 31 devices

Baud rate 9600*, 19200, 38400

Communications distances See Table 11.

Protocols Modbus RTU*, Jbus, Modbus ASCII

Parity ODD, EVEN*, NONE

*default

Table 11: 2-wire, RS485 Communications Distances

Baud Rate

Maximum Communication Distances

1 to 32 Devices

9600 2,438 m (8,000 ft.)

19200 1,829 m (6,000 ft)

38400 914 m (3,000 ft)

NOTES:

•Distances are for 2-wire devices and 4-wire devices configured for 2-wire operation.

•Distances listed should be used as a guide only and cannot be guaranteed for non-PowerLogic

devices. Refer to the master device’s documentation for any additional distance limitations.

Figure 15: RS485 connection

Belden 9841 (or

equivalent cable)

1 to 32 power meters

Host

RS232/485 Modbus

RTU 2-wire converter

D1+

Silver

White with blue

stripe

Blue with white

stripe

0.56–0.79 N•m

(5-7 lb•in)

117 of 292

2-wire Devices

To daisy-chain the power meter to another 2-wire PowerLogic device, wire the power

meter’s RS485 communications terminals to the matching communications terminals of the

next device. In other words, wire the D1 (+) terminal of the power meter to the D1 (+)

terminal of the next device, wire D0 (–) to D0 (–), and shield ( ) to shield ( ) as shown in

Figure 16.

• If the power meter is the first device on the daisy chain, connect it to the host device

using the MCI-101 kit (or equivalent RS232 to RS422/RS485 converter).

• If the power meter is the last device on the daisy chain, terminate it. See below.

• See Table 11 for the maximum daisy-chain communications distances for 2-wire

devices.

Terminating the Communications Link

For proper RS485 communications performance, you must use the MCT2W terminator to

terminate the last device on the communications link. To terminate the power meter using

the MCT2W terminator, insert the wires of the terminator directly into terminals 19 and 20 of

the RS485 communications connector on the power meter.

NOTES:

•Terminate only the last device on the link. If a link has only one device, terminate that

device.

• Some PowerLogic devices use a removable communications connector. If the last

device on the communications link is not a power meter, refer to the instruction bulletin

for that device for termination instructions.

Power Meter With Remote Display Communications

The communications port on the remote display adapter can be configured to operate as a

2-wire, RS485 port; a 4-wire, RS485 port; or an RS232 port.

NOTE: The 4-wire, RS485 configuration is useful for integrating power meters into existing

4-wire, RS485 daisy chains. Figure 16: Daisy-chaining 2-wire devices

L- (D )

L+ (D )

–

Power Meter 800 or other PowerLogic 2-wire compatible devices

Belden 9841 or equivalent

Belden 9841 wire colors: blue with white stripe (D1), white with blue stripe (D0), and silver (shield )

MCT2W terminator on the last

device of the daisy chain

Table 12: COM2 RS485 Port Capabilities

2-wire 4-wire

Communications Port

•2-wire with shield

•EIA compliant

•Allows the power meter to

be connected to a daisy

chain of up to 32 devices

•4-wire with shield

•EIA compliant

•Allows the power meter to be

connected to a daisy chain of

up to 32 devices

Baud Rate 9600*, 19200, 38400 9600*, 19200, 38400

Communications Distances See Table 11. See Table 13.

Protocols Modbus RTU*, Jbus, Modbus,

ASCII

Modbus RTU*, Jbus, Modbus,

ASCII

Parity ODD, EVEN*, NONE ODD, EVEN*, NONE

*default

Table 13: COM2 4-wire, RS485 Communications Distances

Baud Rate

Maximum Communication Distances

1 to 16 Devices 17 to 32 Devices

9600 3,048 m (10,000 ft.) 1,219 m (4,000 ft.)

19200 1,548 m (5,000 ft.) 762 m (2,500 ft.)

38400 1,524 m (5,000 ft.) 762 m (2,500 ft.)

NOTE: Distances listed should be used as a guide only and cannot be guaranteed for

non-POWERLOGIC devices. Refer to the master device’s documentation for any

additional distance limitations.

Power Meter With Remote Display Connections

COM2 RS485, 4-wire

NOTE: To learn more about the 2-wire or RS232 configurations of COM2 on the PM8RDA,

refer to the installation guide for the Remote Display Kit for PM800 meters (document

number 63230-500-221).

Ethernet Communications

Ethernet communication is available by adding a PM8ECC Module to the power meter.

Installation instructions are included with the module.

Operation

Operating the Display

Power meters are equipped with large, back-lit LCD displays. They can show up to five

lines of information plus a sixth row of menu options. Figure 19 shows the different parts of

the power meter display.

How the Buttons Work

The buttons are used to select menu items, display more menu items in a menu list, and

return to previous menus. A menu item appears over one of the four buttons. Pressing a

button selects the menu item and displays the menu item’s screen. When you have

reached the highest menu level, a black triangle appears beneath the selected menu item.

To return to the previous menu level, press the button below 1;. To cycle through the

menu items in a menu list, press the button below ###: (see Figure 19).

NOTE: Each time you read “press” in this document, press and release the appropriate

button beneath the menu item. For example, if you are asked to “Press PHASE,” you would

press and release the button below the PHASE menu item.

Figure 17: COM2 RS485, 4-wire

•Use Belden 8723, 9842, or

equivalent

— RX+ Green, RX- White

— TX+ Red, TX- Black

— Shield Silver (use crimp

connector)

•For Belden 9842

— RX+ Blue/White stripe

— RX- White/Blue stripe

TX+ Orange/White

stripe

— TX- White/Orange

stripe

•Connect shield to earth

ground at the master port

only.

•If the meter is the last

device, terminate it with

3090MCTAS485 terminator

(not included).

Figure 18: PM8RDA 4-wire RS485 and RS232 selection

To change to RS232

mode, press and hold

the mode button until

the LED is lit. LED is lit

in RS232 mode.

NOTE: Communications

mode default is RS485.

The LED is unlit.

TX–

RX–

TX+

TX / RX

RX+

TX–

RX–

TX+

RX+

TX–

RX–

TX+

RX+

3090

MCTAS485

24 23 22 21 20

Terminal

block

Crimp connector

Master port

PM8RDA

TX/RX

RS485

RS232

Click

PM8RDA

LED is lit in RS232

mode

Figure 19: Power meter display

A. Type of measurement

B. Screen title

C. Alarm indicator

D. Maintenance icon

E. Bar chart (%)

F. Units

G. Display more menu items

H. Menu item

I. Selected menu indicator

J. Button

K. Return to previous menu

L. Values

M. Phase







  

































ABCD

HIK

118 of 292

Changing Values

When a value is selected, it flashes to indicate that it can be modified. A value is changed

by doing the following:

• Press + or – to change numbers or scroll through available options.

• If you are entering more than one number, press <- to move to the next number in the

sequence.

• To save your changes and move to the next field, press OK.

Basic Setup

A basic setup for the power meter includes:

•CTs ratios.

• PTs ratios.

• Nominal frequency.

• System type.

• Communication. (Note that RD models include two communications ports, COM1 and

COM2.)

To begin power meter setup, do the following:

1. Scroll through the Level 1 menu list until you see MAINT.

2. Press MAINT.

3. Press SETUP.

4. Enter your password.

NOTE: The default password is 0000.

Use the following examples as models to set up the power meter for first time use:

CTs Ratios Setup

Communications Setup

For Power Meters with Remote Displays, use the same communication setup procedure as

above, but go to COM2.

1. Press ###: until METER is visible.

2. Press METER.

3. Press CT.

4. Enter the PRIM (primary CT) number.

5. Press OK.

6. Enter the SEC. (secondary CT) number.

7. Press OK.

8. Press1; until you are asked to save your

changes.

9. Press YES to save the changes.

1. Press ###: until COMMS (communications)

is visible.

2. Press COMMS (communications).

3. Select the protocol: MB.RTU (Modbus RTU),

Jbus, MB. A.8 (Modbus ASCII 8 bits),

MB. A.7 (Modbus ASCII 7 bits).

4. Press OK.

5. Enter the ADDR (power meter address).

6. Press OK.

7. Select the BAUD (baud rate).

8. Press OK.

9. Select the parity: EVEN, ODD, or NONE.

10. Press OK.

11. Press1; until you are asked to save your

changes.

12. Press YES to save the changes.





  













 

  







!"#

$%



Power Meters without Display Setup

To set up a power meter without a display (see Figure 2), you will need a means of

communication between the power meter and your computer. Additionally, you will need to

install Schneider Electric Meter Configuration software on your computer. This

configuration software can be downloaded at no cost from www.powerlogic.com.

Troubleshooting

Refer to Table 14 for information on potential problems and their possible causes. Contact

your local Schneider Electric sales representative for further assistance.

Heartbeat LED

The heartbeat LED helps to troubleshoot the power meter. The LED works as follows:

•Normal operation — the LED flashes at a steady rate during normal operation.

•Communications — the LED flash rate changes as the communications port transmits

and receives data. If the LED flash rate does not change when data is sent from the host

computer, the power meter is not receiving requests from the host computer.

•Hardware — if the heartbeat LED remains lit and does not flash ON and OFF, there is a

hardware problem. Do a hard reset of the power meter (turn OFF power to the power

meter, then restore power to the power meter). If the heartbeat LED remains lit, contact

your local sales representative.

•Control power and display — if the heartbeat LED flashes, but the display is blank, the

display is not functioning properly. If the display is blank and the LED is not lit, verify that

control power is connected to the power meter.

Getting Technical Support

Please refer to the Technical Support Contacts provided in the power meter shipping carton

or go to www.powerlogic.com, select your country > tech support for support phone

numbers by country.

Table 14: Troubleshooting

Potential Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

The maintenance icon is

illuminated on the power

meter display.

When the maintenance icon is

illuminated, it indicates a

potential hardware or firmware

problem in the power meter.

When the maintenance icon is illuminated,

go to MAINT (MAINTENANCE) >DIAG

(DIAGNOSTICS). Error messages display to

indicate the reason the icon is illuminated.

Note these error messages and call

Technical Support or contact your local sales

representative for assistance.

The display shows error

code 3. (PM810)

Loss of control power or meter

configuration has changed. Set date and time.

The display is blank

after applying control

power to the power

meter.

The power meter may not be

receiving the necessary power.

•Verify that the power meter line (L) and

neutral (N) terminals (terminals 2 and 3)

are receiving the necessary power.

•Verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking.

•Check the fuse.



The data being

displayed is inaccurate

or not what you expect.

Power meter is grounded

incorrectly. Verify that the power meter is grounded.

Incorrect setup values.

Check that the correct values have been

entered for power meter setup parameters

(CT and PT ratings, System Type, Nominal

Frequency, and so on).

Incorrect voltage inputs.

Check power meter voltage input terminals

L (8, 9, 10, 11) to verify that adequate

voltage is present.

Power meter is wired

improperly.

Check that all CTs and PTs are connected

correctly (proper polarity is observed) and

that they are energized. Check shorting

terminals.

Cannot communicate

with power meter from a

remote personal

computer.

Power meter address is

incorrect.

Check to see that the power meter is

correctly addressed.

Power meter baud rate is

incorrect.

Verify that the baud rate of the power meter

matches the baud rate of all other devices on

its communications link.

Communications lines are

improperly connected.

Verify the power meter communications

connections.

Communications lines are

improperly terminated.

Check to see that a multipoint

communications terminator is properly

installed.

Incorrect route statement to

power meter. Check the route statement.

Table 14: Troubleshooting (continued)

Schneider Electric

295 Tech Park Drive,

Suite 100

LaVergne, TN 37086 USA

Tel: +1 (615) 287-3400

www.powerlogic.com

www.schneider-electric.com

This product must be installed, connected, and used in compliance

with prevailing standards and/or installation regulations. As

standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this

publication.

63230-500-282A1

Replaces 63230-500-200A4 and 63230-500-224A1



119 of 292

PowerLogic® PM800 series

Quick Reference Guide

AMPS (1)

VOLTS (U-V)

PWR (PQS)

ENERG (E)

HZ (F)

THD

MINMX

TIMER

PHASE DMD UNBAIL.

VL-L VL-N

PWR PHASE DMD

WH VAH VARH INC

MINMX I V POS PF F THD V THD I

RESET

SETUP

DIAGN

METER E DMD MINMX MODE TIMER

DATE TIME LANG COMMS (COM) METER ALRAM I/O PASSW TIMER ADVAN

METER REG CLOCK

VL-L (U) VL-N (V) I

Abbreviated List of IEC Power Meter Menu Items:

Display Buttons

PF TRUE DISPL

HARM VL-L (U) VL-N (V) I

ALARM ACTIV HIST

I/O D OUT D IN A OUT A IN

CONTR

MAINT

COMM2

COMM1

PM8RD

D IN (Digital In)

D OUT (Digital KY Out)

PM8M2222, PM8M26, AND PM8M22

PM8M2222

A IN (Analog In)

A OUT (Analog Out)

PM8M222

Power Meter Display

A. Type of measurement

B. Screen Title

C. Alarm Indicator

D. Maintenance icon

E. Bar Chart (%)

F. Units

G. Display more menu items

H. Menu item

I. Selected menu indicator

J. Button

K. Return to previous menu

L. Values

M. Phase

Parts of the Display

120 of 292

Schneider Electric - North America

295 Tech Park Drive, LaVergne, TN 37086

Ph: 866-466-7627

PowerLogic.com

04-2008

Document#3000DB0808 April 2008

1. In SETUP mode, press until METER is visible

2. Press METER.

3. Press until SYS (sytem type) is visible.

4. Press SYS.

5. Select your system type based on the (A) number

of wires. (B) number of CTs, (C) the number of

volatage connections (either direct connect or with

PT), and (D) the SMS system type.

6. Press OK.

7. Press until you are asked to save your changes.

8. Press YES to save the changes.

Setup Meter System Type

1. Press uuntil COMMS (communications) is visible.

2. Press COMM1 (communications).

3. Select the protocol: MB.RTU (Modbus RTU). Jbus,

MB, A.8 (Modbus ASCII 8 bits), MB, A.7

(Modbus ASCII 7 bits).

4. Press OK.

5. Enter the ADDR (power meter address).

6. Press OK.

7. Select the BAUD (baud rate).

8. Press OK.

9. Select the parity: EVEN, ODD, or NON.

10. Press OK.

11. Press until you are asked to save your changes.

12. Press YES to save the changes.

Power Meter With Remote

Display Communications Setup:

1. Press uuntil METER is visible

2. Press METER.

3. Press PT.

4. Enter the SCALE value: x1, x10, x100.

No PT (for direct connect).

5. Press OK

6. Enter the PRIM (primary CT) value.

7. Press OK

8. Enter the SEC. (secondary CT) value.

9. Press OK.

10. Press until you are asked to save

your changes.

11. Press YES to save the changes.

Setup PT Ratio:

1. Press uuntil METER is visible

2. Press METER.

3. Press CT.

4. Enter the PRIM (primary CT) number.

5. Press OK

6. Enter the SEC. (secondary CT) number.

7. Press OK

8. Press until you are asked to save your changes

9. Press YES to save the changes.

Setup CT Ratio:

1. Press uuntil COMMS

(communications) is visible.

2. Press COMM2 (communications).

3. Select the protocol: MB.RTU (Modbus RTU).

Jbus, MB, A.8 (Modbus ASCII 8 bits),

MB, A.7 (Modbus ASCII 7 bits).

4. Press OK.

5. Enter the ADDR (power meter address).

6. Press OK.

7. Select the BAUD (baud rate).

8. Press OK.

9. Select the parity: EVEN, ODD, or NON.

10. Press OK.

11. Press until you are asked to

save your changes.

12. Press YES to save the changes.

Comm2 Setup:

1. Press uuntil COMMS (communications) is visible.

2. Press COMMS (communications).

3. Select the protocol: MB.RTU (Modbus RTU). Jbus,

MB, A.8 (Modbus ASCII 8 bits), MB, A.7

(Modbus ASCII 7 bits).

4. Press OK.

5. Enter the ADDR (power meter address).

6. Press OK.

7. Select the BAUD (baud rate).

8. Press OK.

9. Select the parity: EVEN, ODD, or NON.

10. Press OK.

11. Press until you are asked to save your changes.

12. Press YES to save the changes.

Power Meter With Integrated

Display Communications Setup:

121 of 292

Instruction Bulletin 48049-243-04

Rev. 01, 09/2012

Replaces 48049-243-04 ECN 681C, 03/2006

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers

Retain for future use.

ENGLISH

Necessary Tools Screwdriver, Pozidriv® #2 or #3, or slotted

Socket Wrench

Screwdrivers, long-shanked slotted (2)

Additional Information This bulletin provides installation instructions for PowerPact R-frame and

NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers. Tripping functions are controlled by the

Micrologic™ trip unit.

For additional information see the following user guides available on the

Schneider Electric™ website:

•Bulletin 0612IB1201: PowerPact™ Circuit Breakers Dimensional

Drawings

•Bulletin 48049-136-05: Micrologic 2.0A, 3.0A, 5.0A, and 6.0A Electronic

Trip Units

•Bulletin 48049-330-03: Micrologic 5.0H and 6.0H Electronic Trip Units

•Bulletin 48049-137-05: Micrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Electronic Trip Unit

•Bulletin 48049-207-05: Micrologic 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

To access the website go to:

http://www.schneider-electric.com

1. Select “United States” in the country pull-down menu. Click “OK”

2. Under “Popular Links” on the left side of the page, select “Technical

Library”.

3. Use the Advanced Search option to search by document number.

For application assistance, please call 1-888-778-2733.

122 of 292

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers 48049-243-04

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Installation

Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker

Installation

1. Turn off all power supplying this equipment

before working on or inside equipment.

2. Turn off or trip circuit breaker before

installation.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this

equipment.

• Lift circuit breaker by case using lifting equipment. Do not remove lifting

equipment until all mounting hardware is securely tightened. Never lift

circuit breaker by its handle.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

Clearance requirements must be met for

proper operation of the equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will

result in death or serious injury.

1. Check enclosure clearances, see Figure 1.

2. Prepare enclosure for circuit breaker (See

Figure 22 for mounting hole and cover cutout

dimensions).

— Drill mounting holes.

— Cut opening in cover for circuit breaker

handle escutcheon.

Figure 1: Minimum Clearance Requirement

1.02

[25,9] Min.

06123048

1.02

[25,9] Min.

Dimensions: in.

[mm]

Minimum enclosure size:

3P: 30 x 21 x 7 in. (762 x 533 x 176 mm)

4P: 30 x 25.5 x 7 in. (762 x 648 x 178 mm)

Minimum ventilation (100% Rated Circuit Breakers Only):

40.25 in.2 (260 cm2) on top and bottom of enclosure

123 of 292

48049-243-04 PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

((

NOTIC

HAZARD OF OVERHEATING

Do not mount circuit breaker on ferrous

material.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

3. Mount circuit breaker on 3/4 in. (19 mm)

Glastic™ or equivalent non-ferrous material,

using one 3/8 in. Grade 5 bolt (A), two flat

washers (B), one split lockwasher (C) and one

nut (D) per mounting foot (provided). Torque

bolts (A) to 180 lb-in (20 Nxm).

Figure 2: Mount Circuit Breaker

06123010

NOTIC

HAZARD OF OVERHEATING

For cable connection, lugs must be mounted on

RLTB or RLTBE terminal pads. Do not mount

lugs directly on circuit breaker terminal.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

If using RLTB or RLTBE terminal pads, see RLTB

or RTLBE terminal pad instructions.

For dimensional information refer to the

Schneider Electric website (see page 1).

Table 1: Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Connection

Type Connection Rated Connection Mounting

UL/IEC Bus

2500 A,

100% rated

Bus to RLTB (3P) or RLTB4 (4P) terminal pad

kits (provided) or equivalent bus structure.

3000 A,

80% rated

Bus to RL3TB (3P) or RL3TB4 (4P) terminal pad

kits (provided) or equivalent bus structure.

3000 A,

100% rated

Bus to RL3TB (3P) or RL3TB4 (4P) terminal pad

kits (provided) or equivalent bus structure.

All other bussed

circuit breakers

Bus directly to circuit breaker or to optional RLTB

terminal pad mounting kits.

Cable

3000 A,

80% and 100% rated

Cable to lugs mounted on RL3TB terminal pad

kits.

All other cabled

circuit breakers

Cable to lugs mounted on RLTB terminal pad

kits.

IEC

Bus

3200 A Bus to RLTBE terminal pad kits (provided) or

equivalent bus structure.

Less than 3200 A Bus directly to circuit breaker or to optional

RLTBE terminal pad mounting kits.

4. For direct bussing, secure bus directly to

circuit breaker using four 1/2 in. Grade 5

bolts (A) per terminal for UL/IEC circuit

breakers and three 10 mm Grade 8.8 bolts

per terminal for IEC circuit breakers. Finger

tighten all bolts, then torque them to

900 lb-in (100 Nxm).

NOTE: Make sure that circuit breaker

terminals are flat against bus bars.

5. Tighten equipment bus connections and

supports.

Figure 3: Direct Bus Installation

06123012

124 of 292

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers 48049-243-04

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

I-Line™ Circuit Breaker Installation

NOTICE

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

• Do not adjust jaws.

• Do not remove joint compound.

• If necessary, use Square D™ joint

compound PJC7201.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

1. Place circuit breaker on I-Line pan with jaws

(A) pushed against bus.

Figure 4: Place Circuit Breaker on Pan

06123000

2. Insert long-shanked screwdriver (A) into slot.

Rack circuit breaker onto bus.

Figure 5: Start Racking Circuit Breaker onto Bus

3. Insert second screwdriver (A) into bottom

slot. Rack circuit breaker onto bus, using

alternate screwdrivers until circuit breaker

jaws completely engage bus bars.

Figure 6: Continue Racking Circuit Breaker onto Bus

06123001

06123002

125 of 292

48049-243-04 PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

4. Tighten four screws (A) firmly without

bending mounting bracket.

Figure 7: Tighten Mounting Bracket Screws

Cable Installation

Square off conductor ends and preform

conductors to final configuration. Using a proper

insulation stripping tool, strip conductor ends as

recommended in Table 2 below. Do not nick

strands.

For field-installable lug kits, see instruction

bulletin shipped with each lug kit.

Figure 8: Install Cables

Table 2: Circuit Breaker Lug Information

Catalog

Number

Conductors Wire Binding

Screw Torque

Lug Mounting

Screw Torque)

Qty. Size Strip Length1

1Conductors must be cut square for secure termination.

AL1200R53K2

2For version with tapped hole for control wire order AL1200R53TK.

4 #3/0–600 kcmil (95–300 mm2) Al/Cu 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) 450 lb-in (50 Nxm) 180 lb-in (20 Nxm)

CU1200R53K 4 #3/0–600 kcmil (95–300 mm2) Cu 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) 450 lb-in (50 Nxm) 180 lb-in (20 Nxm)

06123003

06123014

Strip

Length

AL1200R53TK Lug Only

Install control wire using 6-32 x 5/16 in. screw.

Figure 9: AL1200R53TK Lug

06123072

9-12 lb-in

(1-1.3 Nxm)

126 of 292

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers 48049-243-04

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Cable Restraint

Restrain circuit breaker conductors as indicated

in Table 3.

Wrap conductors using 30 ft. (10 m) of 1/2 in.

(12 mm) sisal rope or equivalent.

NOTIC

HAZARD OF CONDUCTOR MOVEMENT UNDER SHORT-CIRCUIT

CONDITIONS

Restrain circuit breaker conductors as required in Table 3.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Table 3: Cable Restraint Recommendations

Circuit Breaker

Installation

Available Fault

Current Conductors Used Unsupported Cable

Length

Restraint

Recommended

Individually-mounted d65 kA Six 600 kcmil or larger d24 in. (610 mm) No

All other cases Yes

1. Begin wrapping conductors (A) 6 in.

(152 mm) above circuit breaker. Wrap

conductors four times, leaving 3 ft. (1 m) of

excess rope at the first end (B). Pull rope (C)

taut.

Figure 10: Wrap Conductors

2. Wrap rope (A) several times until space

between first two sets of conductors is

completely filled. Weave final rope loop

underneath previous loop (B). Bring rope (C)

through right-hand space. Pull rope taut.

3. Wrap rope (D) several times until space

between second and third set of conductors

is completely filled. Weave final rope loop (E)

underneath previous loop as shown. Pull

rope taut.

Figure 11: Wrap Rope

06123004

6 in.

[152 mm]

Unsupported

Cable

Length

06123005

06123006

127 of 292

48049-243-04 PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Accessory Installation

4. Wrap rope several times around conductors

where conductors exit enclosure (A). Weave

final rope loop (B) underneath previous loop

as shown. Pull rope taut.

5. Tie rope End 1 and End 2 together as

shown. Rope must be taut. Cut off excess

rope and tape ends to prevent fraying.

Figure 12: Wrap Conductors

06123008

06123007

End 1

End 2

End 1

End 2

This subsection applies if circuit breaker has

factory-installed or field-installed accessories

1. Make sure circuit breaker handle (A) is in

tripped position by moving handle to ON (I)

position, then pushing push-to-trip button (B).

2. Loosen the seven accessory cover screws

Figure 13: Remove Accessory Cover

3. Install field-installable circuit breaker

accessories as instructed in the instructions

packed with each accessory.

4. Install control wiring (A) to accessories.

Torque screws to 10 lb-in (1.2 Nxm).

Figure 14: Install Accessory Control Wiring

06123013

06123018

06123019

1–OF1

2–OF2

3–OF3

4–SD

5–MX/MN

6–SDE

128 of 292

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers 48049-243-04

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams NOTE: All diagrams show circuit breaker in tripped position.

Figure 15: Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams

Trip Unit

Basic A P H Connector Description

– •••Com: E1-E6Circuit breaker communication module

E1 = + 24 Vdc

E2 = Common

E3 = Out -

E4 = Out +

E5 = In -

E6 = In +

– •••Z Zone-selective Interlocking (ZSI)

Z1 = ZSI OUT signal

Z2 = ZSI OUT

Z3 = ZSI IN signal

Z4 = ZSI IN short-time delay

Z5 = ZSI IN ground fault

– • • • T External neutral sensor

––••

M6C:

Q1, Q2, Q3

6 programmable contacts

24 Vdc external power supply required

Connector Recommended Wire Size – • • • M Modified differential ground fault (MDGF)

V1, V2, V3, Vn 22–16 AWG (0.3–1.5 mm2) – • • • F 24 Vdc external power supply

E1–E2 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) min. shielded pair cable or twisted

pair copper wires

––••Vn

3External neutral voltage takeoff

– – • • V1, V2, V3 External phase voltage takeoff

T 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) stranded shielded cable Function Connector Description

M Refer to MDGF instructions

Auxiliary Contacts

OF Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch

position contacts

Z1–Z5 22–18 AWG (0.3–0.8 mm2)

OF, SD, SDE 18–16 AWG (0.8–1.5 mm2) SD Bell alarm

MN, MX 18–14 AWG (0.8–2.5 mm2) SDE Electrical fault alarm contact

F Size per aux 24 Vdc power supply

Remote Operation

MN Undervoltage trip device

E3–E6, Q1, Q2, Q3 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) shielded twisted pairs with sheild

grouned at one end (Belden 8723 or equal) MX Shunt trip

1 Remove factory jumpers between Z3, Z4 and Z5 if ZSI is connected. Remove factory jumper between T1 and T2 if neutral CT is connected.

2C3 terminal is used only for communicating shunt trip

3 Neutral voltage takeoff supplied as flying lead.

MN MX

06123255

T1 Z3

Trip Unit

Z1 Z5

NCBA

F2+

Upstream Downstream

24 V

06123031

T1/M3

T4/F1-

OF2

Closed

06123033

OF3

Open

OF1

Tripped

SDE

Fault

Power Trip Unit1Remote Operation Alarm Contacts

32 34

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5

M1M2 M3

T1 T2 T3

MN/MX

D1/C1

OF1 11 12 14

OF2 21 22 24

OF3 31

SD 91 92 94

SDE

M6C

Vext

06123256

D2/C2

129 of 292

48049-243-04 PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Ground-Fault Protection for Equipment

If circuit breaker does not have integral ground-

fault tripping or alarm, skip this subsection.

A three-phase, four-wire circuit requires an

external neutral current transformer (CT).

Connect neutral CT to circuit breaker according

to wiring diagrams in Figure 17.

1. Connect the primary:

— If load is connected to lower end of circuit

breaker, connect load neutral to H1

terminal of neutral CT.

— If supply power is connected to lower end

of circuit breaker, connect supply neutral

to H1 terminal of neutral CT.

NOTE: The equipment grounding connection

must be upstream (line side) of the neutral CT

and a neutral connection must exist from the

supply transformer to the equipment.

2. For circuit breakers using Micrologic 5.0P,

6.0P, 5.0H or 6.0H trip units, connect the Vn

voltage measurement connector plug (A) into

Vn connector shipped with the circuit

breaker (B). Connect this wire to the Vn

terminal of the neutral current transformer.

(This is necessary to allow the trip unit to

make voltage measurements.) Terminals Vc

and Vn are internally connected.

3. Connect T1, T2, T3 and T4, as shown, to the

control wiring terminals as described in the

accessory wiring sections which follow.

4. Ground terminal GND of the neutral current

transformers only if no other ground exists in

the control system. (Check NEC

requirements and connect ground to

equipment ground bus.)

NOTE: The following terminals are internally

connected:

•Vc and Vn

•T4 and GND

NOTE: Modified differential ground-fault circuitry

and ground-source return ground-fault circuitry

require the use of a modified differential ground-

fault module (MDGF) and special current

transformers. For wiring of those systems, see

the instructions with the MDGF.

Figure 16: Neutral Current Transformers

Figure 17: Wiring for Ground-Fault Sensing

06133237

06133239

06133241

600–1600 A 2000 A 2500–3200 A

Neutral CT

Trip Unit

Earth Ground*

Source

Load

Shield

06123169

NOTE: If load is connected to the off

end of the circuit breaker, then Vc of

the neutral current transformer (CT) is

connected to the load neutral.

*Check NEC requirements.

GND

A Trip unit

B To Vn or neutral CT

130 of 292

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers 48049-243-04

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Replace Accessory Cover

Operation

Circuit Breaker Removal

NOTICE

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Accessory cover must be secured with all

seven screws tightened to stated torque. Do

not overtorque screws. Do not use power

equipment to torque screws.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in equipment damage.

Replace accessory cover. Replace all seven

accessory cover screws. Hand tighten screws to

11–13 lb-in (1.2–1.5 N•m). Do not exceed torque

specification of screws.

Figure 18: Accessory Cover Replacement

06123013

Press push-to-trip button (A) at installation to

check operation and then once a year to

exercise circuit breaker.

NOTE: Push-to-trip button will not trip circuit

breaker if it is in the OFF (O) position.

Figure 19: Push-to-Trip Button

06123009

Turn off all power supplying this equipment

before working on or inside equipment.

Remove circuit breaker in reverse order of

installation.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this

equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

131 of 292

48049-243-04 PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers

Rev. 01, 09/2012

ENGLISH

Testing Circuit breaker trip unit operation can be tested using the Hand-held Test Kit

or the Full-function Test Kit.

TROUBLESHOOTING If problems occur during installation, refer to information below. If trouble

persists, contact the field office.

Trip Unit Adjustment

For ET1.0I Electronic Trip Units: Adjust

instantaneous trip (Ii) by adjusting switch (A).

For Micrologic™ Trip Units refer to the trip unit

user guide available on the Schneider Electric

website (see page 1).

Figure 20: Instantaneous Trip Switch Adjustment

Neutral Protection Adjustment

NOTE: Applies to four-pole circuit breakers only

A. For ET electronic trip units and Micrologic

2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 2.0A, 3.0A and 5.0A electronic

trip units:

— Remove fourth pole lens cover.

— Use a slotted screwdriver to adjust

neutral setting on circuit breaker (A).

— Replace fourth pole lens cover. Torque

screw to 5.3 in-lb (0.6 N•m).

B. For Micrologic 5.0P, 6.0P, 5.0H and 6.0H

electronic trip units refer to the trip unit user

guide available on the Schneider Electric

website (see page 1).

Figure 21: Adjust Circuit Breaker System Type Switch

(on Four-Pole Circuit Breaker)

Circuit Breaker

Switch Setting

Neutral

Protection

4P 3D No neutral

protection

3P N/2 1/2 neutral

protection

4P 4D

Full neutral

protection

(Factory

default

setting)

06123170

x In

456

1.5

setting

instantaneous

06123009 06123023

06134824

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective

equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical

work practices. See NFPA 70ENFPA 70E or

CSA Z462.

• This equipment must only be installed and

serviced by qualified electrical personnel.

• Troubleshooting may require energizing

auxiliary devices with a test power supply.

Make sure that the power supply is off before

connecting or disconnecting it to the auxiliary

device.

• Do not touch the terminals of the device

during the test.

Failure to follow these instructions will

result in death or serious injury.

Condition Possible Causes Solution

Circuit breaker fails to stay

closed.

1. Trip adjustment set too low.

2. Undervoltage trip not

energized.

3. Shunt trip energized.

4. Short circuit or overload on

system.

1. Adjust trip setting.

2. Energize undervoltage trip.

3. De-energize shunt trip.

4. Check system for short

circuit or overload.

Circuit breaker trips, but no

short circuit or overload is

evident.

1. Trip adjustment set too low.

2. Voltage is below undervoltage

trip setting.

1. Adjust trip setting.

2. Check system for low

voltage.

Push-to-trip button will not

trip circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker already tripped or

off (O).

Move circuit breaker handle to

reset, then to on (I).

Circuit breaker cannot be

opened manually. Damage to current path. Contact local field office.

132 of 292

PowerPact™ R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers 48049-243-04

Instruction Bulletin Rev. 01, 09/2012

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by

qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any

consequences arising out of the use of this material.

Square D™, Schneider Electric™ and PowerPact™ are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of

their respective owners.

Schneider Electric

3700 Sixth St. SW

Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 USA

1-888-778-2733

www.schneider-electric.us

ENGLISH

Dimensions For dimensional information refer to the Schneider Electric website (see

page 1).

Figure 22: Mounting Hole and Enclosure Cover Cutouts Dimensions

Ø0.43

[11,0]

15.35 3-pole

19.88

[505,0] 4-pole

5.91

15.35

[390,0] 3-pole

19.88

[505,0] 4-pole

Ø0.43

[11,0]

Ø0.43

[11,0]

15.35

[390,0] 3-pole

5.91

13.62 0.87

8.50

1.30

2.30

10.51

15.63 0.14

[346,0] [22,0]

[33,0]

[216,0]

[150,0]

[390,0]

[58,5]

[3,5]

[397,0]

[267,0]

[150,0]

5.75 4.80

0.80

4.69

5.91

[146,0] [122,0]

[20,4]

[119,0]

[150,0]

Accessory Cover Cutout

Handle Cutout

Accessory Cover Escutcheon Cutout

Dimensions: in.

[mm]

48096-380-01

133 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Instruction Bulletin

48049-207-05

Rev. 01, 07/2012

Retain for future use.

ENGLISH

134 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Hazard Categories and Special

Symbols Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become

familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain

it. The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on

the equipment to warn of hazards or to call attention to information that

clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if

the instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to personal injury

hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible

injury or death.

NOTE: Provides additional information to clarify or simplify a procedure.

Please Note Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained

only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider

Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.

FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference

when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if

not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment

in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the

user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This

Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can

result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can

result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTIC

NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury. The

safety alert symbol is not used with this signal word.

IEC

ANSI

135 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Table of Contents

ENGLISH

Table of Contents

SECTION 1: GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................... 5

Introduction ................................................................................................. 5

Trip Unit Settings ........................................................................................ 5

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit ......................................................................... 5

Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit .......................................................................... 6

Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit .......................................................................... 6

Trip Unit Switches ....................................................................................... 7

Long-Time Protection ............................................................................ 7

Short-Time Protection ........................................................................... 8

Instantaneous Protection ....................................................................... 9

Overload Indicator Light .............................................................................. 9

Trip Unit Testing .......................................................................................... 9

SECTION 2: OPERATION .................................................................................................................... 10

Switch Adjustment .................................................................................... 10

Examples .................................................................................................. 10

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit ........................................................................ 10

Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit ........................................................................ 11

Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit ........................................................................ 12

Trip Unit Operation Verification ................................................................. 12

SECTION 3: TRIP UNIT REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................................... 13

Required Tools .......................................................................................... 13

Preparation ............................................................................................... 13

Record Switch Settings ....................................................................... 13

Circuit Breaker Disconnection ............................................................. 13

Circuit Breaker Accessory Cover Removal ......................................... 13

Rating Plug Removal ........................................................................... 14

Trip Unit Removal ................................................................................ 14

Trip Unit Replacement .............................................................................. 14

Trip Unit Installation ............................................................................. 14

Circuit Breaker Accessory Cover Replacement ........................................ 15

Trip Unit Installation Check ....................................................................... 16

Secondary Injection Testing ................................................................ 16

Primary Injection Testing ..................................................................... 16

Trip Unit Setup .......................................................................................... 16

Circuit Breaker Reconnection ................................................................... 16

SECTION 4: ADJUSTABLE RATING PLUG REPLACEMENT .............................................................................................. 17

Rating Plug Removal ................................................................................ 17

New Rating Plug Installation ..................................................................... 17

136 of 292

Micrologic® 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Table of Contents Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

137 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 1—General Information

ENGLISH

Section 1—General Information

Introduction

Trip Unit Settings On the face of the trip unit are adjustable switches to allow changing of trip

characteristics. Trip units are shipped with the long-time pickup switch set at

1.0 and all other trip unit adjustments set at their lowest settings.

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit

Micrologic™ trip units (A) provide adjustable

tripping functions on electronic trip circuit

breakers. The product name (B) specifies the

level of protection provided by the trip unit.

Micrologic trip units are field replaceable to allow

for upgrading of the trip unit in the field. For

complete information on available circuit breaker

models, frame sizes, interrupting ratings, sensor

plugs, rating plugs and trip units, see the product

catalog.

Figure 1: Micrologic Trip Unit

Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit

Type of protection

2—Basic IEC protection (LS0)

5—Selective protection (LSI)

Trip uni t se r ies

0—Indicates the first version

3—Basic UL protection (LI)

Micrologic 2.0

06133198

06134242

A—Micrologic Trip Unit

B—Product Name

C—Switch Cover

D—Switch Cover Opening Slot

E—Adjustable Rating Plug

NOTE: For use with IEC circuit breakers only.

The Micrologic 2.0 trip unit provides basic IEC

(LS0) protection.

A. Long-time pickup (Ir) switch

B. Long-time delay (tr) switch

C. Short-time pickup (Isd) switch*

D. Test plug receptacle

E. Overload indicator light

F. Trip unit name

Figure 2: Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit

*Short-time delay is factory set at 0 (no delay), thus short-time

pickup provides instantaneous protection.

Micrologic 2.0

.98

instantaneous

long time alarm

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

.7 .8 .9

.95

x In

x Ir

2.53456

1.5

setting

Isd

06134239

0 Ir Isd I

06134245

138 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Section 1—General Information Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit

Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

The Micrologic 3.0 trip unit provides basic (LI)

protection.

A. Long-time pickup (Ir) switch

B. Long-time delay (tr) switch

C. Instantaneous pickup (Ii) switch

D. Test plug receptacle

E. Overload indicator light

F. Trip unit name

Figure 3: Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit

Micrologic 3.0

.98

instantaneous

long timealarm

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

.7 .8 .9

.95

x In

34568

1.5

setting

06134240

0 Ir Ii I

06133201

The Micrologic 5.0 trip unit provides selective

(LSI) protection.

A. Long-time pickup (Ir) switch

B. Long-time delay (tr) switch

C. Short-time pickup (Isd) switch

D. Short-time delay (tsd) switch

E. Instantaneous pickup (Ii) switch

F. Test plug receptacle

G. Overload indicator light

H. Trip unit name

Figure 4: Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

Micrologic 5.0

setting delay

short timeinstantaneous

long time alarm

test

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

I i

x In

6810

off

tsd

(s)

I2t

.4.4

0off

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

06134241

0 Ir Isd I

06133202

139 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 1—General Information

ENGLISH

Trip Unit Switches

Long-Time Protection

Long-time protection protects equipment against

overloads.

•Long-time protection is standard on all trip

units.

•The long-time pickup (Ir) (A) sets maximum

current level (based on sensor plug rating In)

which circuit breaker will carry continuously.

If current exceeds this value, circuit breaker

will trip after the preset time delay. The long-

time pickup (Ir) is adjustable from 0.4–1.0

times the sensor plug rating (In).

•The long-time delay (tr) (B) sets the length of

time that the circuit breaker will carry an

overcurrent below the short-time or

instantaneous pickup current level before

tripping. See Table 1 for long-time delay

settings.

•The overload indicator light (C) indicates that

the Ir long-time pickup threshold has been

exceeded.

•Both long-time pickup and long-time delay

are on the field-replaceable adjustable rating

plug. To change settings to more precisely

match the application, various rating plugs

are available. For instructions on replacing

the rating plug, see Section 4—Adjustable

Rating Plug Replacement.

Figure 5: Long-Time Protection Switches

Table 1: Micrologic Trip Unit Long-Time Delay Values

Setting1Long-Time Delay in Seconds2

tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600

tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24

tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.3430.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6

1In = sensor rating. Ir = In x long-time pickup. Trip threshold between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir.

2Time-delay accuracy +0/-20%

3For Micrologic 5.0 trip units, when tsd is set to 0.4 off or 0.4 on, then tr = 0.5 instead of 0.34.

•The In value can be changed by replacing

the sensor plug below the trip unit. For

further information, see the instructions

packed with the sensor plug replacement kit.

•Long-time protection uses true RMS

measurement.

Thermal imaging provides continuous

temperature rise status of the wiring, both before

and after the device trips. This allows the circuit

breaker to respond to a series of overload

conditions which could cause conductor

overheating, but would go undetected if the

long-time circuit was cleared every time the load

dropped below the pickup setting or after every

tripping event.

NOTE: If checking trip times, wait a minimum of

15 minutes after circuit breaker trips before

resetting to allow the thermal imaging to reset

completely to zero.

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

delay

short timeI itsd

(s)

on I2t

.4.4

0off

instantaneous

long time alarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

setting

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5x In

46810

off

06133204

x Ir

2.53456

1.5

setting

Isd

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06134243

x In

34568

1.5

setting

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06133203

ABC

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

ABCABC

140 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Section 1—General Information Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Short-Time Protection

Short-time protection protects equipment

against short circuits.

•Short-time protection is standard on 2.0 and

5.0 trip units. It is not available on 3.0 trip

units.

•Short-time protection is based on the long-

time pickup (Ir)

•The short-time pickup (Isd) (A) sets the

current level (below instantaneous trip level)

where the circuit breaker will trip after the

preset time delay.

•The short-time delay (tsd) (B) sets the length

of time that the circuit breaker will carry an

overcurrent above the short-time pickup

current level before tripping. It is adjustable

on the 5.0 trip unit and factory set to zero on

the 2.0 trip unit.

•The I2t on/I2t off option provides improved

selectivity with downstream protective

devices:

•With I2t off selected, fixed time delay is

provided.

—With I

2t on selected, inverse time I2t

protection is provided up to 10 x Ir.

Above 10 x Ir, a fixed time delay is

provided.

— Intermittent currents in the short-time

tripping range which do not last

sufficiently long to trigger a trip are

accumulated and shorten the trip delay

appropriately.

•Setting tsd to the 0 setting turns off time-

delay features.

•Short-time protection uses true RMS

measurement.

•Short-time delay can be adjusted to provide

selectivity with a downstream circuit breaker.

Figure 6: Short-Time Protection Switches

Table 2: Micrologic Trip Unit Short-Time Delay Values

Setting Short-Time Delay

I2t off (Isd at 10 Ir) (seconds) 00.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

I2t on (Isd at 10 Ir) (seconds) –0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

tsd (min. trip) (milliseconds) 20 80 140 230 350

tsd (max. trip) (milliseconds) 80 140 200 320 500

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

delay

short timeI itsd

(s)

on I2t

.4.4

0off

instantaneous

long time alarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

setting

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5x In

46810

off

06133204

Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

x Ir

2.53456

1.5

setting

Isd

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06134243

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit

141 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 1—General Information

ENGLISH

Instantaneous Protection

Overload Indicator Light

Trip Unit Testing Trip unit functions can be tested using primary injection testing or secondary

injection testing.

Instantaneous protection protects equipment

against short circuits with no intentional time

delay.

•Instantaneous protection (Ii) (A) is standard

on 3.0 and 5.0 trip units.*

•Instantaneous protection for 2.0 trip units is

based on the circuit breaker sensor rating

(Ir).

•Instantaneous protection for 3.0 and 5.0 trip

units is based on the long-time delay pickup

(In).

•Circuit breaker open command is issued as

soon as threshold current is exceeded.

•Instantaneous protection for 3.0 and 5.0 trip

units use peak current measurement.

Instantaneous protection for 2.0 trip units

use RMS current measurement.

•When instantaneous protection switch is set

to off, the instantaneous protection is

disabled.

Figure 7: Instantaneous Protection Switches

Table 3: Micrologic Instantaneous Values

Setting Interruption Current

2.0 Isd (= Ir x..) 1.5 22.5 3456810

3.0 Ii (= In x..) 1.5 23456810 12

5.0 Ii (= In x..) 2346810 12 15 off

*Instantaneous protection on 2.0 trip units is achieved by

using short-time protection (Isd) with short-time delay factory

set to 0 (zero).

Ii = UL and ANSI instantaneous

Isd = IEC instantaneous (short-time with zero delay)

In = sensor rating

Ir = long-time pickup

x Ir

2.53456

1.5

setting

Isd

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06134243

x In

34568

1.5

setting

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06133203

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

delay

short timeI itsd

(s)

on I2t

.4.4

0off

instantaneous

long time alarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

setting

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5x In

46810

off

06133204

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

The overload indicator light (A) lights when the Ir

long-time pickup level has been exceeded. Figure 8: Overload Indicator Lights

x In

34568

1.5

setting

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06133203

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

delay

short timeI itsd

(s)

on I2t

.4.4

0off

instantaneous

long time alarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

setting

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5x In

46810

off

06133204

x Ir

2.53456

1.5

setting

Isd

instantaneous

long time alarm

(s)

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

x In .5

4812

@ 6 Ir

06134243

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

142 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Section 2—Operation Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Section 2—Operation

Switch Adjustment

Examples

Micrologic 2.0 Trip Unit

1. Open switch cover (A).

2. Adjust the appropriate switches (B) to

desired values.

3. Replace switch cover. Use wire seal

MICROTUSEAL (C), if necessary, to provide

tamper evidence.

Figure 9: Adjust Switch Settings

06133207

06133206

06133205

Circuit breaker is rated 2000 A. Figure 10: Circuit Breaker Rating

06133208

In = 2000 A

1. Set pickup levels. Figure 11: Set Pickup Levels

0 I

tIr

Isd

06134252

1400 A

2800 A

alarm

x Ir

2.53456

1.5

setting

Isd

instantaneous

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

long time

x In

06134251

Isd = 2 x Ir = 2800 A

In = 2000 A

Ir = 0.7 x In = 1400 A

143 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 2—Operation

ENGLISH

Micrologic 3.0 Trip Unit

2. Set time delay. Figure 12: Set Time Delay

long time alarm

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

06133211

0 I

06133212

6 x Ir

1 s

tr = 1 s (at 6 x Ir)

1. Set pickup levels. Figure 13: Set Pickup Levels

2. Set time delay. Figure 14: Set Time Delay

0 I

tIr

06133210

Ii = 3 x In = 6000 A

alarm

x In

34568

1.5

setting

Ii instantaneous

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

long time

x In

06133209

In = 2000 A

Ir = 0.7 x In = 1400 A

long time alarm

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

06133211

0 I

06133212

6 x Ir

1 s

tr = 1 s (at 6 x Ir)

144 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Section 2—Operation Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit

Trip Unit Operation Verification

1. Set pickup levels. Figure 15: Set Pickup Levels

2. Set time delay. Figure 16: Set Time Delay

06133213

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

setting

short time

I i

x Ir

2.5345

Isd

1.5 off

instantaneous

long time alarm

x In

46810

off

Isd

06133214

Ii = 3 x In = 6000 A

In = 2000 A

Ir = 0.7 x In = 1400 A

Isd = 2 x Ir = 2800 A

short time

long time alarm

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir24

delay

tsd

on I2t

I2t on I2t off

06133215

tsd

06133217

6 x Ir

1 s

10 x Ir

0.2 s

tr = 1 s (at 6 x Ir)

tsd = 0.2 s I2t on

Use a test kit connected to the trip unit test plug

receptacle (A) to verify trip unit is functioning as

desired. See instructions shipped with test kit to

perform verification tests.

Figure 17: Verify Trip Unit Operation

06133218

06133205

145 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 3—Trip Unit Replacement

ENGLISH

Section 3—Trip Unit Replacement

Required Tools •Torque-controlled screwdriver, set at 7 in-lbs (0.8 N•m) ± 10%

(Lindstrom torque driver MAL500-2 or equivalent)

•Micrologic Full-Function Test Kit (part number S33595)

Preparation

Record Switch Settings Record all trip unit switch setting for later use.

Circuit Breaker Disconnection Disconnect circuit breaker as directed in the circuit breaker instruction

bulletin shipped with the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker must be

completely isolated. (For a drawout circuit breaker, place circuit breaker in

the disconnected position. For a fixed-mounted circuit breaker, all voltage

sources, including auxiliary power, must be disconnected.)

Circuit Breaker Accessory Cover

Removal Remove circuit breaker accessory cover as directed in the Install Accessories

section of the circuit breaker instruction bulletin shipped with the circuit breaker.

Trip unit replacement must be done by qualified

persons, as defined by the National Electric

Code, who are familiar with the installation and

maintenance of power circuit breakers.

Before replacing trip unit, confirm that the circuit

breaker is in good working condition. If the

condition of the circuit breaker is unknown, do

not proceed. For assistance in evaluating the

condition of the circuit breaker, call Technical

Support.

Read this entire section before starting the

replacement procedure.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

• Failure to follow these instructions for installation, trip test and primary

injection testing may result in the failure of some or all protective function.

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462.

• Replacement/upgrading of a trip unit in the field must be done by

qualified persons, as defined by the National Electric Code, who are

familiar with the installation and maintenance of power circuit breakers.

• Before replacing/upgrading trip unit, confirm that the circuit breaker is in

good working condition. If the condition of the circuit breaker is unknown,

do not proceed. For assistance in evaluating the condition of the circuit

breaker, call Technical Support.

• If the circuit breaker fails to function properly in any manner upon

completion of the trip unit installation, immediately remove the circuit

breaker from service and call Field Services.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment. Follow instructions shipped with circuit breaker to disconnect

and reconnect circuit breaker.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before returning equipment to

service.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.

146 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Section 3—Trip Unit Replacement Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Trip Unit Replacement

Rating Plug Removal

A small Phillips screwdriver is needed to remove

the adjustable rating plug.

1. Open switch cover (A).

2. Unscrew adjustable rating plug mounting

screw (B).

3. Remove adjustable rating plug (C). Save for

installation in replacement trip unit.

Figure 18: Remove Adjustable Rating Plug

Trip Unit Removal

1. Loosen two trip unit screws (A).

2. Slide out trip unit (B).

Figure 19: Remove Existing Trip Unit

06133205

setting delay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

x In

2.53456

1.5

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

long timealarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

06133222

.7.8.9

.95

.98

settingdelay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

long timealarm

x In.5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

x In

2.53456

1.5

06133221

06134854

Trip Unit Installation

1. Inspect trip unit connector pins and surfaces.

If there is any damage, misaligned pins, or

contamination, stop installation and contact

the local sales office for factory authorized

service.

2. Inspect trip unit mounting base on the circuit

breaker. Clear any debris from area and

check that all accessory wiring is properly

routed for the trip unit being installed. If there

is any damage or contamination, stop

installation and contact the local sales office

for factory authorized service.

3. For Masterpact NW circuit breaker only:

Manually depress trip unit interlock (A) and

hold it in place during steps 4–6 below.

4. Align guide rail (B) on bottom of trip unit with

guide rail slot (C) on trip unit mounting base

in circuit breaker and gently slide the trip unit

in until it stops.

NOTE: The Masterpact NT and NW trip unit

mounting bases are shock mounted and

therefore can flex slightly.

Figure 20: Install Trip Unit

06135453

06135451

Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker

147 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 3—Trip Unit Replacement

ENGLISH

Circuit Breaker Accessory Cover

Replacement Replace circuit breaker accessory cover as directed in the Install

Accessories section of the circuit breaker instruction bulletin shipped with

the circuit breaker.

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

Check installation of trip unit to assure proper connections and seating.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage or

improper circuit breaker tripping.

5. Align the trip unit so top mounting screw (B)

aligns with the top threaded insert and start

the screw by turning the screw two full

rotations.

6. Use a torque-controlled screwdriver to drive

the bottom screw to 7 in-lbs (0.8 N•m) ± 10%.

The back of the trip unit must be flush with the

trip unit mounting base.

7. Use a torque-controlled screwdriver to drive

the top screw to 7 in-lbs (0.8 N•m) ± 10%.

Mounting tab must be flush with the

mounting standoff and sensor plug.

NOTE: The face of the closed switch cover must

be flush with adjoining mounting base surfaces.

If these surfaces are not flush, stop installation

and contact the local sales office for factory

authorized service.

Figure 21: Install Trip Unit

8. Install adjustable rating plug into the trip unit.

a. Open switch cover (A) on new trip unit.

b. Inspect mounting area for debris and

contamination.

c. Gently push adjustable rating plug (B)

into new trip unit.

d. Tighten adjustable rating plug mounting

screw (C). The plug will be drawn into

position flush with front face as screw is

tightened.

9. Set trip unit switches to values recorded

above or per coordination study results.

10. Close switch cover (A).

Figure 22: Install Adjustable Rating Plug

06134855

7 lb-in

[0.8 N•m]

Must be seated

Must be flush

settingdelay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

x In

2.53456

1.5

test

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

long timealarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

06133223

.7.8.9

.95

.98

settingdelay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

long timealarm

x In.5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

x In

2.53456

101.5

06134244

7 lb-in

[0.8 N•m]

148 of 292

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units 48049-207-05

Section 3—Trip Unit Replacement Rev. 01, 07/2012

ENGLISH

Trip Unit Installation Check

Trip Unit Setup Reset the trip unit switches to original values, as recorded at the beginning

of this section.

Circuit Breaker Reconnection Reconnect circuit breaker as directed in the circuit breaker instruction

bulletin shipped with the circuit breaker.

Secondary Injection Testing

Field installation of a trip unit requires secondary

injection testing with a Full-Function Test Kit.

This will ensure that the newly-installed trip unit

is functioning properly. The test will require

opening and closing the circuit breaker. Follow

the procedures outlined in the instruction

bulletins shipped with the circuit breaker and the

Full-Function Test Kit.

1. Make sure the circuit breaker is isolated from

all upstream and downstream devices.

2. Perform secondary injection testing as

outlined in the instruction bulletin shipped

with the Full-Function Test Kit. Verify that all

applicable trip unit functions are operating

properly.

3. Repeat step 2 with the circuit breaker in the

open position.

NOTE: The test kit will state that the circuit

breaker should be closed when performing

the test. Do not close the circuit breaker for

this step.

4. If any test fails, do not put the circuit breaker

into service and contact the local sales office

for factory authorization service.

Primary Injection Testing

Primary injection testing is recommended to

ensure that all trip system connections have

been correctly made. Perform primary injection

testing per the instructions in the Field Testing

and Maintenance Guide, bulletin 0600IB1201.

149 of 292

48049-207-05 Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Rev. 01, 07/2012 Section 4—Adjustable Rating Plug Replacement

ENGLISH

Section 4—Adjustable Rating Plug Replacement

Rating Plug Removal

New Rating Plug Installation

NOTE: To select correct replacement rating

plug, see the product catalog.

NOTE: If adjustable rating plug is removed, the

circuit breaker will default to a long-time pickup

rating of 0.4 x In and a long-time delay at

whatever setting was selected before the rating

plug was removed.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462.

• This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified electrical

personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment. Follow instructions shipped with circuit breaker to disconnect

and reconnect circuit breaker.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before returning equipment to

service.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.

1. Open circuit breaker contacts:

— For NT and NW circuit breakers, press

the “Push to open” button on the circuit

breaker.

— For other circuit breakers, move handle

to the off (O) position.

2. Open switch cover (A).

3. Unscrew adjustable rating plug mounting

screw (B).

4. Remove adjustable rating plug (C).

Figure 23: Remove Adjustable Rating Plug

setting delay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

x In

2.53456

1.5

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

long timealarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

06133222

.7.8.9

.95

.98

settingdelay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

long timealarm

x In.5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

x In

2.53456

101.5

06133221

06133205

1. Inspect mounting area for debris and

contamination.

2. Gently push in new rating plug (A).

3. Tighten adjustable rating plug mounting

screw (B).

4. Set the switches on the trip unit (see Section

2—Operation).

5. Close switch cover (C).

Figure 24: Install New Adjustable Rating Plug

.7.8.9

.95

.98

settingdelay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

long timealarm

x In.5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

x In

2.53456

1.5

06134244

settingdelay

short time

I i

x Ir

2.53456

Isd

1.5

tsd

instantaneous

x In

2.53456

1.5

test

.7 .8 .9

.95

.98

long timealarm

x In .5

4812

(s)

@ 6 Ir

06133223

150 of 292

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified

personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of

the use of this material.

Square D™, Schneider Electric™, Micrologic™, and Masterpact™ are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of their

respective owners.

48049-207-05 Rev. 01, 07/2012

Replaces 48049-207-05 10/2007

3700 Sixth St. SW

Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 USA

1-888-778-2733

www.schneider-electric.us

Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Electronic Trip Units

Instruction Bulletin

ENGLISH

151 of 292

THIS SECTION CONTAINS DETAILED DRAWINGS ON THE FOLLOWING PANELS:

DESIGNATION TYPE VOLTAGE AIC MOUNTING PBA NOTES AND REMARKS

PANEL L1A NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 42kA Top Trim: Surface - Hinged 701T Ship Together,Standard Solid Neutral,Additional

Aluminum Isolated Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement Standard Nameplate: Engraved

as Follows Line 1: PANEL L1A Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00"

High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

PANEL L1A NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 42kA Top Trim: Surface - Hinged 701T Ship Together,Standard Solid Neutral,Additional

Aluminum Isolated Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement Standard Nameplate: Engraved

as Follows Line 1: PANEL L1A Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00"

High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

PANEL L2A NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 42kA Top Trim: Surface - Hinged 701T Ship Together,Standard Solid Neutral,Additional

Aluminum Isolated Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement Standard Nameplate: Engraved

as Follows Line 1: PANEL L2A Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00"

High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

PANEL L2A NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 42kA Top Trim: Surface - Hinged 701T Ship Together,Standard Solid Neutral,Additional

Aluminum Isolated Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement Standard Nameplate: Engraved

as Follows Line 1: PANEL L2A Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00"

High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

PANEL L3A NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 42kA Top Trim: Surface - Hinged 701T Ship Together,Standard Solid Neutral,Additional

Aluminum Isolated Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement Standard Nameplate: Engraved

as Follows Line 1: PANEL L3A Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00"

High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Pl ti /Adh i S

PANELBOARDS

/Adh

crew-on

PANEL L3A NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 42kA Top Trim: Surface - Hinged 701T Ship Together,Standard Solid Neutral,Additional

Aluminum Isolated Ground Bar,Standard Ground Bar

Group User Placement Standard Nameplate: Engraved

as Follows Line 1: PANEL L3A Size: 3.50" Wide x 1.00"

High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

PANEL EL1 NQ 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W 60Hz 10kA Bottom Trim: Surface -

Hinged 707HR Standard Panel (Box Ahead),Standard Solid

Neutral,Standard Ground Bar Standard Nameplate:

Engraved as Follows Line 1: PANEL EL1 Size: 3.50" Wide

x 1.00" High (Std) Color: White Surface / Black Letters

Plastic/Adhesive - Screw-on

PLEASE CONFIRM THAT THE PANEL DETAILS MATCHES THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

ALL LUGS ON PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE RATED AT 75 DEGR C.

ALL LUGS ARE SIZED PER UL STANDARDS. PLEASE CONFIRM THAT THEY ARE APPROPRIATE FOR THE QUANTITY

AND SIZE OF THE CABLE BEING CONNECTED.

PLEASE CONFIRM TOP OR BOTTOM FEED, AND SURFACE OR FLUSH COVERS.

152 of 292

153 of 292

154 of 292

155 of 292

156 of 292

157 of 292

158 of 292

159 of 292

160 of 292

161 of 292

162 of 292

163 of 292

164 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and

QONQ Load Centers

Information Manual

Class 1640

Instruction Bulletin

80043-712-04

Retain in the directory card

pocket for future use.

165 of 292

ENGLISH

HAZARD CATEGORIES AND SPECIAL SYMBOLS

Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the

device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special

messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential

hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label indicates that an

electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not

followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards.

Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.

PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by

qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any

consequences arising out of the use of this material.

DANGER

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result

in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result

in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, can result in property damage.

Provides additional information to clarify or simplify a procedure.

166 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Table of Contents

ENGLISH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Interior Mounting for Square D Brand Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Surface Mounting (Enclosure Mounted on Wall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Flush Mounting (Enclosure Recessed in Wall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Neutral Bonding Strap/Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

100 or 250 A Maximum NQ Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

400 or 600 A Maximum NQ Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers . . . . 13

QO and QOB Circuit Breaker Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

QO and QOB Breaker Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

QO and QOB Breaker Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Circuit Breaker Reset Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Interior Trim Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Appendix 1: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Typical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Integral Main or Sub-Feed:

DJ, FI, KI, H, J, LA, LC, LH, QB, QD, QG, QJ, QO(B)VH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Panelboard Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CE Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Appendix 2: Accessory Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Equipment Ground Bar Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Oversized Lug Kits for 100–250 A Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Sub-Feed Lug Kits for 100–400 A Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Main Lug Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

167 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Table of Contents 10/2009

ENGLISH

168 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 List of Figures and List of Tables

ENGLISH

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1: Interior Mounting of Square D Brand Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Figure 2: Bonding Strap Installation — 100 or 250 A Maximum NQ Panelboards 12

Figure 3: Bonding Cable Installation — 400 or 600 A Maximum NQ Panelboards

and QONQ Load Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 4: QO and QOB Circuit Breaker Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 5: Circuit Breaker Handle Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Figure 6: Interior Trim Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 7: NQ/NQM 100–225 A Main Lugs or 100–250 A Main Breaker Diagram. 20

Figure 8: NQ 400–600 A Main Lugs or Main Circuit Breaker

with or without Feed-Through Lugs Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Figure 9: NQ 400–600 A Main Circuit Breaker

with Feed-Through Lugs or Sub-Feed Circuit Breakers Diagram . . . . . 22

Figure 10: Typical NQ Panelboard with Split Bus Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

169 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

List of Figures and List of Tables 10/2009

ENGLISH

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1: Panelboard Typical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Table 2: Series Connected Breaker Ratings (RMS Symmetrical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Table 3: Short Circuit Current Rating for Main Lug Interiors with Sub-Feed or

Feed-Through Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Table 4: Equipment Ground Bar Kits Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Table 5: Oversized Lug Kits for 100–250 A Panelboards Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 31

Table 6: Sub-Feed Lug Kits for 100–400 A Panelboards Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 31

Table 7: Mechanical Lug Kits — Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Table 8: Mechanical Lug Kits — Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Table 9: Versa-Crimp® Compression Lug Kits — Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Table 10: Versa-Crimp® Compression Lug Kits — Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

170 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Introduction

ENGLISH

Introduction

This bulletin contains instructions for installing Square D® brand NQ

circuit breaker panelboards and QONQ load centers. These

panelboards and load centers are Underwriters Laboratories (cULus)

listed and accept QO® and QOB branch circuit breakers.

Safety Precautions

For technical support on the installation of this

panelboard, contact the Square D/Schneider Electric

Customer Information Center at 1-888-SquareD

(1-888-778-2733).

See the labels on the equipment for rating and safety

information. Additional equipment labels are provided with

this document.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Read and understand this entire instruction bulletin and the included NEMA PB 1.1

standards publication before installing, operating, or maintaining this equipment.

• Local codes vary, but are adopted and enforced to promote safe electrical

installations. A permit may be needed to do electrical work, and some codes may

require an inspection of the electrical work.

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical

work practices. See NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified

electrical personnel.

• Turn OFF all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

the equipment.

• Always use a properly-rated voltage sensing device to confirm all power is OFF.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning ON power to this equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

171 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Installation 10/2009

ENGLISH

Installation

This section provides instructions for the following NQ panelboard

and QONQ load center procedures:

•“Interior Mounting for Square D Brand Enclosures” on page 8

•“Neutral Bonding Strap/Cable Installation” on page 11

•“QO and QOB Circuit Breaker Installation and Removal”

on page 14

•“Circuit Breaker Reset Instructions” on page 17

•“Interior Trim Preparation” on page 18

Interior Mounting for Square D Brand Enclosures

A separate standards publication, titled “General Instructions for

Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or Less” (NEMA PB1.1), has been provided with this

equipment. Familiarize yourself with the content of this document

before proceeding with any of the following procedures.

If you did not receive a copy of this document, or if you have any

questions regarding this equipment, contact your local distributor or

Schneider Electric representative.

To properly mount and install the NQ panelboard or QONQ load

center interior, please refer to the NEMA PB 1.1 standards

publication, and follow the instructions below for either “Surface

Mounting (Enclosure Mounted on Wall)” or “Flush Mounting

(Enclosure Recessed in Wall).”

CAUTION

HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

• Ensure all connections are properly tightened.

• Refer to the torque information label provided on the panelboard

before tightening the connections.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in

equipment damage.

172 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Installation

ENGLISH

Surface Mounting (Enclosure Mounted on Wall)

1. Mount the enclosure as instructed in the NEMA PB 1.1

standards publication.

2. Remove the interior trim from the trim brackets.

3. Install the interior as described below:

a. Set the interior on the enclosure studs. An elevating screw is

not required (See Figure 1 on page 10).

b. Tighten the keps nuts against the interior side rails until the

rails are against the back of the enclosure.

c. Remount the interior trim after wiring.

4. If used as service entrance equipment, neutral bonding is

required. See the “Neutral Bonding Strap/Cable Installation”

instructions on page 11.

5. Apply equipment labels (located in the bag assembly) as directed

by the instructions on the back of the equipment label sheet.

Flush Mounting (Enclosure Recessed in Wall)

1. Mount the enclosure as instructed in the NEMA PB 1.1

standards publication.

2. Remove the interior trim from the trim brackets.

3. Install the interior as described below:

a. Thread the (4) 10-32 x .875 in. self-tapping, elevating screws

provided with the flush trim into the side rails.

b. Set the interior on the enclosure studs (see Figure 1 on

page 10). Place the keps nuts onto the enclosure studs, but

do not tighten.

c. Adjust the screws so that the lip of the interior trim is

approximately 0.25 inches (6.35 mm) from wall line.

d. Tighten the keps nuts against the side rails.

e. Remount the interior trim after wiring.

4. If used as service entrance equipment, neutral bonding is

required. See the “Neutral Bonding Strap/Cable Installation”

instructions on page 11.

5. Apply equipment labels (located in the bag assembly) as directed

by the instructions on the back of the equipment label sheet.

173 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Installation 10/2009

ENGLISH

Figure 1: Interior Mounting of Square D Brand Enclosures

0.25 in.

(6.35 mm)

Trim Bracket

Enclosure Stud

Keps Nut

Enclosure

Interior Trim

Wall

Elevating Screw

Side Rail

174 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Installation

ENGLISH

Neutral Bonding Strap/Cable Installation

The neutral bonding strap/cable should be used only when the

panelboard is installed as service equipment.

To properly bond the neutral to the panelboard, follow the instructions

for either “100 or 250 A Maximum NQ Panelboards” or “400 or 600 A

Maximum NQ Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers” below and on

page 13, respectively.

NOTE: The bonding strap/cable parts are found in the bag assembly

provided with the interior.

100 or 250 A Maximum NQ Panelboards

To install a neutral bonding strap on a 100 or 250 A maximum

NQ panelboard, refer to Figure 2 and follow the instructions below.

1. Align the bonding strap on the side rail, as pictured.

NOTE: For some applications, it may be necessary to remove the

lug (not pictured) before installing the bonding strap.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Turn OFF all power supplying this equipment before working on

or inside the equipment.

• The main bonding strap/cable should be used only when the

panelboard is installed as service equipment.

• Do not mix the mounting screws with the interior trim screws.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or

serious injury.

175 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Installation 10/2009

ENGLISH

2. Insert the two mounting screws, as pictured. Tighten the 10-32

screw to 10–12 lb-in (1.1–1.4 N•m) and the 1/4-20 to 25–30 lb-in

(2.8–3.4 N•m).

NOTE: If the lug was removed in Step 1 above, reinstall it on top

of the bonding strap. Use the 1/4-20 x 11/16 in. mounting screw

with feed-through lug, sub-feed lug, sub-feed breaker, or 200%

neutral applications. Use the 1/4-20 x 7/8 in. lug mounting screw

with 200% neutral on 225 A applications with feed-through lug,

sub-feed lug, or sub-feed breaker applications. Lug mounting

screws are provided in the bonding strap bag assembly.

Figure 2: Bonding Strap Installation —

100 or 250 A Maximum NQ Panelboards

10-32 x 5/16 in.

1/4-20 x 9/16 in.

Mounting Screws

Bonding Strap

Side Rail

Neutral Bus

176 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Installation

ENGLISH

400 or 600 A Maximum NQ Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers

To install a neutral bonding cable on a 400 or 600 A maximum

NQ panelboard and QONQ load center, refer to Figure 3 and follow

the instructions below.

1. Align the lug on the side rail mounting hole, as pictured.

2. Tighten the lug mounting screw against the side rail to

10–12 lb-in (1.1–1.4 N•m).

3. Align the bonding cable, as pictured, and insert it into the lug and

neutral mounting holes.

4. Tighten both the lug wire binding screw and the neutral wire

binding screw to 45–50 lb-in (5.1–5.6 N•m).

Figure 3: Bonding Cable Installation — 400 or 600 A

Maximum NQ Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers

Neutral

Lug Mounting

Screw

Bonding Cable

Bonding Cable Mounting Hole

Side Rail

Lug

Side Rail

Mounting Hole

Neutral Wire

Binding Screw

Lug

Wire

Binding

Screw

Bonding Cable Mounting Hole

177 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Installation 10/2009

ENGLISH

QO and QOB Circuit Breaker Installation and Removal

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and

follow safe electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified

electrical personnel.

• Turn OFF all power supplying this equipment before working on

or inside equipment.

• Always use a properly-rated voltage sensing device to confirm

that all power is OFF.

• All unused spaces must be filled with blank fillers.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning ON power

to this equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or

serious injury.

178 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Installation

ENGLISH

QO and QOB Breaker Installation

Refer to Figure 4 on page 16 for the following instructions:

1. Turn OFF all power to the panelboard.

2. Turn the breaker OFF.

3. Remove the interior trim.

4. Snap the wire terminal end of the circuit breaker onto the

mounting rail.

5. Engage the branch connector.

For QO Circuit Breakers:

a. Push inward until the plug-on jaws fully engage the

branch connector.

For QOB Circuit Breakers:

a. Push inward until the breaker connector is centered on the

branch connector mounting hole. Engage the screw into the

branch connector hole and tighten it to the torque values

shown on the interior wiring and torque diagram.

6. Install the load wire.

7. Reinstall the interior trim.

QO and QOB Breaker Removal

Refer to Figure 4 on page 16 for the following instructions:

1. Turn OFF all power to the panelboard.

2. Remove the load wire.

3. Remove the interior trim.

4. Disengage the branch connector.

For QO Circuit Breakers:

a. Pull outward until the plug-on jaws fully disengage the

branch connector.

For QOB Circuit Breakers:

a. Loosen the screw in the breaker connector and pull the

breaker off of the branch connector.

5. Snap the wire terminal end of the circuit breaker off of the

mounting rail.

6. Reinstall the interior trim.

179 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Installation 10/2009

ENGLISH

Figure 4: QO and QOB Circuit Breaker Installation and Removal

QOB

Plug-On Jaw

Branch Connector

Bolt-On

Connector

Screw

Rail

Wire

Terminal

Wire

Terminal

Rail

180 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Installation

ENGLISH

Circuit Breaker Reset Instructions

If the circuit breaker is tripped, the handle will be at the mid-position

between ON and OFF. To reset the circuit breaker, push the handle

to the OFF position, then to the ON position.

Figure 5: Circuit Breaker Handle Positions

OFF

ON OFF Tripped

Handle

181 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Installation 10/2009

ENGLISH

Interior Trim Preparation

NOTE: The back of the interior trim lists the catalog number for its

corresponding compatible blank fillers.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Before energizing the panelboard, all unused spaces must be

filled with blank fillers.

• Replace all devices, doors, and covers before energizing

this equipment.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or

serious injury.

Figure 6: Interior Trim Diagram

Blank Fillers

Interior Trim

182 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 1: Specifications

ENGLISH

Appendix 1: Specifications

Typical Wiring

Table 1: Panelboard Typical Wiring1

1Additional information is provided on the panelboard. See the main circuit breaker

rating, if used.

1-Phase Panelboards 3-Phase Panelboards

Voltage AC Phase Wires Phase Wires

208Y/120 — — 3 4

120/240 1 3 — —

2402

2For this system, the neutral is not used and only circuit breakers rated 240 V AC

minimum should be used. Do not use circuit breakers rated 120 V or 120/240 V AC.

1233

2403

3For a grounded “B” phase system, only circuit breakers rated 240 V AC minimum

should be used. Do not use circuit breakers rated 120 V or 120/240 V AC.

33——

240/1204

4When wiring for a delta system, phases “A” and “C” must be 120 V to neutral, phase “B”

208 V to neutral. Connect only circuit breakers rated 240 V AC minimum. Do not use

circuit breakers rated 120 V or 120/240 V to “B” phase.

— — 3 4 Delta

183 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 1: Specifications 10/2009

ENGLISH

Integral Main or Sub-Feed:

DJ, FI, KI, H, J, LA, LC, LH, QB, QD, QG, QJ, QO(B)VH

Figure 7: NQ/NQM 100–225 A Main Lugs or 100–250 A Main Breaker Diagram

Backfed Main

Circuit Breaker

(must be bolt-on, if used)

Integral Main

Circuit Breaker

(when installed)

Isolated Ground

(when installed)

Enclosure Bonding

(when required)

Ground

(when required)

Neutral

184 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 1: Specifications

ENGLISH

Figure 8: NQ Panelboard or QONQ Load Center 400–600 A Main Lugs or Main

Circuit Breaker with or without Feed-Through Lugs Diagram

Load

Feed-Through Lugs

(when installed)

Integral Main

Circuit Breaker

(when installed)

Enclosure Bonding

(when required)

Neutral

Ground

(when required)

185 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 1: Specifications 10/2009

ENGLISH

Figure 9: NQ Panelboard or QONQ Load Center 400–600 A Main

Circuit Breaker with Feed-Through Lugs or Sub-Feed

Circuit Breakers Diagram

Subfeed

Circuit Breaker(s)

(when installed)

Load

Enclosure Bonding

(when required)

Neutral

Ground

(when required)

Integral Main

Circuit Breaker

(when installed)

Line

186 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 1: Specifications

ENGLISH

Figure 10: Typical NQ Panelboard with Split Bus Diagram

Integral Main

Circuit Breaker

(when installed)

Enclosure Bonding

(when required)

Neutral

Ground

(when required)

187 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 1: Specifications 10/2009

ENGLISH

Panelboard Ratings

Refer to NEC section 110-22 and CEC rule 14-014 for more

information. The series rated system label is located in the

bag assembly.

Table 2: Series Connected Breaker Ratings (RMS Symmetrical)

Max. System

Voltage AC 1 2

Max. Short

Circuit

Current

Rating

Square D

Brand

Integral or

Remote

Main Circuit

Breakers

and Remote

Main Fuses

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog

Designation and Allowable Ampere Ranges3 4 5 6

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole

120/240 1PH

22,000 MG QO (B)

15–30A

——

25,000 HD, JD QO (B) PL

15–60 A 15–30 A

65,000 HG, JG QO (B) PL

100,000 HJ, JJ QO (B) PL

125,000 HL, JL QO (B) PL

120/240 1PH

208Y/120

100,000

DJ 400A

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A —

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 40–60 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

QO (B) VH — 150 A 15–150 A

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) VH — 150 A 35–150 A

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

208Y/120 18,000

LA/LH (L)

34200MC

QO (B) 15–30A 15–30 A 15–30 A

LA/LH (L)

34225MC

LA/LH (L)

34250MC

LA/LH (L)

34400MC

Continued on next page

188 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 1: Specifications

ENGLISH

240

22,000

QO (B) VH

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–30 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

Q2-H

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–100 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–30 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

25,000

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) VH — 150 A 35–150 A

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

ED, FD

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

HD, JD

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) VH — — 35–150 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

QO (B) H — 15–100 A —

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A

QOB 2150VH — 150 A —

Continued on next page

Table 2: Series Connected Breaker Ratings (RMS Symmetrical) (continued)

Max. System

Voltage AC 1 2

Max. Short

Circuit

Current

Rating

Square D

Brand

Integral or

Remote

Main Circuit

Breakers

and Remote

Main Fuses

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog

Designation and Allowable Ampere Ranges3 4 5 6

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole

189 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 1: Specifications 10/2009

ENGLISH

240

42,000

LA, MA Q2L-H — 100–225 A 100–225 A

QDL — 70–225 A 70–225 A

LC400A

QO (B) 15–70 A — —

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QOBVH — 150 A —

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

LC600A

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QOBVH — 150 A —

QO (B) GFI — 15–60 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

MG QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

65,000

LC400A

QO (B) 15–30 A — —

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QOBVH — 150 A —

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A — 15–50 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

LC600A

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A

35–100 A

(3P208 V max)

15–30 A

(3P240 V max)

QOBVH — 150 A —

QO (B) GFI — — 15–50 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

DJ 400A

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A —

QO (B) VH — 150 A 15–150 A

QO (B) H — 15–100 A —

Continued on next page

Table 2: Series Connected Breaker Ratings (RMS Symmetrical) (continued)

Max. System

Voltage AC 1 2

Max. Short

Circuit

Current

Rating

Square D

Brand

Integral or

Remote

Main Circuit

Breakers

and Remote

Main Fuses

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog

Designation and Allowable Ampere Ranges3 4 5 6

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole

190 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 1: Specifications

ENGLISH

240

65,000

DJ__W

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–150 A —

QO (B)-AFI 15–20 A — —

QO (B)-GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A —

QO (B)-VH — 110–125 A 15–150 A

EG, FG, KG

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) VH — 150 A 35–150 A

QG, HG, JG

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

HG, JG

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) VH — — 35–150 A

QO (B) H — 15–100 A —

QO B2150VH — 150 A —

FC_ or

KC_22___ QO (B) 15–70 A 15–100 A 15–100 A

FC_ or

KC_32___ QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

100,000

FC_ or

KC_24___ QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–30 A —

FC_ or

KC_34___ QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

EJ, FJ

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

Continued on next page

Table 2: Series Connected Breaker Ratings (RMS Symmetrical) (continued)

Max. System

Voltage AC 1 2

Max. Short

Circuit

Current

Rating

Square D

Brand

Integral or

Remote

Main Circuit

Breakers

and Remote

Main Fuses

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog

Designation and Allowable Ampere Ranges3 4 5 6

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole

191 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 1: Specifications 10/2009

ENGLISH

240

100,000 HJ, JJ

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) VH — — 35–150 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

125,000 HL, JL

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

QO (B) H — 15–100 A —

QOB 2150VH — 150 A —

200,000 FI, KI

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

65,000

400 A Max.

Class J or T6

Fuses

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QOB-VH — 150 A —

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

100,000

200 A Max.

Class

T3 Fuses

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — —

200,000

200 A Max.

Class J or T6

Fuses and

400 A Max.

Class

T3 Fuses

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–50 A

1For shown circuit breakers rated less than this maximum voltage, the indicated short circuit current rating also

applies, but at the voltage rating of the circuit breaker.

2Short circuit tests are conducted at 100–105% of the maximum rated voltage of the panelboard.

3Suffixes HID, SWD, and SWN may also be applied to the applicable branch circuit breakers shown above. Suffix

SWN may not be applied in combination with LC main breakers.

4Where QO (B) circuit breakers are shown above, QO (B) H, QO (B) VH, and QH (B) circuit breakers may also

be used.

5Where QO (B) GFI circuit breakers are shown above, QO (B) EPD and/or QO (B) EPE circuit breakers may also

be used.

6Where QO (B) AFI circuit breakers are shown above, QO (B) CAFI circuit breakers may also be used.

Table 2: Series Connected Breaker Ratings (RMS Symmetrical) (continued)

Max. System

Voltage AC 1 2

Max. Short

Circuit

Current

Rating

Square D

Brand

Integral or

Remote

Main Circuit

Breakers

and Remote

Main Fuses

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog

Designation and Allowable Ampere Ranges3 4 5 6

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole

192 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 1: Specifications

ENGLISH

CE Marking

Interiors with the “CE” mark meet the IEC 60439-1 standard.

Table 3: Short Circuit Current Rating1 for Main Lug Interiors

with Sub-Feed or Feed-Through Lugs

1This rating applies to main lug interiors, equipped with sub-feed or feed-through lugs, where the device feeding

the interior is unknown or not a Square D brand device. Use of a Square D brand main circuit breaker ahead

of these lugs will result in a rating equal to the rating of the breaker. Short circuit tests are conducted at

100–105% of the maximum rated voltage of the panelboard.

Maximum

System

Voltage AC

Maximum

Current

Rating

Branch Circuits Application Adder2

2The adder is the additional length of the enclosure.

Maximum Short

Circuit Current

Rating3

3RMS symmetrical amperes, for three cycles.

240

100 18, 30 SFL and FTL —

10,000

225

30, 42, 54, 72, 84 SFL 6 inches

(152.4 mm)

FTL

—

30, 54, 72, 84 6 inches

(152.4 mm)

400

30, 42, 54, 72, 84 SFL —

25,000

30, 84

FTL

—

42, 54, 72 6 inches

(152.4 mm)

600 30, 42, 54, 72, 84 FTL 12 inches

(304.8 mm)

193 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 2: Accessory Kits 10/2009

ENGLISH

Appendix 2: Accessory Kits

An assortment of field-installable accessory kits are available for

NQ panelboards:

•Equipment Ground Bar Kits

•Oversized Lug Kits for 100–250 A Panelboards

•Sub-Feed Lug Kits for 100–400 A Panelboards

•Main Lug Kits

— Mechanical Lug Kits — Aluminum

— Mechanical Lug Kits — Copper

— Versa-Crimp® Compression Lug Kits — Aluminum

— Versa-Crimp Compression Lug Kits — Copper

Equipment Ground Bar Kits

Equipment ground bar kits, suitable for copper or aluminum wire, meet

the grounding needs of NQ panelboards and QONQ load centers.

NOTE: Ground bar mounting locations are identified by the ground symbol stamped

into the backwall of the enclosure.

Table 4: Equipment Ground Bar Kits Specifications

Panelboard Use Ground Bar Kit Catalog Number

Branch Circuit Mains Rating Aluminum1

1Aluminum bars suitable for 60° C or 75° C Copper or Aluminum conductors.

Copper2

2Copper bars suitable for 60° C or 75° C Copper conductors.

1–42 600 A Maximum (1) PK27GTA (1) PK27GTACU

54–84 (2) PK27GTA (2) PK27GTACU

194 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 2: Accessory Kits

ENGLISH

Oversized Lug Kits for 100–250 A Panelboards

Oversized lug kits are available for applications where termination

conductors of 3 AWG or larger are required for the neutral.

Sub-Feed Lug Kits for 100–400 A Panelboards

Sub-feed main lugs are available for 100, 225, or 400 A applications.

Table 5: Oversized Lug Kits for 100–250 A

Panelboards Specifications

Circuit Breaker Rating Kit Catalog Number Wire Range

70 A QO70AN

(1) 10–2 Al

(1) 5.76–33.6 mm2

(1)14–4 Cu

(1) 2.08–21.1 mm2

80–125 A Q1100AN (1) 4–1/0 Al/Cu

(1) 42.4–53.5 mm2

125–150 A Q1150AN (1) 1–4/0 Al/Cu

(1) 42.4–107 mm2

Table 6: Sub-Feed Lug Kits for 100–400 A

Panelboards Specifications

Main Amps Kit Catalog Number Maximum Circuits

100 NQSFL1 18, 30

225 NQSFL2 301, 421, 541, 721, 841

1These panels require an additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) for the box and trim, for proper

wire bending space.

400 NQSFL4 30, 42, 54, 72, 84

195 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 2: Accessory Kits 10/2009

ENGLISH

Main Lug Kits

Table 7: Mechanical Lug Kits — Aluminum

Panelboard Amps Kit Catalog Number Wire Range

100 Standard #6–2/0 AWG

13.3–67.43 mm2

225 Standard #6–350 kcmil

13.3–177.3 mm2

400 Standard

(1) 1/0–750 kcmil

(2) 1/0–350 kcmil

(1) 53.48–380 mm2

(2) 53.48–177.3 mm2

600

Standard (2) 1/0–750 kcmil

(2) 53.48–380 mm2

NQALM6A (3) #6–250 kcmil

(3) 13.3–127 mm2

Table 8: Mechanical Lug Kits — Copper

Panelboard Amps Kit Catalog Number Wire Range

100 NQCUM1 #6–2/0 AWG

13.3–67.43 mm2

225 NQCUM2 #6–250 kcmil

13.3–127 mm2

400 NQCUM4 (1) 1/0–750 kcmil

(2) 1/0–350 kcmil

(1) 53.48–380 mm2

(2) 53.48–177.3 mm2

600 NQCUM6

196 of 292

80043-712-04 NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

10/2009 Appendix 2: Accessory Kits

ENGLISH

Table 9: Versa-Crimp® Compression Lug Kits — Aluminum

Panelboard Amps Kit Catalog Number Wire Range Crimp Tool

100 NQALV1 #8–1/0 AWG

8.36–53.48 mm2

VC6 (All)

225 NQALV2 #4–300 kcmil

21.15–152 mm2

400 NQALV4 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil

(2) 67.43–253.4 mm2VC6-3,

VC6-FT

600 NQALV6

Table 10: Versa-Crimp® Compression Lug Kits — Copper

Panelboard Amps Kit Catalog Number Wire Range Crimp Tool

100 NQCUV1 #6–1/0 AWG

13.30–53.48 mm2VC6 (All),

VC7 (All)

225 NQCUV2 2/0–300 kcmil

67.43–152 mm2

VC6-3,

VC7,

VC6-FT,

VC7-FT

400 NQCUV4 400–750 kcmil

202.7–380 mm2

VC6-FT,

VC7-FT,

VC8

600 NQCUV6 (2) 250–500 kcmil

(2) 126.7–253.4 mm2

VC6-3,

VC7,

VC6-FT,

VC7-FT

197 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual 80043-712-04

Appendix 2: Accessory Kits 10/2009

ENGLISH

198 of 292

NQ/NQM Panelboards and QONQ Load Centers Information Manual

Instruction Bulletin

Schneider Electric USA

252 North Tippecanoe

Peru, IN 46970 USA

1-888-SquareD (1-888-778-2733)

www.us.SquareD.com

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and

maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed

by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of

this material.

80043-712-04

Replaces 80043-712-03 08/2008

10/2009

199 of 292

THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

200 of 292

NEMA Standards Publication PB 1.1-2007

General Instructions

for

Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

Published by

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1300 North 17th Street

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209

www.nema.org

other languages, reserved under the Universal Copyright Convention, the Berne Convention for the

Protection of Literary and Artistic Works, and the International and Pan American Copyright Conventions.

201 of 292

NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER

The information in this publication was considered technically sound by the consensus of persons

engaged in the development and approval of the document at the time it was developed.

Consensus does not necessarily mean that there is unanimous agreement among every person

participating in the development of this document.

The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards and guideline publications, of

which the document contained herein is one, are developed through a voluntary consensus

standards development process. This process brings together volunteers and/or seeks out the

views of persons who have an interest in the topic covered by this publication. While NEMA

administers the process and establishes rules to promote fairness in the development of

consensus, it does not write the document and it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify

the accuracy or completeness of any information or the soundness of any judgments contained in

its standards and guideline publications.

NEMA disclaims liability for any personal injury, property, or other damages of any nature

whatsoever, whether special, indirect, consequential, or compensatory, directly or indirectly

resulting from the publication, use of, application, or reliance on this document. NEMA disclaims

and makes no guaranty or warranty, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of

any information published herein, and disclaims and makes no warranty that the information in this

document will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. NEMA does not undertake to

guarantee the performance of any individual manufacturer or seller’s products or services by virtue

of this standard or guide.

In publishing and making this document available, NEMA is not undertaking to render professional

or other services for or on behalf of any person or entity, nor is NEMA undertaking to perform any

duty owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using this document should rely on

his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent

professional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances.

Information and other standards on the topic covered by this publication may be available from

other sources, which the user may wish to consult for additional views or information not covered

by this publication.

NEMA has no power, nor does it undertake to police or enforce compliance with the contents of

this document. NEMA does not certify, test, or inspect products, designs, or installations for safety

or health purposes. Any certification or other statement of compliance with any health or safety–

related information in this document shall not be attributable to NEMA and is solely the

responsibility of the certifier or maker of the statement.

202 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page i

CONTENTS

Page

Foreword ...................................................................................................................................iv

Section 1 SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................... 1

Section 2 REFERENCES .......................................................................................................................... 2

Section 3 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................. 3

3.1 Successful Operation of Panelboards....................................................................................... 3

3.2 Qualified Personnel ................................................................................................................... 3

3.3 Definition of Qualified Personnel ............................................................................................... 3

3.3.1 Requirements................................................................................................................ 3

3.3.2 Established Safety Practices......................................................................................... 3

3.3.3 Protective Equipment .................................................................................................... 3

3.3.4 First Aid ......................................................................................................................... 3

3.4 Suitable Ratings ........................................................................................................................ 3

Section 4 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARD CABINETS (BOXES).................................................... 4

4.1 Installation Instructions.............................................................................................................. 4

4.2 Location in Building ................................................................................................................... 4

4.3 Flammable Material................................................................................................................... 4

4.4 Unusual Service Conditions ...................................................................................................... 4

4.5 Indoor Damp Locations ............................................................................................................. 4

4.6 Wet Locations............................................................................................................................ 4

4.7 Clearance from Ceiling.............................................................................................................. 4

4.8 Space around the Cabinet......................................................................................................... 4

4.9 Mounting of Cabinet .................................................................................................................. 4

4.10 Flush Mounting in Wall .............................................................................................................. 5

4.11 Unused Openings in Cabinet .................................................................................................... 5

4.12 Grounding of Panelboard Cabinets ........................................................................................... 5

Section 5 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS............................................................. 6

5.1 Conduits Installation .................................................................................................................. 6

5.2 Knockouts Removal................................................................................................................... 6

5.2.1 First Step—Remove Center Knockout.......................................................................... 6

5.2.2 Next Step—Remove Rings ........................................................................................... 6

5.3 National Electrical Code, Article 300......................................................................................... 6

5.4 Conductor Length ...................................................................................................................... 6

5.5 Exercise Care ............................................................................................................................ 6

5.6 National Electrical Code, Section 725.54.................................................................................. 7

Section 6 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARD...................................................................................... 11

6.1 Proper Storage ........................................................................................................................ 11

6.2 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 11

6.3 Inspection ................................................................................................................................ 11

6.4 Care......................................................................................................................................... 11

6.4.1 Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 11

6.5 Manufacturer's Instructions ..................................................................................................... 11

6.6 Installation................................................................................................................................ 11

6.6.1 Alignment Devices ...................................................................................................... 11

6.6.2 Panelboard.................................................................................................................. 11

6.6.3 Flange of Deadfront Shield ......................................................................................... 11

6.7 Line And Branch Conductors .................................................................................................. 12

6.7.1 Conductors.................................................................................................................. 12

6.8 Panelboard Grounding ............................................................................................................ 12

6.8.1 Equipment Grounding Conductors.............................................................................. 12

6.9 Proper Type Or Class And Rating........................................................................................... 12

203 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page ii

6.10 Debris ...................................................................................................................................... 12

6.11 Steps In Section 7 ................................................................................................................... 12

Section 7 STEPS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE ENERGIZING.................................................................... 13

7.1 Accessible Electrical Connections........................................................................................... 13

7.2 Blocks and Packing Materials .................................................................................................13

7.3 Switches, Circuit Breakers, and Other Operating Mechanisms.............................................. 13

7.4 Short Circuits and Ground Faults ............................................................................................ 13

7.5 Ground Fault Protection System ............................................................................................. 13

7.6 Adjustable Time Current Trip Device Settings ........................................................................ 13

7.7 Grounding Connections........................................................................................................... 13

7.8 Foreign Material....................................................................................................................... 14

Section 8 INSTALLATION OF CABINET FRONT.................................................................................. 15

8.1 Cabinet Front or Trim Package ............................................................................................... 15

8.2 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 15

8.3 Covers and Doors.................................................................................................................... 15

8.4 Touch-Up................................................................................................................................. 15

8.5 Front Alignment ....................................................................................................................... 15

Section 9 ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................... 16

9.1 Qualified Personnel ................................................................................................................. 16

9.2 Load on the Panelboard .......................................................................................................... 16

9.3 Energized in Sequence ........................................................................................................... 16

9.4 Loads Such as Lighting Circuits, Contactors, Heaters, and Motors ....................................... 16

Section 10 MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................................... 17

10.1 Maintenance Program ............................................................................................................. 17

10.2 Panelboard Which Has Been Carrying Its Regular Load for at Least 3 Hours ....................... 17

10.3 Inspect Panelboard Once Each Year ...................................................................................... 17

10.4 Accumulation of Dust and Dirt................................................................................................. 17

10.4.1 Visible Electrical Joints and Terminals...................................................................... 17

10.4.2 Conductors and Connections.................................................................................... 17

10.4.3 Fuse Clip Contact Pressure and Contact Means...................................................... 18

10.4.4 Plug Fuses ................................................................................................................18

10.4.5 Conditions Which Caused Overheating.................................................................... 18

10.5 Proper Ampere, Voltage, and Interrupting Ratings ................................................................. 18

10.5.1 Mechanisms Free and in Proper Working Order ...................................................... 18

10.6 Operation of all Mechanical Components ............................................................................... 18

10.6.1 Switch Operating Mechanisms ................................................................................. 18

10.6.2 Integrity of Electrical and Mechanical Interlocks....................................................... 18

10.6.3 Missing or Broken Parts............................................................................................ 18

10.6.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions....................................................................................... 18

10.6.5 Accessible Copper Electrical Contacts, Blades, and Jaws....................................... 19

10.7 Damaged Insulating Material and Assemblies ........................................................................ 19

10.8 Moisture or Signs of Previous Wetness or Dripping................................................................ 19

10.8.1 Conduits Which Have Dripped Condensate ............................................................. 19

10.8.2 Cracks or Openings .................................................................................................. 19

10.8.3 Insulating Material Which is Damp or Wet................................................................ 19

10.8.4 Component Devices Which Show Evidence of Moisture Damage........................... 19

10.9 Before Cleanup and Corrective Action is Attempted............................................................... 19

10.10 Severe Electrical Short Circuit................................................................................................. 20

10.11 Ground Fault Protection System .............................................................................................20

10.12 Insulation Resistance .............................................................................................................. 20

10.12.1 Severe Short Circuit ................................................................................................ 20

10.12.2 Parts Replaced........................................................................................................ 20

10.12.3 Panelboard Exposed to High Humidity ................................................................... 20

204 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page iii

Section 11 PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF PANELBOARDS ................................................................... 21

11.1 National Electrical Code .......................................................................................................... 21

11.2 Harmonics in Electrical System............................................................................................... 21

Figures

5–1 Knockout Removal—Step 1 ...................................................................................................... 8

5–2 Knockout Removal—Step 2 ......................................................................................................9

5–3 Knockout Removal—Step 3 .................................................................................................... 10

205 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page iv

Foreword

This publication is a guide of practical information containing instructions for the proper installation,

operation, and maintenance of panelboards rated 600 volts or less.

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every

possible contingency regarding installation, operation, or maintenance.

It is recommended that work described in this set of instructions be performed only by qualified personnel

familiar with the construction and operation of panelboards and that such work be performed only after

reading this complete set of instructions. For specific information not covered by these instructions, you

are urged to contact the manufacturer of the panelboard directly.

In the preparation of this Standards Publication input of users and other interested parties has been

sought and evaluated. Inquiries, comments, and proposed or recommended revisions should be

submitted to the concerned NEMA product section by contacting the following: These recommendations

will be reviewed periodically and updated as necessary.

Vice President, Engineering

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209

Publication No. PB 1.1- 2007 revises and supersedes PB 1.1- 2002.

This Standards Publication was developed by the Panelboard and Distribution Board Product Group of the

LVDE Section. Product Group approval of the standard does not necessarily imply that all Product Group

members voted for its approval or participated in its development. At the time it was approved, the Product

Group was composed of the following members:

Eaton Electrical Inc.—Pittsburgh, PA

GE—Plainville, CT

Hubbell, Inc.—Orange, CT

Milbank Manufacturing Company—Kansas City, MO

Penn Panel & Box Company—Collingdale, PA

Reliance Controls Corporation—Racine, WI

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.—Alpharetta, GA

Square D Company—Palatine, IL

206 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 1

Section 1

SCOPE

This publication covers single panelboards or groups of panel units suitable for assembly in the form of

single panelboards, including buses, and with or without switches or automatic overload protective

devices (fuses or circuit breakers), or both. These units are used in the distribution of electricity at 600

volts and less with:

1600—ampere mains or less

1200—ampere branch circuits or less

Specifically excluded are live-front panelboards, panelboards employing cast enclosures for special

service conditions, and panelboards designed primarily for residential and light commercial service

equipment.

207 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 2

Section 2

REFERENCES

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

Batterymarch Park

Quincy, MA 02269

NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E 2004 Safety Related Work Practices

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209

AB 4- 2003 Guidelines for Inspection and Preventative Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit

Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications

PB 2.2- 2004 Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment

Guidelines for Handling Water Damaged Electrical Products

208 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 3

Section 3

GENERAL

WARNING—HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED ON PANELBOARDS AND EQUIPMENT TO WHICH

POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF, DISCONNECTED AND ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SO THAT NO

ACCIDENTAL CONTACT CAN BE MADE WITH ENERGIZED PARTS. FOLLOW ALL

MANUFACTURER'S WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

Safety-related work practices, as described in NFPA 70E, should be followed at all times.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate components during installation or maintenance.

3.1 SUCCESSFUL OPERATION OF PANELBOARDS

The successful operation of panelboards is dependent upon proper installation, operation, and maintenance.

Neglecting fundamental installation and maintenance requirements may lead to personal injury, death, or

damage to electrical equipment or other property.

3.2 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

Installation, operation, and maintenance of panelboards should be conducted only by qualified personnel.

3.3 DEFINITION OF QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

For purposes of these guidelines, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction,

and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, the person is:

3.3.1 Requirements

Knowledgeable of the requirements of the National Electrical Code and of all other applicable codes, laws,

and standards.

3.3.2 Established Safety Practices

Trained and authorized to test, energize, clear, ground, tag, and lockout circuits and equipment in

accordance with established safety practices.

3.3.3 Protective Equipment

Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber gloves, hard hat, safety glasses

or face shields, and flash resistant clothing in accordance with established safety practices.

3.3.4 First Aid

Trained in rendering first aid.

3.4 SUITABLE RATINGS

Verify that all equipment being installed has ratings suitable for the installation.

209 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 4

Section 4

INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARD CABINETS (BOXES)

4.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Installation of the cabinet in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

4.2 LOCATION IN BUILDING

Locate the cabinet so that it is readily accessible and not exposed to physical damage.

4.3 FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

Locate the cabinet well away from flammable material.

4.4 UNUSUAL SERVICE CONDITIONS

Do not locate the cabinet where it will be exposed to ambient temperatures above 40°C (104°F), corrosive

or explosive fumes, dust, vapors, dripping or standing water, abnormal vibration, mechanical shock, high

humidity, tilting, or unusual operating conditions, unless the cabinet/panelboard combination has been

designed and so identified by the manufacturer for these conditions.

4.5 INDOOR DAMP LOCATIONS

Locate or shield the cabinet so as to prevent moisture and water from entering and accumulating therein.

Mount the cabinet so that there is at least 1/4 inch of air space between the cabinet and the wall or other

supporting surface.

4.6 WET LOCATIONS

Cabinets should be specifically approved for wet locations. Mount the cabinet so that there is at least 1/4

inch of air space between the cabinet and the wall or other supporting surface.

4.7 CLEARANCE FROM CEILING

Do not locate the cabinet against a non-fireproof ceiling; allow a space of 3 feet between the ceiling and

cabinet unless an adequate fireproof shield is provided.

4.8 SPACE AROUND THE CABINET

When selecting a location, provide sufficient access and working space around the cabinet (See Section

110.26 of the National Electrical Code). The width of the working space in front of the panelboard should be

at least 30 inches and this space should not be used as storage. The working space should have adequate

lighting and a minimum head room of 6 feet 6 inches.

4.9 MOUNTING OF CABINET

The cabinet should be reliably secured to the mounting surface. Do not depend on wooden plugs driven into

holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials. (See Section 110.13 of the National Electrical

Code.)

210 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 5

4.10 FLUSH MOUNTING IN WALL

In walls of concrete, tile, or other noncombustible material, install the cabinet so that its front edge will not set

back more than 1/4 inch from the finished surface. In walls of wood or other combustible material, cabinets

should be flush with or project beyond the finished surface. (See Section 312.3 of the National Electrical

Code.)

4.11 UNUSED OPENINGS IN CABINET

Effectively close unused openings in the cabinet to provide protection which is substantially equivalent to

that afforded by the wall of the cabinet.

4.12 GROUNDING OF PANELBOARD CABINETS

Ground the cabinet as specified in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code. When the cabinet contains

service equipment, it is necessary to bond the cabinet to the grounded (neutral) service conductor.

211 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 6

Section 5

INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS

5.1 CONDUITS INSTALLATION

Conduits should be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the

enclosure. Provision should be made to protect conductors from abrasion in accordance with Article 312 of

the National Electrical Code.

5.2 KNOCKOUTS REMOVAL

Knockouts should be removed as follows:

IMPORTANT—Remove knockouts, ONE AT A TIME, alternating INWARD and OUTWARD.

5.2.1 First Step—Remove Center Knockout

Remove center knockout INWARD.

5.2.1.1 Screwdriver Blade

Place screwdriver blade against point farthest from tie and strike INWARD (Figure 1). Bend back and

forth to break tie.

5.2.2 Next Step—Remove Rings

Remove rings ONE AT A TIME without straining remaining rings.

5.2.2.1 Pry First Ring

Pry first ring OUTWARD with screwdriver midway between ties, using pliers flat against box under

screwdriver (Figure 2). Bend ring sections OUTWARD with pliers, then back and forth to break ties

(Figure 5-3).

5.2.2.2 Second Ring

Remove second ring INWARD by striking screwdriver (with blade against point midway between ties)

then breaking ring sections inward and back and forth to break ties.

5.3 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ARTICLE 300

Refer to the National Electrical Code, Article 300 for proper wiring methods. See 6.7 for making proper

connections.

5.4 CONDUCTOR LENGTH

Keep conductor length to a minimum within the wiring gutter. Excessive conductor length will result in

additional heating and may result in overheating. However, conductors should be long enough to reach

the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the terminal.

5.5 EXERCISE CARE

Exercise care to maintain the largest practical bending radius of conductors; otherwise the insulation may

be damaged and terminal connections may become loosened. Deflection of conductors shall comply with

NEC Section 312.6.

212 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 7

5.6 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, SECTION 725.54

Refer to the National Electrical Code, Section 725.54 for the separation requirements for conductors of

Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

213 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 8

Figure 5–1

KNOCKOUT REMOVAL—STEP 1

214 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 9

Figure 5–2

KNOCKOUT REMOVAL—STEP 2

215 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 10

Figure 5–3

KNOCKOUT REMOVAL—STEP 3

216 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 11

Section 6

INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARD

6.1 PROPER STORAGE

Store the panelboard in a clean, dry place located so that mechanical damage from work personnel in the

area is not likely to happen.

6.2 UNPACKING

Care should be exercised in unpacking the panelboard to prevent damage and loss of instruction

materials and loose parts.

6.3 INSPECTION

Check for shipping damage and check to make sure that the panelboard is the correct one for installation

in the cabinet.

6.4 CARE

Care should be taken to protect the panelboard internal parts from contamination during the installation

process.

6.4.1 Cleaning

Clean the cabinet of all foreign materials. If parts at connection points are spattered with cement, plaster,

paint, or other foreign material, remove the foreign materials with great care to avoid damage to the

plating.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate panelboard components during installation or maintenance.

6.5 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions and labels.

6.6 INSTALLATION

6.6.1 Alignment Devices

Adjust the alignment devices where provided.

6.6.2 Panelboard

Install the panelboard, finalize its alignment, and tighten it securely in the cabinet.

6.6.3 Flange of Deadfront Shield

Unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer, adjust the panelboard so that the flange of the

deadfront shield is no more than 3/16 inch from (1) the front of the cabinet for surface mounting or (2) the

surrounding wall surfaces for flush mounting.

217 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 12

6.7 LINE AND BRANCH CONDUCTORS

Connect Line and Branch Conductors

6.7.1 Conductors

Use care in stripping insulation from conductors so as not to nick or ring the conductor. For aluminum,

clean all oxide from the stripped portion and apply an antioxide compound.

6.7.1.1 Wiring Gutters

Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters. (See Section 5.)

6.7.1.2 Types and Temperature Ratings

Care should be exercised to ensure that the types and temperature ratings of conductors being installed

in the panelboard are suitable for use with the terminals, which have been provided.

6.7.1.3 Tighten All Terminals

Use the manufacturer's torque values. (See 7.1).

6.8 PANELBOARD GROUNDING

Ground the panelboard cabinet in accordance with 4.12. (See Section 408.40 of the National Electrical

Code.)

6.8.1 Equipment Grounding Conductors

Where separate equipment grounding conductors are used, prepare equipment grounding conductors in

accordance with 6.7.1 and connect them to the equipment grounding terminal bar. Check to be sure that the

terminal bar is securely bonded to the cabinet or panelboard frame and that it is not connected to the neutral

bar except at service equipment (as permitted in Section 250.28 of the National Electrical Code) or at

separately derived systems (as permitted in Section 250.30 of the National Electrical Code).

NOTE—An equipment grounding terminal bar is not always required. For example, when a properly installed metallic raceway is used as

the equipment grounding path or when the grounded conductor terminals (neutral bar) complies with the conditions of the last sentence

of Section 408.40 of the National Electrical Code.

6.9 PROPER TYPE OR CLASS AND RATING

When installing circuit breakers or fuses, ensure that they are of the proper type or class and rating.

6.10 DEBRIS

Clean the cabinet of all debris, which has accumulated during the panelboard installation (see 6.4.1).

6.11 STEPS IN SECTION 7

If the job is complete, perform the steps in Section 7 and then install the cabinet front (see Section 8).

218 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 13

Section 7

STEPS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE ENERGIZING

7.1 ACCESSIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Tighten all accessible electrical connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. If such information

is not provided with the equipment, consult the manufacturer.

7.2 BLOCKS AND PACKING MATERIALS

Make certain that all blocks and packing materials used for shipment have been removed from all

component devices and the panelboard.

7.3 SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS, AND OTHER OPERATING MECHANISMS

Manually exercise all switches, circuit breakers, and other operating mechanisms to make certain they

operate freely.

Check the integrity of all electrical and mechanical interlocks and padlocking mechanisms. For key

interlocked systems, assure that only the required number of keys are accessible to the operator.

7.4 SHORT CIRCUITS AND GROUND FAULTS

To make sure that the system is free from short circuits and ground faults, conduct an insulation resistance

test phase to ground and phase to phase with the switches or circuit breakers in both the open and closed

positions. If the resistance reads less than 1 megohm while testing with the branch circuit devices in the

open position, the system may be unsafe and should be investigated. If after investigation and possible

correction, low readings are still observed, the manufacturer should be contacted. Some electronic

equipment (metering, TVSS, etc.) may be damaged by this testing. Refer to the manufacturers equipment

markings for guidelines.

7.5 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM

Test the ground fault protection system (if furnished) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. See

Section 230.95 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA Standards Publication PB 2.2, Application Guide

for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment.

7.6 ADJUSTABLE TIME CURRENT TRIP DEVICE SETTINGS

Set any adjustable time current trip device settings to the proper values.

NOTE—Experience has indicated that damage from overcurrent can be reduced if the devices used for overload and short-circuit

protection are set to operate instantaneously (that is, without intentional time delay) at 115 percent of the highest value of phase current

which is likely to occur as the result of any anticipated motor starting or welding currents.

7.7 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

Check to determine that all grounding connections are properly made. If the panelboard is used as service

equipment, make certain that the neutral, if present, is properly bonded to the cabinet.

219 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 14

7.8 FOREIGN MATERIAL

Remove all foreign material from the panelboard and cabinet before installing the cabinet front. Make certain

that all deadfront shields are properly aligned and tightened. Install the cabinet front in accordance with

Section 8.

220 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 15

Section 8

INSTALLATION OF CABINET FRONT

8.1 CABINET FRONT OR TRIM PACKAGE

The cabinet front or trim package is designed to prevent damage to the front during shipment and handling.

8.2 UNPACKING

Care should be used when unpacking and handling the cabinet front.

8.3 COVERS AND DOORS

Install covers, close doors, and make certain that no conductors are pinched and that all enclosure parts are

properly aligned and tightened.

8.4 TOUCH-UP

A suitable paint or other corrosion-resistant finish should be applied to those places where the finish is

damaged.

8.5 FRONT ALIGNMENT

The cabinet front may be provided with an adjusting means to align it squarely with the building even though

the cabinet may be slightly out of plumb with the building.

221 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 16

Section 9

ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT

WARNING—HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. ENERGIZING A PANELBOARD FOR THE FIRST TIME AFTER

INITIAL INSTALLATION OR MAINTENANCE IS POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS.

9.1 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

Only qualified personnel should energize equipment for the first time. If short circuit conditions caused by

damage or poor installation practices have not been detected in the procedures specified in Section 7,

serious personal injury and damage can occur when the power is turned on.

9.2 LOAD ON THE PANELBOARD

There should be no load on the panelboard when it is energized. Turn off all of the downstream loads.

9.3 ENERGIZED IN SEQUENCE

The equipment should be energized in sequence by starting at the source end of the system and working

towards the load end. In other words, energize the main devices, then the feeder devices, and then the

branch-circuit devices. Turn the devices on with a firm positive motion.

9.4 LOADS SUCH AS LIGHTING CIRCUITS, CONTACTORS, HEATERS, AND MOTORS

After all main, feeder, and branch circuit devices have been closed, loads such as lighting circuits,

contactors, heaters, and motors may be turned on.

222 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 17

Section 10

MAINTENANCE

10.1 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

A maintenance program for panelboards should be conducted on a regularly scheduled basis in accordance

with the following:

10.2 PANELBOARD WHICH HAS BEEN CARRYING ITS REGULAR LOAD FOR AT LEAST 3

HOURS

A panelboard which has been carrying its regular load for at least 3 hours just prior to inspection should be

field tested by feeling the deadfront surfaces of circuit breakers, switches, interior trims, doors, and

enclosure sides with the palm of the hand. If the temperature of these surfaces does not permit you to

maintain contact for at least 3 seconds, this may be an indication of trouble and investigation is necessary.

Thermographic (infrared) scanning has become a useful method of investigating thermal performance.

WARNING—HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED ON PANELBOARDS TO WHICH POWER HAS

BEEN TURNED OFF, DISCONNECTED AND ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SO THAT NO ACCIDENTAL

CONTACT CAN BE MADE WITH ENERGIZED PARTS. FOLLOW ALL MANUFACTURER’S

WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

Safety related work practices, as described in NFPA 70E, should be followed at all times.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate panelboard components during installation or maintenance.

10.3 INSPECT PANELBOARD ONCE EACH YEAR

Inspect the panelboard once each year or after any severe short circuit.

10.4 ACCUMULATION OF DUST AND DIRT

If there is an accumulation of dust and dirt, clean out the panelboard by using a brush, vacuum cleaner, or

clean lint-free rags. Avoid blowing dust into circuit breakers or other components. Do not use a blower or

compressed air.

10.4.1 Visible Electrical Joints and Terminals

Carefully inspect all visible electrical joints and terminals in the bus and wiring system.

10.4.2 Conductors and Connections

Visually check all conductors and connections to be certain that they are clean and secure. Loose and/or

contaminated connections increase electrical resistance which can cause overheating. Such overheating is

indicated by discoloration or flaking of insulation and/or metal parts. Pitting or melting of connecting surfaces

is a sign of arcing due to a loose or otherwise poor connection. Parts which show evidence of overheating

or looseness should be cleaned and re-torqued or replaced if damaged. Tighten bolts and nuts at bus joints

to manufacturer’s torque specifications.

223 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 18

CAUTION—Do not remove plating from aluminum parts in joints or terminations. Damage to plating can

result in overheating. Replace damaged aluminum parts.

10.4.3 Fuse Clip Contact Pressure and Contact Means

Examine fuse clip contact pressure and contact means. If there is any sign of overheating or looseness,

follow the manufacturer’s maintenance instructions or replace the fuse clips. Loose fuse clips can result in

overheating.

10.4.4 Plug Fuses

Re-tighten plug fuses.

10.4.5 Conditions Which Caused Overheating

Be sure that all conditions which caused the overheating have been corrected.

10.5 PROPER AMPERE, VOLTAGE, AND INTERRUPTING RATINGS

Check circuit breakers, switches, and fuses to ensure they have the proper ampere, voltage, and

interrupting ratings. Ensure that non-current-limiting devices are not used as replacements for current-

limiting devices. Never attempt to defeat rejection mechanisms which are provided to prevent the installation

of the incorrect class of fuse.

10.5.1 Mechanisms Free and in Proper Working Order

Operate each switch or circuit breaker several times to ensure that all mechanisms are free and in proper

working order. Replace as required. See NEMA AB-4 for maintenance of molded case circuit breakers.

10.6 OPERATION OF ALL MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

Check the operation of all mechanical components. Replace as required.

10.6.1 Switch Operating Mechanisms

Exercise switch operating mechanisms and external operators for circuit breakers to determine that they

operate freely to their full on and off positions.

10.6.2 Integrity of Electrical and Mechanical Interlocks

Check the integrity of all electrical and mechanical interlocks and padlocking mechanisms. For key

interlocked systems, assure that only the required number of keys are accessible to the operator.

10.6.3 Missing or Broken Parts

Whenever practical, check all devices for missing or broken parts, proper spring tension, free movement,

corrosion, dirt, and excessive wear.

10.6.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions

Adjust, clean, and lubricate or replace parts according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

10.6.4.1 Clean Nonmetallic Light Grease or Oil

Use clean nonmetallic light grease or oil as instructed.

10.6.4.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Do not oil or grease parts of molded case circuit breakers.

224 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 19

10.6.4.3 Clean, Light Grease

If no instructions are given on the devices, sliding copper contacts, operating mechanisms, and interlocks

may be lubricated with clean, light grease.

10.6.4.4 Excess Lubrication

Wipe off excess lubrication to avoid contamination.

CAUTION—Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause

degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean,

dry, or lubricate panelboard components during installation or maintenance.

10.6.5 Accessible Copper Electrical Contacts, Blades, and Jaws

Clean and dress readily accessible copper electrical contacts, blades, and jaws according to the

manufacturer's instructions when inspection indicates the need.

10.7 DAMAGED INSULATING MATERIAL AND ASSEMBLIES

Look for and replace damaged insulating material and assemblies where sealing compounds have

deteriorated.

10.8 MOISTURE OR SIGNS OF PREVIOUS WETNESS OR DRIPPING

Look for any moisture or signs of previous wetness or dripping inside the cabinet.

NOTE—Condensation in conduits or dripping from outside sources is one known cause of panelboard malfunction.

10.8.1 Conduits Which Have Dripped Condensate

Seal off any conduits which have dripped condensate, and provide means for further condensate to drain

away from the panelboard.

10.8.2 Cracks or Openings

Seal off any cracks or openings which have allowed moisture to enter the enclosure. Eliminate the source of

any dripping on the enclosure and any other source of moisture.

10.8.3 Insulating Material Which is Damp or Wet

Replace or thoroughly dry and clean any insulating material, which is damp or wet or shows an

accumulation of deposited material from previous wettings.

10.8.4 Component Devices Which Show Evidence of Moisture Damage

Inspect all component devices. Replace any component device which shows evidence of moisture damage

or has been subjected to water damage or flooding. Additional information may be found in the NEMA

document “Guidelines for Handling Water Damaged Electrical Products.”

10.9 BEFORE CLEANUP AND CORRECTIVE ACTION IS ATTEMPTED

In the event of water damage, e.g., flooding or sprinkler discharge, the manufacturer should be consulted

before clean up and corrective action is attempted.

225 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 20

10.10 SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT

If a severe electrical short circuit has occurred, the excessive currents may have resulted in structural

component and/or bus and conductor damage due to mechanical distortion, thermal damage, metal

deposits, or smoke. Examine all devices and bus supports for cracks or breakage. The manufacturer should

be consulted before cleanup and correction is attempted.

10.11 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM

Test the ground fault protection system (if furnished) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. See

Section 230.95 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA Standards Publication PB 2.2, Application Guide

for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment.

10.12 INSULATION RESISTANCE

Check insulation resistance (see 7.4) under any of the following conditions:

10.12.1 Severe Short Circuit

If a severe short circuit has occurred (see 10.10);

10.12.2 Parts Replaced

If it has been necessary to replace parts or clean insulating surfaces;

10.12.3 Panelboard Exposed to High Humidity

If the panelboard has been exposed to high humidity, condensation, or dripping moisture.

226 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 21

Section 11

PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF PANELBOARDS

11.1 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

In compliance with the National Electrical Code, the normal continuous loads (3 hours or more) of

panelboard circuits should be not more than 80 percent of the rating of the overcurrent protective device,

unless the marking of the device indicates that it is suitable for continuous duty at 100 percent of its

rating.

11.2 HARMONICS IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Some types of electrical equipment cause harmonics in the electrical system, which may result in

overheating. This condition should be considered when determining panelboard loading.

227 of 292

PB 1.1-2007

Page 22

228 of 292

Data Bulletin

1640DB0803

09/2008

Peru, IN, USA

Replacement Parts

NQ Panelboards Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker

Class 1640

Retain for future use.

Overview

This data bulletin lists the replacement parts for NQ panelboards. Do not

replace a part not specifically listed in this bulletin. Instead, replace the

entire assembly with the appropriate interior or kit. The following parts

are replaceable:

•Panelboard Installation Bag Assembly

— Contains the parts that come in the bag assembly with the interior

•Interior Parts

— Standard main lugs (Al/Cu mechanical lugs)

— Branch connectors and hardware

— Bus covers

— Neutral bonding strap and hardware

•Deadfronts

— Complete deadfronts (individual sections not available)

Panelboard Installation Bag Assembly A replacement bag assembly (part number 80122-272-50) is available for

100–600 A NQ factory-assembled panelboards, with the following contents:

•Information Manual and NEMA installation manual

•Panelboard mounting hardware

•Circuit numbering strips

•French & Spanish language wire & torque labels

NOTE: A neutral bonding strap is not included in the panelboard

installation bag assembly.

Miscellaneous hardware and commonly used

lighting panelboard parts (manuals, directory

cards, labels, elevating hardware, circuit

numbering strips, keys, mounting screws/nuts,

rail splice screws, and filler plates) can be found

in the lighting panelboard repair parts kit.

To order a lighting panelboard repair parts kit

In the USA, use catalog number TBPANEL

In Canada, use catalog number TBCPANEL

229 of 292

Replacement Parts 1640DB0803

Interior Parts 09/2008

Interior Parts

Deadfronts and Filler Plates

Main Lug Interiors For main lug interiors the entire deadfront is supplied as a replacement.

Individual components are not available. Hardware is shipped with the

deadfront. Deadfronts come without plastic filler plates. Filler plates are

available as NQFP15.

Branch Connectors1

1Kit includes two each A, B, and C phase and installation hardware.

NQ Branch Connectors SKNQBC

Bus covers2

2Depending on circuit count, various combinations of 6-circuit bus covers and 9-circuit bus covers are used in construction of an interior. This kit contains two (2) of each.

NQ Bus Cover Kit (all amperages) NQBCK

Aluminum Mechanical Main Lugs3

3Kit includes four lugs, insulators where required, and hardware.

100 A NQALM1

225 A NQALM2

400 A NQALM4

600 A NQALM6

600 A (3-cables per lug) NQALM6A

Neutral bonding provisions and hardware4

4Includes lugs and required screws.

100/225 80122-269-50

400/600 80122-270-50

230 of 292

1640DB0803 Replacement Parts

09/2008 Deadfronts and Filler Plates

Main Circuit Breaker Interiors For replacement of main circuit breaker interior deadfronts, only the main

breaker section of the deadfront is listed below. To order an entire main

circuit breaker interior deadfront, please order the appropriate Main Lug

Interior deadfront from the table above, and a Main Circuit Breaker Interior

deadfront from the table below.

Table 1: Replacement Deadfronts for Main Lug Interiors

Interior Pole Spaces 18 30 42 54 72 84

100 A

No Options NQRPL18L1

NQRPL418L1 NQRPL30L1

NQRPL430L1 N/A

With SFL

N/AWith FTL

With TVSS

225 A

No Options N/A NQRPL30L2

NQRPL430L2 NQRPL42L2

NQRPL442L2 NQRPL54L2

NQRPL454L2 NQRPL72L2

NQRPL472L2 NQRPL84L2

NQRPL484L2

With SFL N/A

With FTL N/A NQRPL30L2TFL

NQRPL430L2TFL NQRPL42L2TFL

NQRPL442L2TFL NQRPL54L2TFL

NQRPL454L2TFL NQRPL72L2TFL

NQRPL472L2TFL NQRPL84L2TFL

NQRPL484L2TFL

With SFB N/A NQRPLSFB2HJ or NQRPLSFB2Q

With TVSS N/A

400 A

No Options N/A NQRPL30L4

NQRPL430L4 NQRPL42L4

NQRPL442L4 NQRPL54L4

NQRPL454L4 NQRPL72L4

NQRPL472L4 NQRPL84L4

NQRPL484L4

With SFL N/A

With FTL N/A NQRPL30L4TFL

NQRPL430L4TFL NQRPL42L4TFL

NQRPL442L4TFL NQRPL54L4TFL

NQRPL454L4TFL NQRPL72L4TFL

NQRPL472L4TFL NQRPL84L4TFL

NQRPL484L4TFL

With SFB N/A NQRPLSFB6HJ or NQRPLSFB6Q

With TVSS N/A

600 A

No Options N/A NQRPL30L6

NQRPL430L6 NQRPL42L6

NQRPL442L6 NQRPL54L6

NQRPL454L6 NQRPL72L6

NQRPL472L6 NQRPL84L6

NQRPL484L6

With SFL N/A

With FTL N/A NQRPL30L6TFL

NQRPL430L6TFL NQRPL42L6TFL

NQRPL442L6TFL NQRPL54L6TFL

NQRPL454L6TFL NQRPL72L6TFL

NQRPL472L6TFL NQRPL84L6TFL

NQRPL484L6TFL

With SFB N/A NQRPLSFB6HJ or NQRPLSFB6Q

With TVSS N/A

Table 2: Replacement Main Circuit Breaker Deadfront Sections1

1These do not vary by circuit count.

100 A and 225 A NQRPLMB1F (for F-frame mains)

NQRPLMB2HJ (for H- and J-frame mains)

400 A NQRPLMB4LA (for LA/LH mains)

600 A Contact the Customer Information Center

For repairs not involving the service parts addressed in this document, please call the

Square D / Schneider Electric Customer Information Center:

In the USA, 1-888-SquareD (1-888-778-2733)

In Canada, 1-800-565-6699

231 of 292

Replacement Parts 1640DB0803

Data Bulletin 09/2008

Schneider Electric USA

252 North Tippecanoe

Peru, IN 46970 USA

1-888-SquareD

(1-888-778-2733)

www.schneider-electric.us

Schneider Electric Canada

19 Waterman Avenue,

M4B 1Y2

Toronto, Ontario

1-800-565-6699

www.schneider-electric.ca

09/2008

232 of 292

Instruction

Bulletin

Directives

d'utilisation

40905-002-02

09/2006

Lexington, KY, USA

30 A General Duty Safety Switches

Interrupteurs de sécurité universels de 30 A

Replaces / Remplace 40905-002-01 02/2003

Class

Classe

Type

Series

Série

3130 1 E02

Retain for future use. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur.

PRECAUTIONS MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR

ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment

(PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices. See

NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced

by qualified electrical personnel.

• Never operate energized switch with door open.

• Turn off switch before removing or installing fuses or

making load side connections.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device

at all line and load fuse clips to confirm switch is off.

• Turn off power supplying switch before doing any

other work on or inside switch.

• Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches.

RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION, D'EXPLOSION OU D'ÉCLAIR D'ARC

• Portez un équipement de protection personnelle (ÉPP) approprié et

observez les méthodes de travail électrique sécuritaire.

Voir NFPA 70E.

• Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l'installation et l'entretien de

cet appareil.

• Ne faites jamais fonctionner l'interrupteur sous tension avec la porte

ouverte.

• Mettez l'interrupteur hors tension avant d'enlever ou d'installer des

fusibles ou de faire des raccordements sur le côté charge.

• Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de tension ayant une valeur

nominale appropriée sur tous les porte-fusibles du côté ligne et charge

pour s'assurer que l'interrupteur soit hors tension.

• Coupez l'alimentation de l'interrupteur avant d'y faire tout autre travail.

• N'utilisez pas de fusibles renouvelables dans les interrupteurs à

fusibles.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in

death or serious injury.

Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées, cela entraînera la mort

ou des blessures graves.

PREPARING THE ENCLOSURE PRÉPARATION DU COFFRET

1. Select the wire size for the line, load, and neutral

circuits. (Refer to the local codes.)

1. Sélectionner le calibre de fil pour les circuits de ligne, de charge et

du neutre (consulter les codes locaux).

2. Select the proper wire clamp or use other approved

methods to hold the wire to the enclosure wall.

2. Sélectionner le serre-fils approprié ou utiliser d'autres méthodes

autorisées pour maintenir le fil contre la paroi du coffret.

3. Remove only those knockouts required for

installation of the wire clamps or conduit.

3. Retirer les débouchures appropriées nécessaires pour

l'installation des serres-fils ou du conduit.

4. To remove knockouts, see Figure 1.

a. Drive center knockout inward.

b. Alternately drive in or pry up outer rings, one at a

time.

c. Remove all loose knockout slugs or rings and all

traces of metal shavings within the enclosure.

4. Pour retirer les débouchures, voir la figure 1.

a. Pousser la débouchure centrale vers l'intérieur.

b. Pousser ou relever alternativement les anneaux extérieurs, un

par un.

c. Retirer du coffret les chutes de débouchures ou anneaux et

toutes traces de rognures métalliques.

Figure / Figure 1 : Removing the Knockouts / Retrait des débouchures

233 of 292

30 A General Duty Safety Switches 40905-002-02

Interrupteurs de sécurité universels de 30 A 09/2006

INSTALLING THE SWITCH INSTALLATION DE L'INTERRUPTEUR

1. Mount the switch to the wall with screws or nails.

Use the precut holes in the back of the enclosure.

See Figure 2.

1. Monter l'interrupteur sur le mur à l'aide de vis ou de clous. Utiliser

les trous pré-découpés à l'arrière du coffret. Voir la figure 2.

Figure / Figure 2 : Mounting the Switch / Montage de l’interrupteur

2. Pull the conductors into the enclosure. 2. Tirer les conducteurs à l'intérieur du coffret.

NOTE: To avoid damage to the conductor insulation, use

approved wire clamps, conduit, and bushings, or other

methods approved for this purpose.

REMARQUE : Pour éviter d'abîmer l'isolation des conducteurs, utiliser

des serre-fils, conduits et traversées approuvés, ou d'autres méthodes

autorisées pour ce faire.

3. Following the wiring diagram on the cover, install the

main and neutral wires. If the equipment ground

wire (green wire or bare copper) is used, install the

wire in the ground connector on the enclosure. See

Figure 3.

3. En suivant le schéma de câblage sur le couvercle, installer les fils

principaux et de neutre. Si le fil de m.à.l.t. des appareils (fil vert ou

de cuivre à nu) est utilisé, installer le fil dans le connecteur de

terre du coffret. Voir la figure 3.

4. Torque all the wire binding screws per the

instructions provided on the enclosure wiring

diagram.

4. Serrer toutes les vis de fixation des fils selon les directives

fournies sur le schéma de câblage du coffret.

Figure / Figure 3 : Wiring the Switch / Câblage de l'interrupteur

Pre-cut holes

(4 total) /

Trous pré-

découpés

(4 au total)

Cartridge Fuse Switch / Interrupteur à fusibles à cartouche Plug Fuse Switch / Interrupteur à fusibles vissés

Equipment

grounding wire /

Fil de m.à.l.t. des

appareils

Main wires /

Fils principaux

Cartridge Fuse Switch / Interrupteur à fusibles à cartouche Plug Fuse Switch / Interrupteur à fusibles vissés

Neutral wire /

Fil du neutre

234 of 292

40905-002-02 30 A General Duty Safety Switches

09/2006 Interrupteurs de sécurité universels de 30 A

INSTALLING THE FUSES INSTALLATION DES FUSIBLES

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR

ARC FLASH

• Turn off power supplying switch before installing or

replacing fuses.

• Close cover before turning on power.

RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION, D'EXPLOSION OU D'ÉCLAIR D'ARC

• Coupez l'alimentation de l'interrupteur avant d'installer ou de

remplacer les fusibles.

• Fermez le couvercle avant de mettre sous tension.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in

death or serious injury.

Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées, cela entraînera la mort

ou des blessures graves.

1. Turn the switch OFF (O). 1. Mettre l'interrupteur hors tension (OFF).

2. Open the cover. 2. Ouvrir le couvercle.

3. Install the fuses. See Figure 4. 3. Installer les fusibles. Voir la figure 4.

4. Mark the maximum replacement fuse size on the

label inside the door.

4. Marquer le calibre maximum des fusibles de rechange sur

l'étiquette à l'intérieur de la porte.

5. Exercise the operating mechanism to ensure proper

operation. This is done by opening and closing the

switch several times. The mechanism should be

exercised at least once a year.

5. Manœuvrer le mécanisme de fonctionnement pour s'assurer de

son bon fonctionnement. Cela s'effectue en ouvrant et fermant

l'interrupteur plusieurs fois. Le mécanisme doit être manœuvré au

moins une fois par an.

NOTE: Ensure that the fuse clips are not damaged

during fuse removal or replacement.

REMARQUE : S'assurer que les porte-fusibles ne sont pas

endommagés pendant le retrait ou le remplacement des fusibles.

Figure / Figure 4 : Installing the Fuses / Installation des fusibles

Cartridge Fuse Switch / Interrupteur à fusibles à cartouche Plug Fuse Switch / Interrupteur à fusibles vissés

Cartridge fuse /

Fusible à cartouche

Plug fuse /

Fusible vissé

235 of 292

30 A General Duty Safety Switches 40905-002-02

Interrupteurs de sécurité universels de 30 A 09/2006

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and

maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by

Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this

material.

Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation, l’utilisation, l’entretien et la

maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n’assume aucune responsabilité

des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l’utilisation de cette documentation.

Schneider Electric USA

1601 Mercer Road

Lexington, KY 40511 USA

1-888-SquareD (1-888-778-2733)

www.us.SquareD.com

Schneider Electric Canada

19 Waterman Avenue, M4B 1 Y2

Toronto, Ontario

1-800-565-6699

www.schneider-electric.ca

Square D, a brand of Schneider Electric / une marque de Schneider Electric

ENERGIZING THE SWITCH MISE DE L'INTERRUPTEUR SOUS TENSION

1. Close the cover. 1. Fermer le couvercle.

2. Turn OFF (O) the switch. 2. Mettre l'interrupteur hors tension (O).

3. Turn OFF (O) all of the downstream loads. 3. Mettre hors tension (O) toutes les charges en aval.

4. Turn ON (I) the power to the equipment in

sequence; start at the source end of the system and

work toward the load end.

4. Mettre les appareils sous tension (I) l'un après l'autre; commencer

par l'extrémité source du système et continuer vers l'extrémité

charge.

236 of 292

Square D, a brand of Schneider Electric. / una marca de Schneider Electric. /

une marque de Schneider Electric.

Instruction

Bulletin Boletín de

instrucciones Directives

d'utilisation

Series

Serie

Série

F01

Replaces

Reemplaza

Remplace

40272-266-03 11/2006

40272-266-04

05/2007

Lexington, KY, USA

GTK03 Equipment Grounding Bar Kit

Accesorio de barra de puesta a tierra del equipo

Kit de barre de m.à.l.t. de l’appareil

Retain for future use. / Conservar para uso futuro. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur.

Precautions Precauciones Précautions

DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, EXPLOSION,

OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate

personal protective

equipment (PPE) and

follow safe electrical

work practices. See

NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must

only be installed and

serviced by qualified

electrical personnel.

• Turn off all power

supplying this equipment

before working on or

inside equipment.

• Always use a properly

rated voltage sensing

device to confirm power

is off.

• Replace all devices,

doors and covers

before turning on power

to this equipment.

PELIGRO DE DESCARGA

ELÉCTRICA, EXPLOSIÓN O

DESTELLO POR ARQUEO

• Utilice equipo de protección

personal (EPP) apropiado y

siga las prácticas de

seguridad eléctrica

establecidas por su

Compañía, consulte la norma

NFPA 70E.

• Solamente el personal

eléctrico especializado

deberá instalar y prestar

servicio de mantenimiento a

este equipo.

• Desenergice el equipo antes

de realizar cualquier trabajo

en él.

• Siempre utilice un dispositivo

detector de tensión nominal

adecuado para confirmar la

desenergización del equipo.

• Vuelva a colocar todos los

dispositivos, las puertas y

las cubiertas antes de volver

a energizar el equipo.

RISQUE

D'ÉLECTROCUTION,

D'EXPLOSION OU

D’ÉCLAIR D’ARC

• Portez un équipement de

protection personnel (ÉPP)

approprié et observez les

méthodes de travail

électrique sécuritaire. Voir

NFPA 70E.

• Seul un personnel qualifié

doit effectuer l'installation

et l'entretien de cet

appareil.

• Coupez l'alimentation de

l'appareil avant d'y

travailler.

• Utilisez toujours un dispositif

de détection de tension à

valeur nominale appropriée

pour s'assurer que

l'alimentation est coupée.

• Replacez tous les

dispositifs, les portes et les

couvercles avant de mettre

l'appareil sous tension.

Failure to follow these

instructions will result

in death or serious

injury.

El incumplimiento de estas

instrucciones podrá causar

la muerte o lesiones serias.

Si ces directives ne sont

pas respectées, cela

entraînera la mort ou des

blessures graves.

85901 42181

42181

237 of 292

Made in USA Hecho en EUA Fabriqué aux É.-U.

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified

personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising

out of the use of this material.

Solamente el personal especializado deberá instalar, hacer funcionar y prestar servicios de

mantenimiento al equipo eléctrico. Schneider Electric no asume responsabilidad alguna por

las consecuencias emergentes de la utilización de este material.

Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation, l’utilisation, l’entretien et la

maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n’assume aucune responsabilité

des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l’utilisation de cette documentation.

Schneider Electric USA

1601 Mercer Road

Lexington, KY 40511 USA

1-888-778-2733

www.us.SquareD.com

40272-266-04

Importado en México por:

Schneider Electric México,

S.A. de C.V.

Calz. J. Rojo Gómez 1121-A

Col. Gpe. del Moral 09300

México, D.F.

Tel. 55-5804-5000

www.schneider-electric.com.mx

Schneider Electric Canada

19 Waterman Avenue,

M4B 1 Y2

Toronto, Ontario

1-800-565-6699

www.schneider-electric.ca

Contents Contenido Contenu

1 Grounding Bar

1 Mounting Screw

1 Equipment Grounding

Label

1 barra de puesta a tierra

1 tornillo de montaje

1 etiqueta de puesta a tierra

del equipo

1 barre de m.à.l.t.

1 vis de montage

1 étiquette de m.à.l.t. de

l’appareil

Installation Instalación Installation

1. Turn off all power

supplying the

equipment where kit

will be installed.

1. Desenergice el gabinete

en el que se instalará este

accesorio.

1. Couper l’alimentation vers

le coffret sur lequel ce kit

doit être installé.

NOTE: Three mounting

locations are provided on

bottom of enclosure,

adjacent to ground

symbol.

2. Mount grounding bar to

bottom of enclosure ,

using mounting screw.

NOTA: Se proporcionan tres

ubicaciones de montaje en la

parte inferior del gabinete,

adyacentes al símbolo de

tierra.

2. Monte la barra de puesta a

tierra en la parte inferior del

gabinete, utilizando el

tornillo de montaje.

REMARQUE : Trois

emplacements de montage

sont fournis au fond du

coffret, à côté du symbole de

m.à.l.t.

2. Monter la barre de m.à.l.t.

au fond du coffret, à l’aide

de la vis de montage.

3. Tighten mounting

screw to 20 lb-in.

(2.3 N•m) after

overcoming starting

torque.

3. Apriete el tornillo de

montaje a 2,3 N•m

(20 lbs-pulg) una vez

realizado el apriete inicial.

3. Serrer la vis de montage á

2,3 N•m (20 lb-po) après

le serrage de départ.

4. Apply equipment

grounding label to

enclosure beside

grounding bar.

4. Adhiera la etiqueta de

puesta a tierra del equipo

al gabinete, junto a la

barra de puesta a tierra.

4. Placer l'étiquette de

m.à.l.t. de l'appareil sur le

coffret, à côté de la barre

de m.à.l.t.

5. Install wiring to

grounding bar. See

equipment grounding

label for wire size and

binding screw torque.

5. Instale los cables en la

barra de puesta a tierra.

Consulte la etiqueta de

puesta a tierra del equipo

para obtenir el tamaña de

los conductores y el valor

de par de apriete del

tornillos de sujeción.

5. Installer le câblage sur la

barre de m.à.l.t. Consulter

l'étiquette de m.à.l.t. de

l'appareil pour obtenir le

calibre des fils ainsi que le

couple de serrage de la vis

de fixation.

238 of 292

a brand of Schneider Electric. / una marca de Schneider Electric. /

une marque de Schneider Electric.

PKOGTA2 Service / Equipment Grounding Lug

Barra de puesta a tierra del equipo / tierra de

acometida

Barre de m.à.l.t. de l'apparei / m.à.l.t. de service

Instruction

Bulletin Boletín de

instrucciones Directives

d'utilisation

Series A01

Serie A01

Série A01

Replaces

Reemplaza

Remplace

40272-068-01

11/1996

40272-068-02

05/2007

Lexington, KY, USA

Retain for future use. / Conservar para uso futuro. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur.

DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, EXPLOSION,

OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate

personal protective

equipment (PPE) and

follow safe electrical

work practices. See

NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must

only be installed and

serviced by qualified

electrical personnel.

• Turn off all power

supplying this equipment

before working on or

inside equipment.

• Always use a properly

rated voltage sensing

device to confirm power

is off.

• Replace all devices,

doors and covers before

turning on power to this

equipment.

PELIGRO DE DESCARGA

ELÉCTRICA, EXPLOSIÓN O

DESTELLO POR ARQUEO

• Utilice equipo de protección

personal (EPP) apropiado y

siga las prácticas de

seguridad eléctrica

establecidas por su

Compañía, consulte la

norma 70E de NFPA.

• Solamente el personal

eléctrico especializado

deberá instalar y prestar

servicio de mantenimiento a

este equipo.

• Desenergice el equipo antes

de realizar cualquier trabajo

en él.

• Siempre utilice un dispositivo

detector de tensión nominal

adecuado para confirmar la

desenergización del equipo.

• Vuelva a colocar todos los

dispositivos, las puertas y

las cubiertas antes de

volver a energizar el equipo.

RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION,

D’EXPLOSION OU D’ÉCLAIR

D’ARC

• Portez un équipement de

protection personnelle

(ÉPP) approprié et

observez les méthodes de

travail élecrique sécuritaire.

Voir NFPA 70E.

• Seul un personnel qualifié

doit effectuer l’installation et

l’entretien de cet appareil.

• Coupez l'alimentation de

l'appareil avant d'y travailler.

• Utilisez toujours un dispositif

de détection de tension

ayant une valeur nominale

appropriée pour vous

assurer que l'alimentation

est coupée.

• Replacez tous les

dispositifs, les portes et les

couvercles avant de mettre

l'appareil sous tension.

Failure to follow these

instructions will result in

death or serious injury.

El incumplimiento de estas

instrucciones podrá causar

la muerte o lesiones serias.

Si ces directives ne sont

pas respectées, cela

entraînera la mort ou des

blessures graves.

785901 43267 8

43267

239 of 292

Made in USA Hecho en EUA Fabriqué aux É.-U.

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified

personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising

out of the use of this material.

Solamente el personal especializado deberá instalar, hacer funcionar y prestar servicios de

mantenimiento al equipo eléctrico. Schneider Electric no asume responsabilidad alguna por

las consecuencias emergentes de la utilización de este material.

Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation, l’utilisation, l’entretien et la

maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n’assume aucune responsabilité

des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l’utilisation de cette documentation.

Schneider Electric USA

1601 Mercer Road

Lexington, KY 40511 USA

(1-888-778-2733)

www.us.SquareD.com

Importado en México por:

Schneider Electric México,

S.A. de C.V.

Calz. J. Rojo Gómez 1121-A

Col. Gpe. del Moral 09300

México, D.F.

Tel. 55-5804-5000

www.schneider-electric.com.mx

Schneider Electric Canada

19 Waterman Avenue,

M4B 1 Y2

Toronto, Ontario

1-800-565-6699

www.schneider-electric.ca

40272-068-02

Contents Contenido Contenu

2 Lugs

1 Mounting screw

2 Labels

2 Zapatas

1 Tornillo de montaje

2 Etiquetas

2 Cosses

1 Vis de montage

2 Étiquettes

Mounting Montaje Montage

1. Turn off all power

supplying this equipment

before working on or

inside equipment.

1. Desenergice el equipo

antes de realizar cualquier

trabajo en él.

1. Couper l'alimentation de

cet appareil avant d'y

travailler.

2. Mount lugs to back of

box where hole is

provided.

2. Monte las zapatas en la

parte posterior de la caja

en el agujero provisto.

2. Monter les cosses sur

l'arrière du coffret en

utilisant le trou fourni.

3. Torque mounting lug

screw to 25–45 lb-in.

(2.8–5.0 N•m).

3. Apriete el tornillo de

montaje de la zapata de

2,8 a 5,0 N•m (25 a 45 lbs-

pulg).

3. Serrer la vis de montage

de la cosse entre 2,8 et

5,0 N•m (25 et 45 lb-po).

NOTE: When used for

equipment grounding,

place marker “Equipment

Grounding Terminal” near

lugs after installation.

Attach torque label to box

adjacent to grounding

lugs.

NOTA: Cuando se utiliza

como puesta a tierra del

equipo, coloque la etiqueta

"terminal de puesta a tierra

del equipo" junto a las

zapatas después de la

instalación. Adhiera la

etiqueta de par de apriete en

la caja junto a las zapatas de

tierra.

REMARQUE : Lorsqu'il est

utilisé comme m.à.l.t. de

l'appareil, placer le repère

" Borne de m.à.l.t. de

l'appareil " près des cosses

après l'installation. Fixer

l'étiquette de couple de

serrage adjacent aux cosses

de m.à.l.t.

240 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit

Breakers

Catalog

0730CT9801R1/08

2008

Class 730

CONTENTS

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3

Special Application Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 7

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 15

Trip Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 19

Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 36

241 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

General Information

07/2008

General Information

QO® and QOB Circuit Breakers

QO® (plug-on) and QOB (bolt-on) one-, two- and three-pole thermal-magnetic circuit breakers provide

overcurrent protection and switching on ac and dc systems. Plug-on QO circuit breakers are for use in

QO load centers, NQ and NQOD panelboards, OEM mounting bases, and Speed-D®switchboard

distribution panels. Bolt-on QOB circuit breakers are for use in NQO and NQOD panelboards.

Operating mechanism

QO and QOB circuit breakers have an overcenter, trip-free toggle mechanism with quick-make, quick-

break action and positive handle indication. The tripping mechanisms in two-and three-pole circuit

breakers operate such that an overcurrent on any pole of the circuit breaker will cause all poles of the

circuit breaker to open simultaneously. Each pole has an individual thermal-magnetic trip element

calibrated for 40°C ambient temperature.

Trip Indication

QO and QOB circuit breakers have Visi-Trip® trip indication, which provides a visual indication that the

circuit breaker has tripped and interrupted the circuit. When the circuit breaker has tripped, the handle

assumes a center position and the red Visi-Trip indicator appears in a window in the circuit breaker

case. The Visi-Trip indicator is only visible when the circuit breaker has tripped. Trip indication

immediately distinguishes the circuit from any other circuit which is merely in the on or off position. The

circuit breaker can be reset by pushing the handle to OFF and then to ON.

Construction Standards

QO and QOB circuit breakers are built to comply with UL Standard 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5, NOM/ANCE

and NEMA Standard AB1 and to meet Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN. QO circuit breakers are

UL Listed under UL File E84967 and are CSA Certified under CSA Master Contract 153555.

1 Pole

07303095

2 Pole

07303090

3 Pole

07303091

QO Circuit Breakers

Visi-Trip®

Window

07303095

QO Circuit Breaker UL Type

QO280–QO210 QOA, QOB

QO2110–QO2125 QOC, QOCB

QO2150–QO2200 QOC (no bolt-on version)

242 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

General Information

07/2008

Ratings

When designing an electrical distribution system, overcurrent protective devices are generally selected

based on performance requirements. Factors influencing this selection include system voltage,

continuous current, interrupting rating, and frequency.

Voltage Rating

The circuit breaker must have a voltage rating greater than, or equal to, the system voltage. When a

circuit breaker clears an overcurrent, it is done in two steps. First, the current sensing system identifies

the overcurrent and releases the tripping mechanism. This results in a parting of the contacts. The

circuit breaker must then extinguish the voltage arc across the contacts. If the circuit breaker has the

correct voltage rating, it can efficiently extinguish this voltage arc. QO and QOB circuit breakers are

rated for use in the following voltage systems:

•120 Vac

•208/120 Vac

•120/240 Vac

•240 Vac

•48 Vdc (10–70 A for 1 and 2 pole circuit breakers, 10–60 A for 3 pole circuit breakers)

Continuous Current Rating

The continuous current rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum current in amperes (dc or rms ac at

rated frequency) which a device will carry continuously without exceeding the specified allowable

temperature rise. Sometimes referred to as the ampere rating or handle rating of the circuit breaker,

the continuous current rating relates to the system current flow under normal conditions.

UL and CSA require that circuit breakers must be able to carry their continuous current rating

indefinitely at 40°C in free air in order to achieve a UL Listing/CSA Certification. The National Electrical

Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) recognize that devices applied in end-use

equipment can be affected by heat build up during normal operating conditions. For this reason, the

codes require that circuit breakers be selected based on the characteristics of the load (particularly,

the portion of the load which will be on continuously for three hours or more at a time).

Frequency Rating

The standard rated frequency for circuit breakers is 60 Hz. Circuit breakers are also rated for dc

applications as shown in Table 1. Many Square D circuit breakers can also be applied on 50 Hz systems

without derating. GFCI, AFCI and EPD devices are rated for 60 Hz operation only. Frequencies can affect

the thermal, magnetic and short-circuit characteristics of circuit breakers. See Data Bulletin 0100DB0101

Determining Current Carrying Capacity in Special Applications. Contact the Field Sales office before

applying circuit breakers on systems at frequencies other than 50/60 Hz.

243 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

General Information

07/2008

Interrupting Rating

The interrupting rating of a circuit breaker is the highest current at rated voltage that the circuit breaker

is intended to interrupt under standard test conditions. A circuit breaker must be chosen so that the

interrupting rating is equal to or greater than the maximum available short-circuit current at the point

where the circuit breaker is applied in the system.

DC Voltage Rating

QO and QOB circuit breakers are available with a UL Listed 48 Vdc rating. See Table 1. Refer to

Square D Data Bulletin 0601DB0401 for additional information on dc-rated circuit breakers.

Table 1: Interrupting Ratings

Circuit Breaker Type Number

of Poles

Ampere

Rating

UL Listed Interrupting Rating1

110 kA and 5 kA are 1Ø-3Ø.

120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 48 Vdc2

2DC ratings do not apply to circuit breakers rated 10 A.

1 10–70 A 10 kA 10 kA — 5 kA

10–70 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 5 kA

80–100 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

110—200 A 10 kA 10 kA — —

315–60 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 5 kA

70–100 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

QOB

1 10–70 A 10 kA 10 kA — 5 kA

10–70 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 5 kA

80–100 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

110—125 A 10 kA 10 kA — —

315–60 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 5 kA

70–100 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

QO-H, QOB-H 2 15–100 A 10 kA3

3UL Listed 5,000 AIR on 3Ø grounded B-Phase Delta system.

10 kA310 kA3—

QO-VH

1 15–30 A 22 kA 22 kA — —

2 15–200 A 22 kA 22 kA — —

3 15–100 A 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA —

QOB-VH

1 15–30 A 22 kA 22 kA — —

2 15–125 A 22 kA 22 kA — —

3 15–150 A 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA —

QOH 1 40–125 A 42 kA 42 kA — —

QH, QHB

1 15–30 A 65 kA 65 kA — —

2 15–30 A 65 kA 65 kA — —

3 15–30 A 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA —

QO-GFI, QOB-GFI 1 15–30 A 10 kA — — —

2 15–60 A 10 kA 10 kA — —

QO-VHGFI, QOB-GFI 1 15–30 A 22 kA — — —

QO-AFI, QOB-AFI 1 15–30 A 10 kA — — —

QO-CAFI, QOB-CAFI 1 15–30 A 10 kA — — —

QO-VHCAFI, QOB-VHCAFI 1 15–30 A 22 kA — — —

QO-EPD, QOB-EPD 1 15–30 A 10 kA — — —

2 15–60 A 10 kA 10 kA — —

QO-PL

1 15–30 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

2 15–30 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

3 15–30 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA —

244 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

General Information

07/2008

Temperature Rating

To meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard 489, molded case circuit breakers

are designed, built, and calibrated for us on 60 Hz ac systems in 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature.

When applied at ambient temperatures other than 40°C, the current-carrying capacity and/or trip

charasteristics of the circuit breaker may vary.

IEC Rating

IEC rated QO circuit breakers are available. For further information contact the Field Sales office.

Terminology

HACR

HACR is a term used to designate circuit breakers which have been certified to be used on multi-motor

and combination loads such as are found in heating, air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. QO

circuit breakers meet the UL requirements for HACR circuit breakers and are suitable for group motor

applications requiring HACR listing.

This means that QO and QOB circuit breakers meet the code requirements that HACR circuit breaker

must be of the inverse time type and be approved for group installation. QO and QOB circuit breakers,

except for GFI, AFI and EPD, are Listed with UL as HACR Type and are labeled accordingly.

Figure 1: Ambient Rerating Curves

Current Carrying Capacity (A)

30 A

20 A

15 A

-10

(14)

(32)

(68)

(104)

(140)

Ambient Temperature ˚C

(˚F)

QOT Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Handle Rating

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

Current Carrying Capacity (A)

100 A

90 A

80 A

70 A

15 A

10 A

30 A

20 A

40 A

60 A

50 A

110 A

125 A

-10

(14)

(32)

(68)

(104)

(140)

Ambient Temperature ˚C

(˚F)

QO, QOB Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Handle Rating

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

275

Current Carrying Capacity (A)

200 A

175 A

150 A

125 A

-10

(14)

(32)

(68)

(104)

(140)

Ambient Temperature ˚C

(˚F)

Circuit Breaker Handle Rating

QE Circuit Breakers

245 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

Switching Duty (SWD) Circuit Breakers

QO and QOB circuit breakers are suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. The

switching duty (SWD) listing applies only to one-pole 15 and 20 A circuit breakers rated at 347 Vac or

less. The circuit breakers are subjected to specified temperature rise tests at predetermined periods

during the endurance operations.

Terminations

The 10–30 A circuit breakers have pressure plate terminals suitable for single or two-wire terminations.

Copper or aluminum conductors may be used as outlined in Table 2. QO-GFI 15–30 A and QO-AFI

circuit breakers have pressure plate terminals suitable for single-wire terminations. These circuit

breakers are suitable for use with 60°C or 75°C conductors.

The QO 35–200 A and all QO-PL and QOT tandem circuit breakers have box-type lugs suitable for

single-wire terminations. These circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75°C conductors.

Special Application Circuit Breakers

There are several special application circuit breakers in the QO family:

•QO-HM and QOB-HM High-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

•QO-HID and QOB-HID Circuit Breakers

•QO and QOB Miniature Switches

•QOK and QOBK Key-Operated Circuit Breakers

•QO-GFI and QOB-GFI Qwik-Gard® Circuit Breakers

•QO-EPD and QOB-EPD Equipment Protection Devices

•QO-SWN and QOB-SWN Switch Neutral Circuit Breakers

•QOT Tandem Circuit Breakers

•QO-PL and QOB-PL Powerlink® Circuit Breakers

•QO-AFI and QOB-AFI Branch Feeder Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI)

•QO-CAFI, QOB-CAFI Combination Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI)

This following sections describe the special application circuit breakers and provides application

information for their use.

Table 2: Terminations

Circuit Breaker Types Rating Wire Size

QO, QOB, QO-VH, QOB-VH

10–30 A (1) 14–8 AWG (1.5–3.3 mm2) Al/Cu

(2) 14–10 AWG (1.5–2.6 mm2) Cu

35–70 A (1) 8–2 AWG (3.3–6.5 mm2) Al/Cu

80–125 A (1) 4–2/0 AWG (5.2–9.3 mm2) Al/Cu

QO, QOB, QO-VH 150–200 A (1) 4 AWG–300 kcmil (5.2–50 mm2) Al/Cu

QOB-VH 110–175 A (1) 4 AWG–300 kcmil (5.2–50 mm2) Al/Cu

QOT 15–20 A (1) 12–8 AWG (2.0–3.3 mm2) Al

(1) 14–8 AWG (1.6–3.3 mm2) Cu

QO-CAFI, QO-AFI, QO-GFI, QO-EPD,

QOB-CAFI, QOB-AFI, QOB-GFI, QOB-EPD 15–30 A (1) 12–8 AWG (2.0–3.3 mm2) Al

(1) 14–8 AWG (1.6–3.3 mm2) Cu

QO-GFI, QO-EPD,

QOB-GFI, QOB-EPD 40–60 A (1) 12–4 AWG (2.0–4.1 mm2) Al

(1) 14–6 AWG (1.6–4.1 mm2) Cu

QO-PL 10–60 A (1) 12–2 AWG (2.0–6.5 mm2) Al

246 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

QO-HM and QOB-HM High Magnetic Circuit Breakers

QO-HM and QOB-HM high-magnetic circuit breakers are recommended for area lighting (such as

athletic fields, parking lots, and outdoor signs), when using lamps of inherent high inrush current,

individual dimmer applications or other applications where high inrush currents exceed standard

tripping conditions. These circuit breakers are available in one-pole 15 and 20 A ratings only. QO-HM

and QOB-HM circuit breakers are physically interchangeable with standard QO and QOB circuit

breakers and accommodate the complete range of QO accessories.

QO-HM and QOB-HM circuit breakers are manufactured with the magnetic trip point calibrated at a

much higher level than standard QO and QOB circuit beakers, as shown in Table 3.

QO-HID and QOB-HID High Intensity Discharge Circuit Breakers

QO-HID and QOB-HID circuit breakers are for use in high intensity discharge (HID) lighting systems,

such as systems using mercury vapor, metal halide or high-pressure sodium lighting units. These

circuit breakers are designed to handle the high inductive loads, harmonic currents and cycling which

are inherent in HID lighting systems. QO-HID and QOB-HID circuit breakers are physically

interchangeable with standard QO circuit breakers and accommodate the complete range of QO

accessories.

QO-HID and QOB-HID circuit breakers are manufactured with larger contacts than standard QO and

QOB circuit breakers to allow switching of high inductive loads. They also have magnetic

characteristics similar to QO-HM and QOB-HM high-magnetic circuit breakers to allow the circuit

breaker to hold in against the high starting inrush currents which are typical in HID lighting systems.

QO and QOB Miniature Switches

Miniature switches are intended for use as disconnecting devices only. They provide no overcurrent

protection. QO and QOB switches are UL Certified for use on circuits capable of delivering not more

than 10 kA when protected by an equivalent rated circuit breaker or fuse. These switches are available

in 60 and 100 A rating.

QO and QOB switches are available with auxiliary switches only. (Shunt trip and bell alarm electrical

accessories are not available on QO and QOB miniature switches.) QO and QOB switches are

available with the complete range of handle accessories.

QOK and QOBK Key-Operated Circuit Breakers

Key-operated QOK and QOBK circuit breakers provide an alternative means for turning a circuit

breaker ON or OFF, as well as for resetting a tripped circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is turned on,

off or reset with a special key included with the circuit breaker. Key-operated circuit breakers are

available in one-pole construction only and can be mounted in any one-pole space which will accept a

standard QO circuit breaker. These circuit breakers are available in 10–30 A ratings, with interrupting

ratings of 10 kA at 120 Vac.

Replacement keys are available separately. Factory-installed or field-installable accessories are not

available on key-operated circuit breakers.

Table 3: QO-HM and QOB-HM Circuit Breaker Magnetic Hold Levels

Continuous Current Rating Maximum Full Cycle Magnetic Hold Level

15 A 315–525 A

20 A 322–537 A

07303099

1P QOK

Circuit Breaker

247 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

QO-GFI and QOB-GFI Qwik-Gard® Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters

Qwik-Gard® Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters offer a means of providing ground-fault protection for

people. Qwik-Gard “people protection” ground-fault circuit interrupters are built as Class A devices in

accordance with UL Standard 489 and CSA C22.2 #144 for ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs).

Class A devices must trip at 6 milliamperes of ground-fault current and above, and hold below 4

milliamperes of ground-fault current.

Qwik-Gard GFCIs provide the same branch circuit protection as standard QO circuit breakers. They

are longer than standard QO circuit breakers, and thus require more gutter space. All QO electrical

accessories except shunt trip and all QO mechanical accessories are available for QO-GFI and QOB-

GFI circuit breakers.

Qwik-Gard circuit breakers are UL Listed and CSA Certified and available in both one- and two-pole

constructions.

Qwik-Gard Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Operation

The ground-fault sensor in a Qwik-Gard GFCI continuously monitors the current flow in the load and

neutral conductors. The sensor compares the current flow in all directions. If the current flowing back to

the source is less than the current flowing out to the load, a ground fault exists. When the difference in

current flow exceeds 6 milliamperes, the sensor sends a signal to trip the GFCI. The trip will be

indicated by the Visi-Trip® indicator and the operating handle will move to the center tripped position.

Qwik-Gard Class A GFCIs include a self-contained means of testing the ground-fault circuitry. If the

GFCI is connected correctly, with the pigtail connected to the neutral assembly in the load center or

panelboard, pressing the test button will trip the GFCI and show a trip indication. UL requires that

GFCIs must be operational at 85% of the rated voltage.

07303093

07303092

2P QO-GFI

Circuit Breaker

1P QO-GFI

Circuit Breaker

BLine

Ground

Trip

Solenoid

NLoad Terminals

Sensor

18,000 Ohm Resistor

Tes t

Button

B–"HOT" or Power Connection

N–Neutral Connection

Solid

State

Circuitry

07303101

Line

Sensor

Tes t

Button

Solid

State

Circuitry

Ground

Trip

Solenoid

Ground

Trip

Solenoid 18,808 Ohm

Resistor

Load

Terminals

A and B–"HOT" or Power Connection

N–Neutral Connection

07303101

One-Pole Qwik-Gard Circuit Breaker

Two-Pole Qwik-Gard Circuit Breaker

248 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

Proper Application of Qwik-Gard GFCIs

•Do not connect to swimming pool equipment installed before adoption of the 1965 National Electric

Code

•Do not connect to electrical ranges or clothes dryers whose frames are grounded by a connection

to the grounded circuit conductor.

•Do not use as a main circuit breaker in a panelboard or in reverse connected (backfed)

applications.

•Do not megger, high-voltage or hi-pot test. Any voltage in excess of 240 Vac will damage the GFCI

electronics so that the circuit breaker will not protect against low-level ground faults.

•Must be located no more than 250 ft. (76 m) from the load being served.

•RequiresS the same mounting space as standard QO circuit breakers.

One-Pole Qwik-Gard Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters

One-pole Qwik-Gard GFCIs must be installed on independent circuits. Circuits which have a neutral

common to more than one panel circuit conductor cannot be protected against ground faults by a one-

pole GFCI because the current returning to the source through the neutral cannot be effectively split to

prevent the Qwik-Gard GFCI from tripping under normal use.

Figure 2: Typical One-Pole Qwik-Gard GFCI Wiring

NAB

120/240 Vac Source

Hot Duplex

Receptacle

Neutral

Equipment Ground

S/N

GND

120 V

240 V

One-Pole

Circuit

Breaker

with

GFCI or EPD

120 V 120 V

07303106

249 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

Two-Pole Qwik-Gard GFCIs

Two-pole Qwik-Gard GFCIs can be installed on a 120/240 Vac 1Ø3W system, the 120/240 Vac portion

of a 120/240 Vac 3Ø4W system, or two phases and neutral of a 208Y/120 Vac 3Ø4W system.

Regardless of the application, connections must be made to two “hot” busses and the panel neutral

assembly. When installed on these systems, protection is provided for two-wire 240 Vac or 208 Vac

circuit, three-wire 120/240 Vac or 208Y/120 Vac circuits and 120 Vac multiwire circuits.

The 60 A QO260GFI and QOB260GFI GFCIs are limited for use on 208 Vac and 240 Vac two-wire

systems. These GFCIs require the panel neutral connection to provide the 120 Vac power necessary

for testing the ground-fault circuitry.

Figure 3: Typical Two-Pole Qwik-Gard GFCI Wiring

NAB

120/240 Vac Source

Hot B

Hot A

Equipment Ground

S/N

GND

120 V

240 V

Two-Pole

Circuit Breaker

with

GFCI or EPD

120 V 240 V

250 V Duplex

Receptacle

07303103

Two-Wire 240 Vac or 208 Vac

Equipment Ground

GND

S/N

120 V

NAB

120/208 Vac or

120/240 Vac Source

Two-Pole

Circuit Breaker

with

GFCI or EPD

Hot B

Neutral

Load

Hot A

120 V

240 V

Three-Wire 120/240 Vac or 208Y/120 Vac Circuits

15–50 A Only

07303104

120 V

Neutral

Duplex

Receptacle

Duplex

Receptacle

Two-Pole

Circuit Breaker

with

GFCI or EPD

240 V

120 V

120/208 Vac or

120/240 Vac Source

Equipment Ground

Hot A

Hot B

S/N

GND

120 V

120 Vac Multiwire Circuits

15–50 A Only

07303105

250 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

QO-EPD and QOB-EPD Equipment Protection Devices

QO-EPD and QOB-EPD circuit breakers are one- and two-pole thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with

integral equipment ground-fault protection. These circuit breakers are rated for use on 120/240 Vac

and 120/208 Vac electrical systems to provide overcurrent protection, short-circuit protections and

equipment ground-fault protection.

EPD circuit breakers are built in accordance with UL Standard 489. QO-EPD and QOB-EPD circuit

breakers are not designed to protect people from the hazards of electrical shock. The ground-fault

protection level is 30 milliamperes to protect electrical equipment such as heat trace tape.

QO-EPD and QOB-EPD circuit breakers include a self-contained means of testing the ground-fault

circuitry. If the circuit breaker is connected correctly, with the pigtail connected to the neutral assembly

in the load center or panelboard, pressing the test button will trip the circuit breaker and show a trip

indication. EPD circuit breakers must be operational at 85% of the rated voltage.

EPD circuit breakers provide the same branch circuit protection as standard QO and QOB circuit

breakers. They are longer than standard QO circuit breakers, and thus require more gutter space. All

QO electrical accessories except shunt trip and all QO mechanical accessories are available for QO-

EPD and QOB-EPD circuit breakers.

QO-SWN and QOB-SWN Switch Neutral Circuit Breakers

The QO-SWN and QOB-SWN switch neutral circuit breakers are designed to protect gas pump

assemblies.These circuit breakers have provisions for switching the grounded conductor as outlined in

the National Electrical Code.

The QO-SWN and QOB-SWN circuit breakers are designed to simultaneously open all grounded and

ungrounded conductors. All branch circuit wiring is terminated on the load side of the circuit breaker.

The panel neutral connection is made using the pigtail lead built into the circuit breaker. Two-wire

circuit breakers require two pole spaces; three-wire circuit breaker require three pole spaces.

QO-SWN and QOB-SWN circuit breakers are available with the complete range of QO accessories.

QOT Tandem Circuit Breakers

QOT tandem circuit breakers are manufactured so two one-pole, thermal-magnetic circuit breakers

occupy only one QO pole space. They are used in applications where circuit loading is light and/or

noncontinuous, as in residential applications. QOT circuit breakers are available in 15/15 ampere,

15/20 ampere and 20/20 ampere construction.

QOT circuit breakers have a mounting cam to limit their installation in QO load centers to only those

positions having a mounting rail slot. This physically limits the total number of circuit beakers permitted

in the panelboard for safe operation.

Each one-pole QOT circuit breaker provides individual switching and tripping action. Individual trip,

two-pole circuit with common switching may be assembled by using a handle tie (kit QOTHT) between

two adjacent QOT circuit breakers.

07303099

2 Wire and 3 Wire

QO-SWN Circuit Breaker

07303095

1P QOT Tandem

Circuit Breaker

Mounting

Cam

251 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

QO-PL and QOB-PL Powerlink® Remotely Operated CIrcuit Breakers

QO-PL and QOB-PL circuit breakers combine overcurrent and short-circuit protection with remote

switching. These circuit breakers are ideal for lighting loads or wherever power switching is required.

These circuit breakers are designed to be used with many types of control devices, from simple push

buttons to programmable controllers and energy management systems. QO-PL and QOB-PL circuit

breakers have all of the features of standard QO circuit breakers including Visi-Trip®, plus the added

ability to be remotely switched on and off. They are rated for a minimum of 30,000 remote operations.

Remote switching is accomplished using a 24 Vdc power supply. Square D offers QOPLPS and

QOBPLPS power supplies. These power supplies mount directly in any QO load center or NQ or

NQOD panelboard just like a QO circuit breaker. They provide power to switch up to three QO-PL or

QOB-PL circuit breakers simultaneously. A minimum of two seconds recharge time must be allowed

between operation for non-simultaneous operations of circuit breakers being supplied by a power

supply.

QO Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers

QO arc-fault circuit interrupters (AFCI) quickly detects a wide range of arc-fault conditions, recognizes

the nature and specific wave-form of an arc fault and trips the circuit breaker. Traditional circuit

breakers and fuses are designed to detect overloads and short circuits. Arc-fault circuit breakers are

designed to detect overloads, short circuits and arc faults.

An arc-fault circuit breaker opens the circuit and stops the arcing and high intensity heat before a fire is

likely to ignite. It is designed with the same quick-open and Visi-Trip® features and reliability of other

QO circuit breaker products, fits into most existing Square D load centers, and can generally be used

as a direct replacement for a standard Square D circuit breakers. The AFCI overall size is larger than

an equivalent QO circuit breaker.

Arc-fault circuit breakers:

•Have special microprocessor-based arc identification to differentiate necessary operational arcs

(associated with loads such as electric motors, switches and receptacles) from actual arc faults

which can cause damage and fires.

•Differentiate true arc faults from chopped wave-forms associated with switched-mode power

supplies on electrical appliances, computers and lamp dimmers.

QO AFCI's are available as Branch Feeder Type and Combination Type. Branch AFCI circuit breakers

provide arc-fault protection of the branch circuit wiring. Combination AFCI circuit breakers provide arc-

fault protection for the branch circuit and also provides protection of cord sets and power-supply cords.

The AFCI type required for an installation is generally governed by the installation codes which are

adopted by local inspection authorities. Consult local building codes and inspection authorities to

determine which type is required in your area.

07303097

1P QO-PL

Circuit Breaker

07303096

2P QO-PL

Circuit Breaker

07303098

QOPLPS

Power Supply

Table 4: Maximum Circuit Breakers per Power Supply

Voltage Maximum QO-PL and QOB-PL Circuit Breakers

Recommended per QOPLPS1

1At ambient temperature of -25° through 40°C.

208Y/120 Vac 2

240 Vac 3

07303100

1P QO-AFI

Circuit Breaker

252 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Special Application Circuit Breakers

07/2008

Figure 4: Typical AFCI Circuit Breaker Installation

120/240 Vac Source

Hot Duplex

Receptacle

Neutral

Equipment Ground

S/N

GND

120 V

240 V

One-pole

AFCI

Circuit

Breaker

120 V 120 V

07303107

AFCI Circuit Breaker Installation

253 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Accessories

07/2008

Accessories

Most QO and QOB circuit breakers can be supplied with electrical accessories factory-installed on

one-, two- or three-pole circuit breakers. Electrical accessories are not available on AFCI circuit

breakers.

Handle accessories are also available for field installation on QO and QOB circuit breakers. All field-

installed handle accessories must be ordered separately.

Electrical Accessories

Only one electrical accessory can be installed per circuit breaker, and are factory-installed only. All

electrical accessories occupy one additional pole space. The proper suffix number must be added to

the circuit breaker catalog number to order an accessory. No field modification or field installation is

possible on electrical accessories.

Shunt Trip

The shunt trip is used to trip the circuit breaker from a remote location by using a tripping coil energized

from a separate circuit. When energized by a push-button or other pilot device, the shunt trip caused

the circuit breaker to trip. The handle moves to the tripped position and the Visi-Trip® indicator

appears. The trip coil has a coil clearing contact to break the coil circuit when the circuit breaker trips.

Shunt trips are available for QO and QOB circuit breakers only with standard control voltage ratings up

to 240 Vac or 24 Vdc. (Shunt trips are not available on QO and QOB GFCI, AFCI, EPD and miniature

switches.) Shunt trips operate at 75% or more of rated voltage.

Table 5: Factory-Installed Electrical Accessory Suffix Numbers

Accessory Description Voltage Coil

Burden

Max.

Load

Catalog

Suffix

Shunt Trip

Trips the circuit breaker from a remote location by means of a trip

coil energized from a separate circuit. All shunt trips will operate

at 75% or more of rated voltage.

• For use with momentary or maintained push button.

• Not available on QO-GF or QO-EPD circuit breakers.

• Shunt trip terminals accept (2) 14–12 AWG Cu leads.

12 Vac/dc

24 Vac/dc

60 VA

168 VA —1042

120 Vac

208 Vac

240 Vac

72 VA

228 VA

288 VA

—1021

Auxiliary Switch

“A” Contact

Circuit breaker open—One contact only, opens when circuit

breaker is off or tripped. 5 A max at 120 Vac. 120 Vac — 5 A 1200

Auxiliary Switch

“B” Contact

Circuit breaker open—One contact only, closed when circuit

breaker is off or tripped. 5 A max at 120 Vac. 120 Vac — 5 A 1201

Alarm Switch

Used with control circuits and is actuated only when the circuit

breaker has tripped. Standard construction includes a normally-

open contact.

• Alarm switch terminals accept (2) 14–12 AWG Cu leads.

120 Vac — 5 A 2100

Figure 5: Shunt Trip Wiring Diagram

Accessory

Terminals

Shunt Trip

Housing

Coil Clearing Switch

(opens when circuit breaker

is shunt-tripped)

Circuit

Breaker

Shunt Trip Coil

07303108

254 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Accessories

07/2008

Auxiliary Switch

The auxiliary switch accessory monitors the circuit breaker contact status and provides a remote signal

indicating whether the circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. When the circuit breaker is off or

tripped, the auxiliary switch with an “A” contact is open and the auxiliary switch with a “B” contact is

closed. When the circuit breaker is on, the auxiliary switch with an “A” contact is closed and the

auxiliary switch with a “B” contact is open.

Auxiliary switches are available for QO and QOB circuit breakers and miniature switches. (Auxiliary

switches are not available on QO and QOB AFI and CAFI products.)

Alarm Switch

The alarm switch accessory monitors the circuit breaker trip status and is used to provide a remote

warning signal indicating that the circuit breaker has tripped. This signal can be used in conjunction

with a horn, pilot light, or some other indicator.

The contact on the standard alarm switch is open when the circuit breaker is in the off or on position

and is closed when the circuit breaker is in the tripped position.

Alarm switches are actuated when the circuit breaker has tripped as a result of an overload, short

circuit or shunt trip operation. Alarm switches are available for QO and QOB circuit breakers and

miniature switches. (Alarm switches are not available on QO and QOB AFI and CAFI products.)

Figure 6: Auxiliary Switch Wiring Diagrams

Figure 7: Alarm Switch Wiring Diagram

"A" Contact "B" Contact

Com

Power

BCom

Power

07303109

Circuit Breaker OFF or Tripped Circuit Breaker OFF or Tripped—Light B “On”

Circuit Breaker ON—Light A “On”

Circuit Breaker ON

07303110

Circuit Breaker OFF or ON

Normally-open Alarm Switch Circuit Breaker Tripped

255 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Accessories

07/2008

Handle Accessories

Field-installed handle accessories are also available.

Table 6: Field-Installable Handle Accessories

Accessory Description Catalog

Number

Handle Tie

Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac 1P QO circuit breakers to independent trip 2P. QO1HT

Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac 1P side-by-side QOT circuit breakers to

independent trip 2P. QOTHT

Handle Clamp Clamp for holding QO 1P handle in ON or OFF position. QO1LO

Clamp for holding QO or Q1 (1P, 2P, or 3P) circuit breaker handle in ON or OFF position. HLO1

Handle Padlock

Attachment for

Padlocking in ON

or OFF Position

Loose attachment for padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in ON or OFF position. QOHPL

Fixed attachment for padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in ON or OFF position. QO1PA

Attachment for padlocking 1P side-by-side QOT circuit breaker in ON or OFF position. QOTHPA

Fixed attachment for padlocking 2P QO-GFI circuit breaker in ON or OFF position. GF12PA

Loose attachment for padlocking 2P and 3P standard QO circuit breaker in ON or OFF

position. QO1HPL

Fixed attachment for padlocking 2P and 3P standard QO circuit breaker in ON or OFF

position. QO1PL

Handle Padlock

Attachment for

Padlocking in OFF

Position

Fixed attachment for padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in OFF position only. QO1PAF

Fixed attachment for padlocking 2P and 3P QO circuit breakers in OFF position only. QO2PAF

Fixed attachment for padlocking 1P QO-GFI, QO-AFCI and QO-EPD circuit breakers in OFF

position only. QOGFI1PAF

Fixed attachment for padlocking 2P QO-GFI and QO-EPD circuit breakers in OFF position

only. QOGFI12PAF

Sub-Feed Lugs

60 A 2P plug-on—2 spaces required (6–2 Al/Cu) QO60SL

125 A 2P plug-on—2 spaces required (12–2/0 Al/Cu) QO2125SL

225 A 2P plug-on—4 spaces required (4–300 Al/Cu) QO2225SL

125 A 3P plug-on—3 spaces required (12–2/0 Al/Cu) QO3125SL

Mechanical

Interlock

Attachment

For interlocking the handles of two 2P or one 2P and one 1P QO and Q1 circuit breaker

mounted side-by-side so that only one circuit breaker can be ON at a time (Not for QOU) QO2DTI

Mechanical

Interlock with

Retaining Kit

For securing two adjacent back-fed circuit breakers in dual power supply applications. Can

be used with two 2P or one 2P and one 1P QO circuit breaker in QO816L100 load center. QO2DTIM

Figure 8: Handle Accessories

QO2PAF

07303129

QO1PA

07303119

QO1PL

07303120

QO1HT

07303121

QO1LO

07303122

QO1PAF

07303123

QO2DTI

07303124

QO1HPL

07303125

QOTHPA

07303126

HLO1

07303127

QOHPL

07303128

QOGFI2PAF

07303119

QOTHT

07303131

256 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Accessories

07/2008

Handle Tie

The handle tie accessory converts any two adjacent one-pole QO circuit breakers to one independent

trip multi-pole circuit breaker.

Handle Lock-Off (Clamp)

The handle lock-off accessories fasten the handle in the ON or OFF position. These handle lock-offs

cannot be padlocked.

Handle Padlock Attachment

The handle padlock attachment allows padlocking the circuit breaker handles in either the ON or OFF

position or in the OFF only position. Handle padlock attachments are available in two styles: removable

and fixed.

The removable style is intended to be a temporary device. Once work on the circuit breaker has been

completed, the attachment can be removed from the circuit breaker to resume normal operation.

The fixed style is intended to be a permanent device. Once the work on the circuit has been

completed, the padlock can be removed for the circuit breaker to resume normal operation, but the

attachment stays in place.

Mechanical Interlock Attachment

The mechanical interlock attachment locks the handles of two adjacent circuit breakers to prevent both

circuit breakers from being on at the same time. Both circuit breakers may be switched to the off

position with the mechanical interlock in place.

Mechanical Interlock Attachment with Retaining Kit

The mechanical interlock attachment locks the handles of two adjacent back-fed circuit breakers in

dual power supply applications.

257 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

Trip Curves

The tripping characteristics of QO and QOB circuit breakers can be represented by a characteristic

tripping curve that plots tripping time versus current level. The curve shows the amount of time

required by a circuit breaker to trip at a given overcurrent level. The curve has a performance band that

is bound by a minimum and a maximum value of clearing time. Total clearing time is the sum of the

sensing time, unlatching time, mechanical operating time and arcing time of the circuit breaker. For

currents in excess of 135% of the circuit breaker rating at rated ambient temperature (40°C), the circuit

breaker will automatically open the circuit within limits specified by the band.

Thermal Tripping Characteristics

The upper left portion of each trip curve displays the thermal response of the circuit breaker. On low-

fault current levels, up to the magnetic tripping level, thermal tripping occurs when a bimetal in the

circuit breaker responds to heat associated with the overcurrent. The bimetal deflects, unlatching the

mechanism and mechanically causing the circuit breaker to trip and open the circuit. The greater the

overcurrent, the faster the circuit breaker will operate to clear the circuit.

Magnetic Tripping Characteristics

The lower right portion of each trip curve displays the magnetic tripping response of the circuit breaker.

This takes place when overcurrents of sufficient magnitude operate in an internal magnetic armature

which unlatches the mechanism. Magnetic tripping occurs with no intentional time delay.

Figure 9: Typical QO Trip Curve

Thermal Tripping

Magnetic Tripping

258 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

259 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

260 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

261 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

262 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

1.5

700

150

200

300

400

600

800

900

2000

3000

4000

5000

7000

8000

9000

10000

100

6000

1500

1000

500

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

6000

7000

8000

9000

5000

10000

1.5

100

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

TIME IN SECONDS

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

TIME IN SECONDS

1/2 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1/2 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

150

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

1 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

MAXIMUM INDIVIDUAL POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4, 1991

40 A

35 A

30 A MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

4035

MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 730-5

CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number

Prex Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles

102103K-OQ

2 ,1042/02103HQ ,HV-OQ

204203H-OQ

QO-HID, QO-VH, QH 30 240 3

QO, QOU, QO-HID 30–40 120/240 2

2042/02104–03LP-OQ

304204–03UOQ ,OQ

202104 & 03NWS-OQ

3042/02104 & 03NWS-OQ

This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The

EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during

coordination studies.

All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.

Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.

Curve No. 0730TC0105

January 2001

Drawing No. B48095-730-05

(Replaces 0730TC8705)

263 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

1.5

700

150

200

300

400

600

800

900

2000

3000

4000

5000

7000

8000

9000

10000

100

6000

1500

1000

500

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

6000

7000

8000

9000

5000

10000

1.5

100

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

TIME IN SECONDS

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

TIME IN SECONDS

1/2 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1/2 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

150

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

1 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

MAXIMUM INDIVIDUAL POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4, 1991

60 A

70 A

50 A

45 A

MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

70 60

QO ®MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 730-6

CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number

Prex Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles

QO-HID 45–50 120/240 1, 2

QOU 45–50 240 3

QO-PL 45–60 120/240 2

QO, QOU 45–70 120/240 1, 2

304207–54OQ

202105NWS-OQ

QO-SWN 50 120/240 3

QOM 50–60 120/240 2

QOM-VH 50–60 120/240 2

This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The

EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during

coordination studies.

All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.

Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.

Curve No. 0730TC0106

January 2001

Drawing No. B48095-730-06

(Replaces 730-6, dated May, 1987)

264 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

265 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

266 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

267 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

268 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

269 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

270 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

1.5

700

150

200

300

400

600

800

900

2000

3000

4000

5000

7000

8000

9000

10000

100

6000

1500

1000

500

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

6000

7000

8000

9000

5000

10000

1.5

100

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

TIME IN SECONDS

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

TIME IN SECONDS

1/2 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1/2 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

150

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

1 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 1991

MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

FAMILY MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 910-2

CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number

Prex Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles

QO/B-GFI, QO/B-VHGFI,

QO/B-AFI, QO/B-VHAFI 20 120 1

This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The

EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during

coordination studies.

All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.

Te rminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.

Curve No. 0910TC0302

January 2003

Drawing No. B48095-910-02

(Replaces 0910TC0102)

271 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

1.5

700

150

200

300

400

600

800

900

2000

3000

4000

5000

7000

8000

9000

10000

100

6000

1500

1000

500

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

6000

7000

8000

9000

5000

10000

1.5

100

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

TIME IN SECONDS

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

TIME IN SECONDS

1/2 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1/2 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

150

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

1 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

15 A

20 A

25 A

MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

20 1525

MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 1991

FAMILY MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 910-3

CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number

Prex Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles

QO-EPD, QO-GFI 15 120/240 2

QO-EPD, QO-GFI 20 & 25 120/240 2

QO-EPD, QO-GFI, QO-VHGFI 25 120 1

This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The

EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during

coordination studies.

All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.

Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.

Curve No. 0910TC0103

November 2001

Drawing No. B48095-910-03

(Replaces 0910TC8503)

272 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

1.5

700

150

200

300

400

600

800

900

2000

3000

4000

5000

7000

8000

9000

10000

100

6000

1500

1000

500

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

6000

7000

8000

9000

5000

10000

1.5

100

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

TIME IN SECONDS

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

TIME IN SECONDS

1/2 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1/2 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

150

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

1 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

30 A MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 1991

FAMILY MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 910-4

CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number

Prex Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles

QO-EPD, QO-GFI, QO-VHGFI 30 120 1

QO-EPD, QO-GFI 30 120/240 2

This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The

EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during

coordination studies.

All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.

Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.

Curve No. 0910TC0104

November 2001

Drawing No. B48095-910-04

(Replaces 0910TC8504)

273 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Trip Curves

07/2008

1.5

700

150

200

300

400

600

800

900

2000

3000

4000

5000

7000

8000

9000

10000

100

6000

1500

1000

500

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

6000

7000

8000

9000

5000

10000

1.5

100

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

TIME IN SECONDS

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.01

.015

.02

.03

.04

.05

.06

.07

.08

.09

.15

1.5

100

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

TIME IN SECONDS

1/2 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1/2 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

150

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

150

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT

1 CYCLE

(60 Hz)

1 CYCLE

(50 Hz)

60 A

50 A

40 A

MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME

(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

50 4060

MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES

AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 1991

FAMILY MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 910-5

CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION

Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number

Prex Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles

QO-EPD, QO-GFI 40–60 a120/240 2

a60 A suitable only for feeding 240 Vac, 2 wire loads on 120/240 Vac, 1 φ3W systems.

This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. The

EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used during

coordination studies.

All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.

Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.

Curve No. 0910TC0105

November 2001

Drawing No. B48095-910-05

(Replaces 0910TC8705)

274 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Dimensions

07/2008

Dimensions

Figure 10: Type QO Plug-On Circuit Breaker

2.23

2.09

0.53

0.75

19 0.75

3.5

0.75

0.53

1.34

1.48

0.38

0.59

0.73

3.00

2.25

2.75

2.92

0.25

21°

0.16

2.91

2.31

26°

3°

0.94

22°

Tripped

OFF

Reset

07303114

Figure 11: Type QOB Bolt-On Circuit Breaker

0.75

19 2.94

07303115

275 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Dimensions

07/2008

Figure 12: Type QO-GFI Circuit Breaker

1.49

2.31

4.12

103

2.91

457

Pigtail: 0.744

07303116

Figure 13: Type QO-AFI and QO-AFCI Circuit Breakers

4.75

121

457

2.31

2.90

Pigtail:

0.744

073033117

276 of 292

QO® and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers

Dimensions

07/2008

Figure 14: Type QO-PL Remote Control Circuit Breaker

Common Trip 30

1.49

0.744

2.31

4.55

116

457

2.95

Pigtail:

07303118

277 of 292

Replaces 0730CT9801

07/2008

Schneider Electric USA

3700 Sixth St. SW

Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 USA

1-888-Square D

1-888-778-2733

www.schneider-electric.us

278 of 292

Surgelogic®

IMA Surge Protective Device (SPD)

Dispositivo de protección contra sobretensiones

transitorias IMA

Dispositif de protection contre les surtensions

transitoires IMA

Instruction Bulletin

Boletín de instrucciones

Directives d'utilisation

8222-0050E

Retain for Future Use. /

Conservar para uso futuro. /

À conserver pour usage ultérieur.

279 of 292

ENGLISH

Surgelogic® IMA SPD 8222-0050E

Precautions 11/2009

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Precautions

Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) can lose their ability to block power system

voltage and attempt to draw excessive current from the line.This SPD is

equipped with overcurrent and overtemperature components that will

automatically disconnect the surge suppression elements from the mains should

the surge suppression elements reach end of life. Tripping of the branch circuit

breaker or fuse feeding the SPD can occur when the surge suppression

elements reach end of life. Mitigate the tripping of the branch circuit breaker or

fuse feeding the SPD by coordinating the surge suppression elements with the

branch circuits.

For the purposes of coordination, the SPD is equipped with overcurrent

components that will limit the per phase I2t, Iapparent, Ip, and Ith values to those

listed in tables 1 and 2 when connected to a power system with a short-circuit

current rating not exceeding 200,000 A.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified

electrical personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this

equipment.

• This equipment must be effectively grounded per all applicable codes.

Use an equipment-grounding conductor to connect this equipment to

the power system ground.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

LOSS OF BRANCH CIRCUIT POWER/LOSS OF SURGE

SUPPRESSION

• Ensure that the branch circuit breaker or fuse trip characteristic has

been coordinated with the overcurrent components inside the SPD

(See Tables 1 and 2).

• Perform periodic inspection of the SPD status indicator lights as part of

the preventative maintenance schedule.

• Promptly service the SPD when an alarm state exists.

• Use dry contacts to signal an alarm state to the central supervisory

system for unmanned, inaccessible, or critical installations.

• Use multiple SPDs to achieve redundancy for critical applications.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.

280 of 292

8222-0050E Surgelogic® IMA SPD

11/2009 Precautions

ENGLISH

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Table 1: SPD Without Optional Sine Wave Tracking Module

SPD Device Per Phase

I2tIapparent IpIth

TVS_IMA12 through

TVS_IMA24

175 kA2

seconds 17,000 A RMS 40,000 A RMS 220 A

TVS_IMA32 through

TVS_IMA48

700 kA2

seconds 34,000 A RMS 80,000 A RMS 440 A

Table 2: SPD With Optional Sine Wave Tracking Module

SPD Device Per Phase

I2tIapparent IpIth

TVS_IMA12 through

TVS_IMA24 and

240 kA2

seconds 21,500 A RMS 48,000 A RMS 260 A

TVS_IMA32 through

TVS_IMA48

825 kA2

seconds 37,500 A RMS 88,000 A RMS 480 A

CAUTION

LOSS OF SURGE SUPPRESSION

• Do not energize the SPDs until the electrical system is completely

installed, inspected, tested, and all conductors connected and

functional, including the neutral.

• Verify the voltage rating of the device and system before energizing the

surge protective device.

• Perform high-potential insulation testing, or any other tests where SPD

components will be subjected to voltages higher than their rated turn-on

voltage, with the neutral and SPD disconnected from the power source.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.

281 of 292

ENGLISH

Surgelogic® IMA SPD 8222-0050E

Operation 11/2009

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Operation

LED Status Indicators The SPD diagnostic display panel shows the status of each MA module with

diagnostically controlled green/red LEDs. If a unit is operating correctly, all the

phase LEDs will be illuminated green. To test the integrity of the diagnostics for

each phase, push the button below the phase LEDs on the diagnostic display

panel. The green LED will turn red and the alarm will sound, if the alarm is

enabled. Releasing the test button will complete the test; the red LED will turn

green and the alarm will shut off.

If an inoperable condition occurs on any phase, the audible alarm sounds and

the corresponding phase LED on the diagnostic display panel is illuminated red.

This indicates that the device needs service by qualified electrical personnel.

The audible alarm can be silenced, until a qualified person is able to evaluate

and service the SPD, by pressing the alarm enable/disable button. The alarm

will silence and the green alarm LED will not be lit. The red phase LED will

continue to be illuminated until the inoperative condition has been cleared.

On an MA module (see Figure 1), if either LED is not lit, the module should be

replaced. If both green LEDs are not lit and the diagnostic display panel has

power, then power has been lost to that phase or the module should be replaced

(refer to Table 4 on page 7). Refer to the final equipment instruction bulletin for

MA module disconnection and access instructions.

When power is applied to the SPD and one or more of the diagnostic display

panel LEDs are red, and one or more MA module LEDs are out, the appropriate

MA module should be replaced. Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 8 for proper

troubleshooting procedures.

Surge Counter The surge counter displays the number of transient voltage surges since the

counter was last reset. The counter is battery powered to retain memory in the

event of a power loss to the diagnostic display panel.

To reset the surge counter to zero:

1. Remove all power from this equipment.

2. Remove covers as necessary to gain access to the diagnostic circuit board.

3. Press the small switch located on the underside of the diagnostic circuit

board (near the RJ45 connectors; see Figure 3:). This will reset the counter

to zero.

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this

equipment.

• This equipment must be effectively grounded per all applicable codes. Use

an equipment-grounding conductor to connect this equipment to the power

system ground.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Figure 1: MA Module LEDs

Left green LED lit:

L-G suppression

is operating.

Left green LED

not lit:

Loss of surge

suppression from

L-G

Right green LED lit:

L-N suppression is

operating.

Right green LED

not lit:

Loss of surge

suppression from

L-N

282 of 292

8222-0050E Surgelogic® IMA SPD

11/2009 Operation

ENGLISH

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Dry Contacts

The IMA series SPD is provided with dry contacts. The connection for the dry

contacts is located on the back of the diagnostic display panel (lower right

corner). The dry contacts are 3-position, Form “C” type with Normally Open,

Normally Closed and Common connections. The unpowered state shall be

closed between terminals NC and COM. This is also the alarm condition. The

opposite state, closed between terminals NO and COM, indicates that power is

on to the unit and that no alarm condition exists (See Table 3).

Figure 2: Three-Phase Diagnostic Display Panel with Surge Counter

Phase LEDs

On-Line diagnostic

push buttons

Surge counter

Alarm enable/disable

push button

Description of

phase LEDs

Alarm LED

Enable alarm

Disable alarm

Surge counter

reset switch

(on diagnostic

circuit board)

NOTE: Phase B is not present on single-phase

applications.

Figure 3: Rear of Diagnostic Circuit Board

Dry contacts

RJ45 Connectors

Surge counter

reset switch

(white)

Surge counter

reset switch (white)

Dry contacts

RJ45 Connectors

TVS3DSPHC

TVS6DSPHC

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Use 600 Vac rated dry contact wiring.

• Dry contact wiring must have less than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) exposed wire from

the dry contact block.

• Maintain at least 1.0 in. (25 mm) separation between dry contact wiring and

the power wiring in the enclosure.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

283 of 292

ENGLISH

Surgelogic® IMA SPD 8222-0050E

Operation 11/2009

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

These contacts can be used for remote indication of the SPD device’s operating

status to a computer interface board or emergency management system. Also,

these contacts are designed to work with the SPD remote monitor option

described below.

The contacts are designed for a maximum voltage of 24 Vdc / 24 Vac and a

maximum current of 2 A. Higher energy applications may require additional relay

implementation outside the SPD. Damage to the SPD’s relay caused by use with

energy levels in excess of those discussed in this instruction bulletin are not

covered by warranty. For application questions, contact the Surgelogic

Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Remote Monitor Option The option has two LEDs, one red and one green, and an audible alarm with an

enable/disable switch. Normal status is a lit green LED, and no audible alarm.

To test the integrity of the remote monitor, press the push-to-test switch.

The green LED will turn off, the red LED will turn on, and the alarm will sound, if

the alarm is enabled. Releasing the switch will complete the test; the red LED

will turn off, the green LED will turn on and the alarm will shut off. If suppression

on any phase is lost, the green LED will turn off, the red LED will turn on and an

alarm sounds. The audible alarm can be silenced by moving the alarm

enable/disable switch to the disable position. The alarm will silence and the

green alarm LED will not be lit. The red LED will continue to be illuminated until

the inoperative condition had been cleared.

The remote monitor includes a 120 Vac to 12 Vdc adapter with a six-foot power

cord. Connections are made to the SPD diagnostic display panel with Form “C”,

3-position dry contacts (provided) and the appropriate length of solid or stranded

30 to 14 AWG wire (not provided).

Table 3: Dry Contact Configuration

Alarm Contact

Terminals Contact State with

Power Removed

NC Normally closed

COM Common

NO Normally open

Figure 4: Remote Monitor Option (TVS12RMU)

= OK = Fault / Falla / Défaut

www.SquareD.com • 8220-0037A • Made in USA / Hecho en E.U.A. / Fabriqué aux É.-U.

Bouton pousser pour vérifier

Monitor Remoto / Moniteur À Distance

[63,5]

2.500

[31,8]

1.25

[88,9]

3.500

[100,3]

3.950

[5,86]

0.230

[5,86]

0.460

[4,75]

2x Ø 0.187

[111,76]

4.400

[3,3]

0.130

[28,58]

1.125

in.

[mm]

120 V power cord

Dry contacts

284 of 292

8222-0050E Surgelogic® IMA SPD

11/2009 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

ENGLISH

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Maintenance and

Troubleshooting

Preventive Maintenance Inspect the SPD periodically to maintain reliable system performance and

continued transient voltage surge suppression. Periodically check the state of

the diagnostic display panel LED status indicators. Routinely use the built-in

diagnostics to inspect for inoperative modules.

Replacement Modules

DANGER

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E.

• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside

equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.

• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this

equipment.

• This equipment must be effectively grounded per all applicable codes. Use

an equipment-grounding conductor to connect this equipment to the power

system ground.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Table 4: EMA Series Replacement Modules

System

Voltage

Peak Surge

Current Rating

(kA) Phase A Phase B Phase C

120/240 V,

1-phase,

3-wire

120 MA1IMA12 — MA1IMA12

160 MA1IMA16 — MA1IMA16

240 MA1IMA24 — MA1IMA24

208Y/120 V,

3-phase,

4-wire 1

1208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127.

120 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA12

160 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA16

240 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA24

120/240 V,

3-phase,

4-wire 2

2High-leg delta (Phase B modules are different than Phase A and Phase C modules).

120 MA1IMA12 MA3IMA12 MA1IMA12

160 MA1IMA16 MA3IMA16 MA1IMA16

240 MA1IMA24 MA3IMA24 MA1IMA24

480Y/277 V,

3-phase,

4-wire 3

3480Y/277 series applies to the following voltages 380Y/220, 400Y/230, and 415Y/240.

120 MA4IMA12 MA4IMA12 MA4IMA12

160 MA4IMA16 MA4IMA16 MA4IMA16

240 MA4IMA24 MA4IMA24 MA4IMA24

600/347 V,

3-phase,

4-wire

120 MA8IMA12 MA8IMA12 MA8IMA12

160 MA8IMA16 MA8IMA16 MA8IMA16

240 MA8IMA24 MA8IMA24 MA8IMA24

285 of 292

ENGLISH

Surgelogic® IMA SPD 8222-0050E

Maintenance and Troubleshooting 11/2009

For troubleshooting, call the Surgelogic Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

Troubleshooting If a module shows two green indicator lights and the display panel shows a red

phase indicator light, follow the Troubleshooting Flow Chart in Figure 5 below.

Replacement Parts The following replacement parts are available. For ordering information please

contact your local distributor or refer to the product catalog.

•MA modules. Replacement instructions are included with the replacement

parts.

•Diagnostic display panel assemblies. Replacement instructions are included

with the replacement parts.

Figure 5: Troubleshooting Flow Chart

START

Red phase

LED(s) lit.

Alarm on?

Is alarm

Enable/Disable

LED on?

Press alarm

Enable/Disable

switch. Is

alarm on?

Is alarm LED

on?

YES

Check

patch cable

connections. Is

Red LED(s)

on?

Check the

voltage on

each phase. Is

the voltage

correct?

All modules

LEDs on?

Possible diagnostic

display board failure.

Contact Technical

Assistance at

1-800-577-7353 for

troubleshooting.

YES

YES YES

YES

Check the power

utility feed and

verify voltage levels.

Replace module(s)

that do not have

LEDs lit.

Energize SPD and

verify proper

connection.

NOTE: For further assistance, call the Surgelogic

Technical Assistance Group at 1-800-577-7353.

286 of 292

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified

personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of

the use of this material.

8222-0050E 11/2009

Replaces 8222-0050D, 10/2002

Schneider Electric

1751 S. 4800 W.

Salt Lake City, UT 84104 USA

1-888-SquareD

(1-888-778-2733)

www.schneider-electric.us

8222-0050E Surgelogic® IMA SPD

11/2009

Square D® is a trademark or registered trademark of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used

herein are the property of their respective owners.

ENGLISH

287 of 292

288 of 292

Bulletin No. 8222-0071A

12/02

Raleigh, NC, USA

Diagnostic Display Panel Replacement

IMA Series Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS)

Class 1310

Instruction Bulletin

1. Verify that the replacement diagnostic display has the correct catalog

number. The catalog number is found on the back of the diagnostic

display assembly. (See Table 1)

2. Mark the RJ45 patch cables (if they are not already marked) with the

appropriate A, B and C phase. Unplug the RJ45 patch cables from the

diagnostic display assembly (and dry contact wires if used).

3. Remove the 4 nuts holding the diagnostic display panel to the cover/door.

4. Carefully remove the old diagnostic display assembly.

5. Install the new diagnostic display assembly, using the new nuts that are

provided. (See Figure 1)

6. Plug the RJ45 patch cables into the new diagnostic display assembly.

Make sure that the patch cables labeled A, B and C are connected to the

correct RJ45 jacks.

7. Check that all connections are secure.

8. Replace the barrier, cover/door, and/or trim to the equipment.

9. Equipment may be re-energized after all of the above steps are complete.

Figure 1: Diagnostic Display Assembly Installation

PRECAUTIONS

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

• This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified

electrical personnel.

• This equipment must be effectively grounded per all applicable

codes. Use an equipment-grounding conductor to connect this

equipment to the power system ground.

• Disconnect all power supplying this equipment before working on or

inside it.

•Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power

is off.

• Replace the barrier and the door/cover before energizing.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.

DANGER

INSTALLATION

8220-0071-01

289 of 292

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by

qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any

consequences arising out of the use of this material.

Diagnostic Display Panel Replacement Bulletin No. 8222-0071A

IMA Series Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS) 12/02

Square D Company

8001 Highway 64 East

Knightdale, NC 27545

1-800-577-7353

www.squared.com

Table 1: Diagnostic Display Replacements

Catalog Number System Voltage Peak Surge

Current/Phase Option Applications

TVS1DSPH 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire 120 kA

160 kA

240 kA None Panelboards

Switchboards

Busway

TVS1DSPHC 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire 120 kA

160 kA

240 kA Surge Counter Panelboards

Switchboards

Busway

TVS3DSPH

208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire high leg delta

480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

347Y/600 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120 kA

160 kA

240 kA None

Panelboards

Switchboards

PZ4 Switchgear

Busway

TVS3DSPHC

208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire high leg delta

480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

347Y/600 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120 kA

160 kA

240 kA Surge Counter

Panelboards

Switchboards

PZ4 Switchgear

Busway

TVS4DSPH 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire 320 kA

480 kA None Switchboards

TVS4DSPHC 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire 320 kA

480 kA Surge Counter Switchboards

TVS6DSPH

208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire high leg delta

480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

347Y/600 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

320 kA

480 kA None Switchboards

PZ4 Switchgear

TVS6DSPHC

208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire high leg delta

480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

347Y/600 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

320 kA

480 kA Surge Counter Switchboards

PZ4 Switchgear

TVS1DSPV 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire 120 kA

160 kA

240 kA None I-LINE Plug-on Unit

MCC

TVS1DSPVC 120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire 120 kA

160 kA

240 kA Surge Counter I-LINE Plug-on Unit

MCC

TVS3DSPV

208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire high leg delta

480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

347Y/600 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120 kA

160 kA

240 kA None I-LINE Plug-on Unit

MCC

TVS3DSPVC

208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120/240 V, 1 phase, 3 wire high leg delta

480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

347Y/600 V, 3 phase, 4 wire

120 kA

160 kA

240 kA Surge Counter I-LINE Plug-on Unit

MCC

290 of 292

Bulletin No. 8222-0010A

August 2002

Raleigh, NC, USA

MA Module Replacement

IMA Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS)

Class 1310

Instruction Bulletin

1. Verify that all replacement modules have the correct catalog number. The

catalog number is found on the nameplate of each existing and

replacement module (see Figure 1) and on the TVSS device nameplate.

Use Table 1 to determine the correct replacement catalog number based

on the existing IMA TVSS system voltage and peak surge current rating.

Table 1: MA Module Replacements

System Voltage Peak Surge

Current Rating

Catalog Number

Phase A Phase B Phase C

120/240 V, 1 phase,

3 wire

120 kA MA1IMA12 empty MA1IMA12

160 kA MA1IMA16 empty MA1IMA16

240 kA MA1IMA24 empty MA1IMA24

208Y/120 V, 3 phase,

4 wire

120 kA MA1IMA12 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA12

160 kA MA1IMA16 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA16

240 kA MA1IMA24 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA24

120/240 V, 3 phase,

4 wire, high-leg delta

[1]

120 kA MA1IMA12 MA3IMA12 MA1IMA12

160 kA MA1IMA16 MA3IMA16 MA1IMA16

240 kA MA1IMA24 MA3IMA24 MA1IMA24

480Y/277 V, 3 phase,

4 wire

120 kA MA4IMA12 MA4IMA12 MA4IMA12

160 kA MA4IMA16 MA4IMA16 MA4IMA16

240 kA MA4IMA24 MA4IMA24 MA4IMA24

600Y/347 V, 3 phase,

4 wire

120 kA MA8IMA12 MA8IMA12 MA8IMA12

160 kA MA8IMA16 MA8IMA16 MA8IMA16

240 kA MA8IMA24 MA8IMA24 MA8IMA24

[1]

Phase B modules are different than Phase A and Phase C modules.

PRECAUTIONS

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE

• This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified

electrical personnel.

• This equipment must be effectively grounded per all applicable

codes. Use an equipment-grounding conductor to connect this

equipment to the power system ground.

• Disconnect all power supplying this equipment before working on or

inside it.

•Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power

is off.

• Replace the barrier and the door/cover before energizing.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.

DANGER

INSTALLATION

8222-0010-01

RJ45 patch cable connector

7/16 in. socket wrench

Phase A Phase B Phase C

Module

LEDs

Module nameplate

Figure 1: TVSS Device and Modules, Top View

291 of 292

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by

qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any

consequences arising out of the use of this material.

MA Module Replacement Bulletin No. 8222-0010A

IMA Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) August 2002

Square D Company

8001 Highway 64 East

Knightdale, NC 27545

1-800-577-7353

www.squared.com

2. Mark the RJ45 patch cable and the phase cable for the module to be

replaced (if it is not already marked) with the appropriate A, B, or C

phase. Unplug the module RJ45 patch cable from the module.

3. Use a suitable tool to prevent each 1/2 in. hex standoff from turning (see

Figure 3) and remove and discard the three 1/4-20 hex head bolts and

the three corresponding internal tooth lock washers of the module. It is

not necessary to remove the connecting phase cables from the lugs.

4. Carefully remove the module.

5. Install the new module, using the new hardware kit supplied (see Figure

3). Torque each 1/4-20 hex head bolt to 70 lb-in (8 N•m).

6. Attach the phase cable lug to the replacement module (A, B, or C phase

as marked in step 4).

7. Plug the RJ45 patch cable into the new module. Make sure that the

correct RJ45 patch cable labeled A, B, or C is connected.

8. Check that all connections are secure. Remove all tools and discarded

hardware from the unit.

9. Ensure that the RJ45 patch cables are not touching any internal

components.

10. Replace the barrier, cover/door, and/or trim to the equipment.

11. Equipment may be re-energized after all of the above steps are complete.

Display

panel

RJ45

connector

jacks

8222-0010-02

To module B

To module C

Module A

Module 

patch cables

Figure 2: Display Panel and RJ45 Patch Cables

Internal-tooth lock washers

(typical 3 places)

Module

Connecting phase cable

LEDs

1/2 in. hex standoffs (typical 3 places)

1/4-20 hex head bolts

(typical 3 places)

Lug set screw

RJ45 patch

cable connector

8222-0010-03

Figure 3: Module, Side View

292 of 292

86092 Catalog

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation